Financial MicroSystems, Inc. Reference Guide Version 6.3

Financial MicroSystems, Inc. Reference Guide Version 6.3

Client Ledger System documentation copyright 2012 Financial MicroSystems, Inc. All rights reserved. Absolutely no part of this documentation may be copied, photographed, reproduced, translated or reduced to any electronic medium without the express written consent of Financial MicroSystems, Inc. The software described in this documentation is furnished under a license agreement. Information contained in this documentation is subject to change without notice, and does not represent a commitment on the part of Financial MicroSystems, Inc. Financial MicroSystems, Inc. makes no warranties, either expressed or implied, regarding this computer software package, its merchantability, or its fitness for a specific purpose. The exclusion of implied warranties is not permitted by some states. The above exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty provides you with specific legal rights. There may be other rights which you have which vary from state to state. Client Ledger System is a trademark of Financial MicroSystems, Inc. Other brands and products are the trademarks of their respective holders and should be noted as such. First printing, August 1990. Second printing, August 1992. Third printing, April 1994. Fourth printing, November 1994. Fifth printing, November 1995. Sixth printing, November 1996. Seventh printing, October 1997. Eighth printing, October 1998. Ninth printing, October 1999. Tenth printing, November 2000. Eleventh printing, November 2001. Twelfth printing, December 2002. Thirteenth printing, December 2003. Fourteenth printing, March 2004. Fifteenth printing, December 2004. Sixteenth printing, December 2005. Seventeenth printing, December 2006. Eighteenth printing, November 2007. Nineteenth printing, November 2008. Twentieth printing, November 2009. Twenty-first printing. November 2010. Twenty-second printing. January 2012. Twenty-third printing. December 2012. Financial MicroSystems, Inc. 3000 Langford Road, Suite 2500 Norcross, GA 30071 Telephone: (770) 446-5709 Fax: (770) 446-1802 www.clientledgersystem.com

Table of Contents Chapter 1 CLS Main Menu Programs... 1-1 Accounting Transfer (AT)... 1-2 Computed Transactions (CT)... 1-33 Delete Transactions (DT)... 1-35 End of Period Processing (EP)... 1-36 Enter Transactions (ET)... 1-39 Ledger Consolidation (LC)... 1-61 Ledger Initialization (LI)... 1-63 Ledger Start-up (LS)... 1-105 Post Transactions (PT)... 1-107 Query Account Detail (QA)... 1-109 Query Transaction Detail (QT)... 1-113 System Initialization (SI)... 1-117 Worksheet Interface (WI)... 1-140 Chapter 2 CLS File Maintenance Programs... 2-1 Ledger Backup/Restore (BU)... 2-2 Department File Maintenance (DF)... 2-10 Department File List (DL)... 2-13 Description File Maintenance (DM)... 2-14 DOS Shell (DS)... 2-18 Lock File Release (LR)... 2-19 Master File Maintenance (MF)... 2-22 Master File List (ML)... 2-38 New Features in CLS (NF)... 2-41 Report File Maintenance (RF)... 2-42 Report File List (RL)... 2-46 Ledger Time-Tracker (TT)... 2-47 Verify File Integrity (VF)... 2-54 Chapter 3 CLS Report Processing Programs... 3-1 Batch Processing (BP)... 3-2 Bank Reconciliation (BR)... 3-9 Balance Sheet (BS)... 3-19 Depreciation and Amortization (DA)... 3-26 Ledgers on File (LF)... 3-30 Profit & Loss Statement (PL)... 3-34 Ratio Analysis (RA)... 3-42 Supplemental Reports (SR)... 3-53 Trial Balance (TB)... 3-56 Transmittal Letter (TL)... 3-63 Transaction Register (TR)... 3-67 Appendixes A: Warning Messages... A-1 B: CLS Program and Data File Names... B-1 C: Importing Transactions from Other Accounting Packages... C-1

This page is left blank intentionally.

Chapter One 1 CLS Main Menu Programs Accounting Transfer (AT)... 1-2 Computed Transactions (CT)... 1-33 Delete Transactions (DT)... 1-35 End of Period Processing (EP)... 1-36 Enter Transactions (ET)... 1-39 Ledger Consolidation (LC)... 1-61 Ledger Initialization (LI)... 1-63 Ledger Start-up (LS)... 1-105 Post Transactions (PT)... 1-107 Query Account Detail (QA)... 1-109 Query Transaction Detail (QT)... 1-113 System Initialization (SI)... 1-117 Worksheet Interface (WI)... 1-140

CLS Main Menu Programs 1.1 Accounting Transfer CLS imports transactions created by the following software packages. Please refer to Appendix C in this manual for instructions on creating files to be imported into CLS. BASS Payroll Insta-Pay Multi-Company Payroll One-Write Plus Peachtree Accounting for Windows Peachtree Complete Accounting for DOS QuickBooks (DOS and Windows versions) Quicken (DOS and Windows versions) QuickPayroll TCS Software You may import summary Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable and Payroll activity from Peachtree Complete Accounting, and TCS TOTAL or 1st Accounting. You may import any or all journals from Peachtree Accounting for Windows. You may also import TCS Inventory, Fixed Assets and Debt Service activity. The interface with Quicken lets you import all check activity, including payroll checks. The interfaces with BASS Payroll, Insta-Pay Multi-Company Payroll and QuickPayroll let you import payroll checks. In each case, detail will be passed to both the general ledger and the passive payroll portions of CLS. The ASCII file import routines let you import ledger and payroll activity using pre-defined or customized file formats for both fixed-length and comma-delimited files. You can also import a chart of accounts or an employee list from another CLS ledger. You may also use the AT program to export a client list, chart of accounts, employee/vendor list, CLS transactions and/or a trial balance. The interface with other CLS software lets you import from another CLS site or other Client Ledger System software such as CLS ~ The Limited Edition, CLS ~ General Ledger, CLS ~ CheckWriter or CLS ~ Remote Entry. If you want to transfer transactions between CLS sites via modem, you must define the import/export parameters in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (5). One 1-2 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs site must be defined as the accountant site and the other as the client site. Enter AT from the CLS Main Menu and the following menu appears: Before importing transactions, you may: Define the default AT Import Drive or Path in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (4). If no path is entered, CLS will default to A:\. Define a suspense account in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). The suspense account will be used in place of invalid accounts when importing transactions. An invalid account is any account not found in the CLS Chart of Accounts. If the suspense account is not defined and CLS finds invalid accounts during the import, all transactions will be rejected. CLS will also warn you if the transaction file is out of balance. You may continue or abort the import. After importing transactions, the transfer file will be erased to prevent accidental duplication. The new CLS transactions must be posted using the PT program before you can print financial statements. Interface with Accounting Software Choose 1 from the AT menu to import from Peachtree Complete Accounting, Peachtree Accounting for Windows, Quicken, QuickBooks, One-Write Plus or TCS Software. Import from Peachtree Complete Accounting (1) Choose the type of transactions you would like to import (payroll, payables or receivables). The following screen appears if you chose to import a payroll file. The screens for other Peachtree Complete Accounting selections will be similar. Accounting Transfer 1-3

CLS Main Menu Programs JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Transfer File Drive or Path Enter the location of the Peachtree Complete file. Your CLS directory is the default. Peachtree Complete (1-3, 6-11) Enter the version of Peachtree Complete you are importing from. Peachtree Client I.D. Enter the two-character I.D. assigned to the client in Peachtree Complete. Peachtree Generation No. (1-99) For Peachtree Complete versions 3 or greater, enter the generation number of the client to be imported. Transfer File Name CLS displays the name of the Peachtree Complete Accounting transfer file. Batch Number (0-99) You may assign an optional batch number to the imported transactions. Cash or Other Offset Account If present, CLS will summarize all transactions for this account into a single entry. The first transaction in the Peachtree 'Payroll' transfer file is: The first transaction in the transfer file appears for your review. Would you like an Edit Listing? Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you would like a list of the imported transactions as they are edited. Press N if you do not want an edit listing. Complete or Exceptions-only? (C,E) E If you selected an edit listing, press Enter to accept the default E response and print only those transactions which fail the edit tests, or press C to print all transactions. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue the import or press Esc to return to the Transfer File Drive or Path prompt. If you choose to print an edit listing, CLS will prompt you to select a printer. CLS displays the debit and credit totals and informs you if the import was successful. Would you like to process any more Peachtree disks or files? (Y,N) Press Y to select another Peachtree file to import, or press N to return to the previous menu. Transactions from Peachtree Complete Accounting transfer files are assigned the following CLS source codes: Peachtree Complete Accounting Transfer Files Software Module Transfer File (ver. 1-2) Transfer File (ver. 3-11) CLS Source Code Accounts Payable apglt.d** ap##x.d** A Accounts Receivable arglt.d** ar##x.d** R Payroll prglt.d** pr##x.d** P The Peachtree Complete company I.D. is represented by **, and the generation by ##. 1-4 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs Import from Peachtree Accounting for Windows 2.0 (2) Import from Peachtree Accounting for Windows 3.0-9.0 (3) The following screen appears if you chose to import a Peachtree Accounting for Windows version 3.0-9.0 payroll file. The screens for Peachtree Accounting for Windows version 2.0 will be similar. JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Transfer File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path where the transfer file resides. Your CLS directory is the default. Transfer File Name [.CSV] Enter the name of the Peachtree for Windows transfer file. The default extension will be CSV if no extension is entered. Batch Number (0-99) You may assign an optional batch number to the imported transactions. The first transaction in the Peachtree for Windows transfer file is: The first transaction in the transfer file appears for your review. Would you like an Edit Listing? Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you would like a list of the transactions in the transfer file as they are edited. Press N if you do not want an edit listing. Complete or Exceptions-only? (C,E) E If you selected an edit listing, press Enter to accept the default E response and print only those transactions which fail the edit tests, or press C to print all transactions. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue the import. If you chose to print an edit listing, CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Press Esc to return to the Transfer File Drive or Path prompt. Each account number appears as it is processed. CLS displays the debit and credit totals and informs you if the import was successful. Would you like to process any more Peachtree for Windows files? (Y,N) Press Y to select another Peachtree Accounting for Windows file to import, or press N to return to the Interface with Accounting Software menu. Transactions from Peachtree Accounting for Windows transfer files will be assigned a P source code. Accounting Transfer 1-5

CLS Main Menu Programs Import from Quicken for DOS or Windows - QIF (4) Import from QuickBooks for DOS - QIF (5) Import from QuickBooks for Windows - PRN (6) The following screen appears if you chose to import a Quicken for DOS or Windows file. The screens for QuickBooks selections will be similar. JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Transfer File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path where the transfer file resides. Your CLS directory is the default. Transfer File Name Enter the name of the Quicken or QuickBooks transfer file. The default extension for DOS versions and Quicken for Windows will be QIF if no extension is entered. The default extension for QuickBooks for Windows is PRN. Batch Number (0-99) You may assign an optional batch number to the imported transactions. Cash or other Offset Account Enter the account to which the balancing entry is to be posted. This entry will be automatically calculated by CLS. Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts for this ledger; CLS displays the description of the selected account. Note: If you are importing from QuickBooks for Windows and do not enter an offset account, CLS will import cash-offset transaction detail. Use Classes as Departments? This prompt appears when you have departmentalized a ledger in CLS. Answer Y if you are using classes for departments in Quicken or QuickBooks and want CLS to extract a department number from the class field. In Quicken, the CLS department number should precede the class name (e.g., 10 Atlanta Location). In QuickBooks, the CLS department number should appear at the end of the class name, in parentheses (e.g., Atlanta Location (10). Answer N if you want CLS to ignore the class field. Reject Non-Numeric Categories? Press N to allow non-numeric categories, or press Y to reject them. The first transaction in the Quicken transfer file is: The first transaction in the transfer file appears for your review. 1-6 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs Would you like an Edit Listing? Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you would like a list of the transactions in the transfer file as they are edited. Press N if you do not want an edit listing. Complete or Exceptions-only? (C,E) E If you selected an edit listing, press Enter to accept the default E response and print only those transactions which fail the edit tests, or press C to print all transactions. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue the import. If you chose to print an edit listing, CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Press Esc to return to the Transfer File Drive or Path prompt. Each account number appears as it is processed. CLS displays the debit and credit totals and informs you if the import was successful. Would you like to process any more Quicken disks or files? (Y,N) Press Y to select another file to import, or press N to return to the Interface with Accounting Software menu. Transactions from Quicken and QuickBooks transfer files will be assigned a Q source code. Import from One-Write Plus (7) Please refer to the following information to determine which type of One-Write Plus (OWP) file should be imported into the CLS ledger. If you want to use the CLS passive payroll with this ledger: Payroll transactions in the OWP general ledger do not contain employee numbers; so these transactions cannot be assigned to employees in CLS. Import the transactions from the OWP general ledger without payroll, then import payroll transactions from the OWP payroll journal. If you do not want to use the CLS passive payroll with this ledger, but have payroll in OWP: Import the transactions from the OWP general ledger with payroll. If you do not have payroll in OWP: Import the general ledger file with or without payroll. The following screen appears if you chose to import a payroll journal. The screens for other One- Write Plus selections will be similar. JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Accounting Transfer 1-7

CLS Main Menu Programs Transfer File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path where the transfer file resides. Your CLS directory is the default. One-Write Plus Vers. (4-7) If you are importing a One-Write Plus General Ledger file, select the product version. Transfer File Name [.PRN] Enter the name of the One-Write Plus transfer file. For the payroll journal, the default extension will be PRN if no extension is entered. For the general ledger it will be TXT. Batch Number (0-99) You may assign an optional batch number to the imported transactions. The first transaction in the OWP Payroll Journal transfer file is: The first transaction in the transfer file appears for your review. Would you like an Edit Listing? Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you would like a list of the transactions in the transfer file as they are edited. Press N if you do not want an edit listing. Complete or Exceptions-only? (C,E) E If you selected an edit listing, press Enter to accept the default E response and print only those transactions which fail the edit tests, or press C to print all transactions. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue the import. If you chose to print an edit listing, CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Press Esc to return to the Transfer File Drive or Path prompt. Each account number appears as it is processed. CLS displays the debit and credit totals and informs you if the import was successful. Would you like to process any more One-Write Plus disks or files? (Y,N) Press Y to select another OWP file to import, or press N to return to the Interface with Accounting Software menu. Transactions from OWP transfer files will be assigned an A source code. Import from TCS Software (8) Select the type of TCS transactions to import. The following screen appears if you chose to import a payroll file. The screens for other TCS selections will be similar. 1-8 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Transfer File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path where the transfer file resides. Your CLS directory is the default. TCS Account Format (1,2) Press 1 if the TCS account field is 6 digits or less. Press 2 if the account field is 7 digits or more. Press F1 to select the account format from a pop-up list. Transfer File Name [.DAT] Enter the name of the TCS transfer file. The default extension will be DAT if no extension is entered. Batch Number (0-99) You may assign an optional batch number to the imported transactions. Information about the TCS 'Payroll' file being imported: The transfer file size and creation date are displayed. Would you like an Edit Listing? Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you would like a list of the transactions in the transfer file as they are edited. Press N if you do not want an edit listing. Complete or Exceptions-only? (C,E) E If you selected an edit listing, press Enter to accept the default E response and print only those transactions which fail the edit tests, or press C to print all transactions. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue the import. If you chose to print an edit listing, CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Press Esc to return to the Transfer File Drive or Path prompt. Each account number appears as it is processed. CLS displays the debit and credit totals and informs you if the import was successful. Would you like to process any more TCS disks or files? (Y,N) Press Y to select another TCS file to import, or press N to return to the AT menu. Transactions from the TCS transfer files will be assigned the following source codes by CLS: TCS Software Transfer Files Software Module Transfer File Name CLS Source Code Accounts Payable apglt.dat, apglt10.dat A Accounts Receivable arglt.dat, arglt10.dat R Payroll prglt.dat, prglt10.dat P Inventory inglt.dat, inglt10.dat R Fixed Assets faglt.dat, faglt10.dat R Debt Service dsglt.dat, dsglt10.dat R Interface with Payroll Software Choose 2 from the AT menu to interface with BASS Payroll, Insta-Pay Multi-Company or QuickPayroll. Accounting Transfer 1-9

CLS Main Menu Programs Import from BASS Payroll (1) Select 1 from the Interface with Payroll Software menu to import BASS Payroll transactions, and the following screen appears: JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Transfer File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path where the transfer file resides. Your CLS directory is the default. Transfer File Name BASS Payroll assigns file names beginning with CLB-, followed by the payroll month and day (mmdd). The BASS client I.D. appears as the file extension. Enter the name of the file to import. Batch Number (0-99) You may assign an optional batch number to the imported transactions. The first transaction in the BASS Payroll transfer file is: The first transaction in the transfer file appears for your review. Would you like an Edit Listing? Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you would like a list of the transactions in the transfer file as they are edited. Press N if you do not want an edit listing. Complete or Exceptions-only? (C,E) E If you selected an edit listing, press Enter to accept the default E response and print only those transactions which fail the edit tests, or press C to print all transactions. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue the import. If you chose to print an edit listing, CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Press Esc to return to the Transfer File Drive or Path prompt. Each account number appears as it is processed. CLS displays the debit and credit totals and informs you if the import was successful. Would you like to process any more BASS Payroll disks or files? (Y,N) Press Y to select another BASS Payroll file to import, or press N to return to the Interface with Payroll Software menu. Transactions from the BASS Payroll transfer files will be assigned a P source code. 1-10 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs Import from Insta-Pay Multi-Company (2) Select 2 from the Interface with Payroll Software menu to import Insta-Pay Multi-Company transactions, and the following screen appears: JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Transfer File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path where the transfer file resides. Your CLS directory is the default. Transfer File Name [.DAT] Enter the name of the Insta-Pay transfer file. The default extension will be DAT if no extension is entered. Batch Number (0-99) You may assign an optional batch number to the imported transactions. The first transaction in the Insta-Pay transfer file is: The first transaction in the transfer file appears for your review. Would you like an Edit Listing? Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you would like a list of the transactions in the transfer file as they are edited. Press N if you do not want an edit listing. Complete or Exceptions-only? (C,E) E If you selected an edit listing, press Enter to accept the default E response and print only those transactions which fail the edit tests, or press C to print all transactions. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue the import. If you chose to print an edit listing, CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Press Esc to return to the Transfer File Drive or Path prompt. Each account number appears as it is processed. CLS displays the debit and credit totals and informs you if the import was successful. Would you like to process any more Insta-Pay disks or files? (Y,N) Press Y to select another Insta-Pay file to import, or press N to return to the Interface with Payroll Software menu. Transactions from Insta-Pay Multi-Company transfer files will be assigned a P source code. Accounting Transfer 1-11

CLS Main Menu Programs Import from Quick Payroll (3) The following screen appears if you chose to import a QuickPayroll file. JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Transfer File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path where the transfer file resides. Your CLS directory is the default. Transfer File Name Enter the name of the QuickPayroll transfer file. The default extension will be PRN. Batch Number (0-99) You may assign an optional batch number to the imported transactions. Cash or other Offset Account Enter the account to which the balancing entry is to be posted. This entry will be automatically calculated by CLS. Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts for this ledger; CLS displays the description of the selected account. Reject Non-Numeric Categories? Press N to allow non-numeric categories, or press Y to reject them. The first transaction in the QuickPayroll transfer file is: The first transaction in the transfer file appears for your review. Would you like an Edit Listing? Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you would like a list of the transactions in the transfer file as they are edited. Press N if you do not want an edit listing. Complete or Exceptions-only? (C,E) E If you selected an edit listing, press Enter to accept the default E response and print only those transactions which fail the edit tests, or press C to print all transactions. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue the import. If you chose to print an edit listing, CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Press Esc to return to the Transfer File Drive or Path prompt. Each account number appears as it is processed. CLS displays the debit and credit totals and informs you if the import was successful. 1-12 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs Would you like to process any more QuickPayroll disks or files? (Y,N) Press Y to select another file to import, or press N to return to the Interface with Accounting Software menu. Transactions from QuickPayroll transfer files will be assigned a Q source code. Import CLS Information from an ASCII File Choose 3 from the AT menu to import fixed-length or comma-delimited transaction files. You may also import a chart of accounts or an employee list from another CLS ledger. Import a Chart of Accounts (1) Use this routine to import a CLS chart of accounts from a comma-delimited file. Select 1 from the Import CLS Information from an ASCII File menu to import a CLS chart of accounts, and the following screen appears: JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Transfer File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path to where the chart of accounts is located. The CLS directory is the default. Transfer File Name Enter the name of the import file, or press Enter to accept the default. Import Mode (1-3) Press 1 if you only want to add new accounts. Press 2 if you want to add new accounts and revise existing accounts if descriptions have changed. Press 3 if you only want to revise existing accounts. Balances won t be affected. Would you like an Edit Listing? Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you would like a list of the accounts in the transfer file as they are edited. Press N if you do not want an edit listing. Complete or Exceptions-only? (C,E) E If you selected an edit listing, press Enter to accept the default E response and print only those transactions which fail the edit tests, or press C to print all transactions. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue the import. If you chose to print an edit listing, CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Press Esc to return to the Transfer File Drive or Path prompt. Accounting Transfer 1-13

CLS Main Menu Programs Import an Employee/Vendor List (2) Use this routine to import a list of employees and/or vendors from a CLS comma-delimited file. You may also import an employee or vendor list from a QuickBooks IIF file, or an employee list from a Peachtree Accounting for Windows CSV file. The employees or vendors must have been assigned CLS-compatible employee or vendor numbers. Select 2 from the Import CLS Information from an ASCII File menu to import a list of employees and/or vendors, and the following screen appears: JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Transfer File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path to where the employee/vendor list is located. The CLS directory is the default. Transfer File Name Enter the name of the import file, or press Enter to accept the default. Import Mode (1-3) Press 1 if you only want to add new employees and vendors. Press 2 if you want to add new employees and vendors and revise existing employees/vendors if information has changed. Press 3 if you only want to revise existing employees and vendors. Balances won t be affected. Would you like an Edit Listing? Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you would like a list of the employees/vendors in the transfer file as they are edited. Press N if you do not want an edit listing. Complete or Exceptions-only? (C,E) E If you selected an edit listing, press Enter to accept the default E response and print only those transactions which fail the edit tests, or press C to print all transactions. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue the import. If you chose to print an edit listing, CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Press Esc to return to the Transfer File Drive or Path prompt. Import a Comma-Delimited Transaction File (3) Select 3 from the Import/Export ASCII Transaction Files menu to import a delimited ASCII file. You may import a delimited ASCII file into CLS if it conforms to the standard CLS file layout specifications, or you may define an alternate file layout. You may also import a Lotus 1-2-3 delimited (.prn) file. 1-14 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs Use Standard CLS Field Sequence (1) Use this routine to import a comma-delimited ASCII file with the following specifications: Comma-Delimited ASCII Record Layout Sequence Length Field 1 2 Source Code (Must be 0-19, A, P, Q or R) 2 2 Batch Number (0-99) 3 8 Reference (Check Number) 4 6 Six-digit date (yymmdd) 5 4 Employee Number (0, 100-9999) 6 25 Transaction Description 7 8 Account Number 8 12 Amount/Debit Amount 9 12 Credit Amount (optional) All fields must be separated by commas. Fields containing commas or semicolons must be in quotations. Amount fields should not contain commas or dollar signs. Amount fields not containing a decimal point will be interpreted as whole dollars. JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Transfer File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path where the transfer file resides. Your CLS directory is the default. Transfer File Name [.DLM] Enter the name of the ASCII transfer file. The default extension will be DLM if no extension is entered. The first transaction in the Delimited ASCII transfer file is: The first transaction in the transfer file appears for your review. Would you like an Edit Listing? Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you would like a list of the transactions in the transfer file as they are edited. Press N if you do not want an edit listing. Complete or Exceptions-only? (C,E) E If you selected an edit listing, press Enter to accept the default E response and print only those transactions which fail the edit tests, or press C to print all transactions. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue the import. If you chose to print an edit listing, CLS will prompt you to select a Accounting Transfer 1-15

CLS Main Menu Programs printer. Press Esc to return to the Transfer File Drive or Path prompt. Each account number appears as it is processed. CLS displays the debit and credit totals and informs you if the import was successful. Would you like to process any more Delimited ASCII disks or files? (Y,N) Press Y to select another ASCII file to import, or press N to return to the Import/Export ASCII Transaction Files menu. Use/Define Alternate Field Sequence (2) Use Lotus 1-2-3 Delimited PRN Format (3) You may also define alternate field sequences for importing a comma-delimited ASCII file or a Lotus 1-2-3 delimited (.prn) file. The comma-delimited ASCII file must conform to the following specifications: All fields must be separated by commas. Fields containing commas or semicolons must be in quotations. Amount fields should not contain commas or dollar signs. Amount fields not containing a decimal point will be interpreted as whole-dollars. CLS displays the standard field sequence for importing an ASCII comma-delimited file. Press the up-arrow to position the cursor at the Source Code field. Use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the field numbers for each field. You may enter a value between 0 (unused field) and 99 at each field prompt to define the sequence. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the new field sequence and continue to the next screen, or press Esc to return to the Import a Delimited File menu. JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Transfer File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path where the transfer file resides. Your CLS directory is the default. Transfer File Name [.DLM] Enter the name of the ASCII transfer file. The default extension is DLM. 1-16 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs Date Format (S,1-4) Press Enter to use the S (standard CLS) date format. Enter 1-4 to select an alternate date format. Press F1 to select the date format from a pop-up list. The first transaction in the Delimited ASCII transfer file is: The first transaction in the transfer file appears for your review. Would you like an Edit Listing? Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you would like a list of the transactions in the transfer file as they are edited. Press N if you do not want an edit listing. Complete or Exceptions-only? (C,E) E If you selected an edit listing, press Enter to accept the default E response and print only those transactions which fail the edit tests, or press C to print all transactions. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue the import. If you chose to print an edit listing, CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Press Esc to return to the Transfer File Drive or Path prompt. Each account number appears as it is processed. CLS displays the debit and credit totals and informs you if the import was successful. Would you like to process any more Delimited ASCII disks or files? (Y,N) Press Y to select another ASCII file to import, or press N to return to the Import/Export ASCII Transaction Files menu. Import a Fixed-Length Transaction File (4) Select 4 from the Import/Export ASCII Transaction Files menu to import a fixed-length ASCII file. You may import a fixed-length ASCII file into CLS if it conforms to the standard CLS transfer file layout, or you may define an alternate file layout. Use Standard CLS Field Settings (1) Use this routine to import a fixed-length ASCII file with the following specifications: Amount fields should not contain commas or dollar signs. Amount fields not containing a decimal point will be interpreted as whole dollars. Fixed-Length ASCII Record Layout (66 bytes) Position Length Field 1 1 Source Code (Must be 0-9, A, P, Q or R) 2 2 Batch Number (0-99) 4 25 Transaction Description 29 2 Two-digit year (00-99) 31 2 Two-digit month (01-12) 33 2 Two-digit day (01-31) 35 8 Reference Number 43 4 Employee Number (0, 100-9999) 47 8 Account Number 55 12 Amount/Debit Amount 67 12 Credit Amount (optional) Accounting Transfer 1-17

CLS Main Menu Programs JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Transfer File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path where the transfer file resides. Your CLS directory is the default. Transfer File Name [.DAT] Enter the name of the ASCII transfer file. The default extension will be DAT if no extension is entered. The first transaction in the Fixed-Length ASCII transfer file is: The first transaction in the transfer file appears for your review. Would you like an Edit Listing? Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you would like a list of the transactions in the transfer file as they are edited. Press N if you do not want an edit listing. Complete or Exceptions-only? (C,E) E If you selected an edit listing, press Enter to accept the default E response and print only those transactions which fail the edit tests, or press C to print all transactions. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue the import. If you chose to print an edit listing, CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Press Esc to return to the Transfer File Drive or Path prompt. Each account number appears as it is processed. CLS displays the debit and credit totals and informs you if the import was successful. Would you like to process any more Fixed-Length ASCII disks or files? (Y,N) Press Y to select another ASCII file to import, or press N to return to the Import/Export ASCII Transaction Files menu. Use/Define Alternate Field Settings (2) Use this routine to define a fixed-length ASCII file layout for your transfer file. The file must conform to the following specifications: Amount fields should not contain commas or dollar signs. Amount fields not containing a decimal point will be interpreted as whole dollars. CLS displays the standard field positions and lengths for an ASCII fixed-length file. Press the uparrow to position the cursor at the Source Code field. Use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the starting position and length for each field, making changes as needed. 1-18 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the field settings and continue to the next screen, or press Esc to return to the Import a Fixed-Length File menu. CLS displays the same screen as AT, Menu Selection 3 (4,1), Use Standard CLS Field Settings. Please refer to the previous section for the remaining import instructions. Export CLS Information to an ASCII File Choose 4 from the AT menu to export a client list, a chart of accounts, an employee/vendor list, current or year-to-date transactions or a trial balance. Export a Client List (1) Use this routine to export a CLS client list to a comma-delimited file. Select 1 from the Export CLS Information to an ASCII File menu to export a client list, and the following screen appears: JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Export File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path to which you want to export a client list. The CLS directory is the default. Export File Name Enter a name for the export file, or press Enter to accept the default. Include Address/Contact Press N if you want only the client name and period information. Press Y to also include the client address and contact information. Accounting Transfer 1-19

CLS Main Menu Programs Print Export Listing (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response and print a list of the exported information. Press N if you do not want a listing. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to export the client list, or press Esc to return to the Export File Drive or Path prompt. Export a Chart of Accounts (2) Use this routine to export a CLS chart of accounts to a comma-delimited file. Select 2 from the Export CLS Information to an ASCII File menu to export a CLS chart of accounts, and the following screen appears: JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Export File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path to which you want to export a chart of accounts. The CLS directory is the default. Export File Name Enter a name for the export file, or press Enter to accept the default. Accounts to Include (1-3) Press 1 to include all accounts. Press 2 to include only balance sheet accounts. Press 3 to include only P&L accounts. Include Title and Total accounts (Y,N) Press Y to include CLS title and total accounts in the export file. Press N to include only postable accounts. Include Account Types and Options (Y,N) Press Y to include CLS account types and options in the export file. Press N to include only account numbers and account descriptions. Print Export Listing (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response and print a list of the exported accounts. Press N if you do not want a listing. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to export the chart of accounts, or press Esc to return to the Export File Drive or Path prompt. 1-20 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs Export Employee/Vendor List (3) Use this routine to export a list of CLS employees and/or vendors to a comma-delimited file. Select 3 from the Export CLS Information to an ASCII File menu to export an employee/vendor list, and the following screen appears: JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Export File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path to which you want to export an employee/vendor list. The CLS directory is the default. Export File Name Enter a name for the export file, or press Enter to accept the default. Payroll Series (ENTER for all) Enter a specific payroll series, or press Enter to include all payroll and vendor series in the export file. Employee, Vendor, Misc (ENTER for all) If you pressed Enter for all series: Enter E to select only employee series, V to select only vendor series, or M to select only Miscellaneous series. Series Type (ENTER for all) If you entered V for vendor series: Enter the series type (1-9, A). Press F1 to select the series type from a pop-up list. Include All Setup Info or Basic (A,B) Press A to include all CLS employee and/or vendor setup information (but no balances) in the export file. Press B to include only the employee or vendor name, address, social security number, etc. Include those with no activity (Y,N) Press Y to include employees or vendors with no activity in the export file. Press N if you only want to include those with activity. Print Export Listing (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response and print a list of the exported employees and/or vendors. Press N if you do not want a listing. Accounting Transfer 1-21

CLS Main Menu Programs Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to export the employee/vendor list, or press Esc to return to the Export File Drive or Path prompt. Export Current or YTD Transactions (4) Use this routine to export CLS transactions to an ASCII comma-delimited file. Select 4 from the Export CLS Information to an ASCII File menu to export CLS transactions, and the following screen appears: Note: The export file format is the standard CLS comma-delimited file format. You can export transactions here and then use program AT, Menu Selection 3 (3,1), to import them into another ledger or generation. JCC Data Path CLS displays the path where your CLS data files reside. Export File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path to which you want to export transactions. The CLS directory is the default. Export File Name Enter a name for the export file, or press Enter to accept the default. Overwrite or Append (O,A) If the export file already exists, press O to overwrite the file, or press A to append the new transactions to the end of the existing file. Current Period or YTD (C,Y) Press C to export only current period transactions, or press Y to export year-to-date transactions. Select Transactions (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the default N response to export all current period or year-to-date transactions. Press Y if you want to select the transactions to be exported. Selection Method (1,2) If you answered Y to Select Transactions: Enter 1 if you want to block the transactions to be exported. Enter 2 if you want to use a filter (which you define) to select the transactions to be exported. Date Format (S,1-4) Press Enter to use the S (standard CLS) date format. Enter 1-4 to select an alternate format. Press F1 to select the date format from a pop-up list. 1-22 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs Print Export Listing (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response and print a list of the exported transactions. Press N if you do not want a listing. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue to the transaction selection screen, or press Esc to return to the Export File Drive or Path prompt. Selection Method 1: Use this screen to select a block of transactions to export. Use the arrow keys (, ) to select the first transaction to export. Press F3 and then press the down-arrow to block the group of transactions to export. Press A to accept the blocked transactions, or press Esc to return to the transaction selection mode. Note: Deleted transactions will appear on the transaction selection screen, but they will not be exported if they are included in the selected block of transactions. Export selected transactions? (Y,N) Press Y to export the selected transactions. If you chose to print an export listing, CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Press N to return to the transaction selection mode. Selection Method 2: Use this screen to filter the transactions to be exported. You can select transactions by Source Code, Batch No., Payee Name, date range, reference number, account number, employee or vendor number, department number, or transaction amount. In addition, year-to-date transactions can be selected by period. Exporting transactions *** Export complete *** CLS displays the debit and credit totals for the exported transactions and informs you if the totals are out of balance. Accounting Transfer 1-23

CLS Main Menu Programs Would you like to export any more CLS transactions? (Y,N) Press Y to return to the Export File Drive or Path prompt, or press N to return to the AT menu. Export a Trial Balance (5) Choose 5 from the AT menu to export a CLS trial balance to a fixed-length or comma-delimited ASCII file. You may export current period or year-to-date balances and you can export Balance Sheet accounts, P&L accounts or both. Export Fixed-Length Records (1) Export Comma-Delimited Records (2) Select 1 from the Export a Trial Balance menu to export a fixed-length ASCII file. Select 2 to export a comma-delimited ASCII file. JCC Data Path CLS automatically displays the data path of the current ledger. Export File Drive or Path Enter the drive or path to which you want to export the trial balance. Your CLS directory is the default. Export File Name Enter a name for the export file, or press Enter to accept the default. Overwrite or Append (O,A) If the export file already exists, press O to overwrite the file, or press A to append the transactions to the end of the existing file. Accounts to Include (1-3) Press 1 to export all accounts. Press 2 to export only balance sheet accounts. Press 3 to export only P&L accounts. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of options. Include Current Period Activity (Y,N) Press N to export a trial balance without including current period activity. Press Y if you want to include it. Include Prior Period Adj. in Current (Y,N) N If you have included current period activity: Press Y if you wish to include prior period adjustments in current period activity. Press N if you wish to include prior period adjustments only in ending balances. Include Zero Balance Accounts (Y,N) N Press Y to export zero balance accounts. 1-24 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs Print Export Listing (Y,N) N Press Y to print a list of the exported transactions. Would you like a Departmental Trial Balance? (Y,N) N If the ledger is departmentalized, press Y to export a departmental trial balance. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all departments If you chose to export a departmental trial balance, select the department number or press Enter to export all departments. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue, or press Esc to return to the Export a Trial Balance menu. Exporting trial balance ***Export Complete*** CLS exports the trial balance. Would you like to export another trial balance? (Y,N) Press Y to export another trial balance. Press N to return to the Export a Trial Balance menu. Interface with other CLS Software Use this routine to communicate with another CLS site or other Client Ledger System software such as CLS ~ The Limited Edition, CLS ~ General Ledger, or CLS ~ Remote Entry. You may import and export postable accounts, departments, employees/vendors and transactions. Before beginning a transfer by disk or modem, make sure the import/export parameters are set correctly in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (5). To communicate by modem, one computer must be defined as the accountant site and the other computer must be defined as the client site. The menu selections and screen references will appear slightly different depending on the site type. With a modem transfer, the accountant site initiates the call and the client site waits to be contacted. Choose 5 from the AT menu and the following menu appears: Import CLS Ledger Information from Client (1) When files are imported from a client or remote site, they are stored in an intermediate import path created by CLS; the import path may not be changed. You may print a summary listing of the ledgers in the import path or a detailed listing of the contents of the import files. You may also print the transmittal letter(s) included with the import files and an import log. Once you have printed reports for the import file, you may update the current ledger with the imported data. Accounting Transfer 1-25

CLS Main Menu Programs Choose 1 from the Interface with other CLS Software menu to import ledger information from a client or remote site, and the following menu appears: Receive Import Files via Modem (1) Choose 1 from the Import CLS Ledger Information from Client menu and respond to the following prompt. Proceed with call? (Y,N) Press Y to begin the import process. Initializing modem one moment please CLS initializes your modem. If you designated your computer as the accountant site in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (5), CLS will prompt you for the Modem Phone Number. The default modem phone number for the client and the client s modem baud rate may be set in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (2). Press N to return to the Import CLS Ledger Information from Client menu. Dial Remote Site? (Y,N) Press Y to dial the selected modem phone number. CLS dials and connects with the remote site. The number of dialing attempts and the pause between attempts is set in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (5). The On Line Monitor displays the transfer progress. File transfer was successful CLS imports the files to the import path and returns to the Import CLS Ledger Information from Client menu. Transfer Import Files from Diskette (2) Use this routine to copy CLS data from diskette(s) into the import path. Choose 2 from the Import CLS Ledger Information from Client menu and respond to the following prompts: Import Diskette Drive Enter the drive where the CLS data to be imported is located. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue the import, or press Esc to return to the Import CLS Ledger Information from Client menu. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to copy the selected ledger(s) to your hard drive. Press N or Esc to return to the Import CLS Ledger Information from Client menu. Copying... Complete CLS copies the import files to the import path on your hard drive and returns to the Import CLS Ledger Information to Client menu. 1-26 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs Update Ledger 'JCC' with Imported Data (3) Use this routine to update the current ledger with the imported data. Choose 3 from the Import CLS Ledger Information from Client menu and the following screen appears: Log Number If you have more than one set of files in the import path for the selected ledger, choose the appropriate set by entering its log number. Press F1 to select the log number from a pop-up list. Accounts Departments Employees Transactions CLS displays the items to be imported, with the total count for each item. Press F1 at the Mode prompt to select the appropriate import mode for each item (e.g., do not update, add only new records, complete update). Would you like an Edit Listing? Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you would like a list of the transactions in the transfer file as they are edited. Press N if you do not want an edit listing. Complete or Exceptions-only? (C,E) E If you selected an edit listing, press Enter to accept the default E response and print only those transactions which fail the edit tests, or press C to print all transactions. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue. Press Esc to return to the Import CLS Ledger Information from Client menu. If you chose to print an edit listing, CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Would you like to update valid items? (Y,N) CLS validates the data to be imported and displays the validation progress. Press Y to update valid items. Press N to return to the Data to Import prompts. Update Complete - Press ENTER when finished... CLS updates the current ledger with the imported data. Accounting Transfer 1-27

CLS Main Menu Programs Delete Ledgers in Import Path (4) Choose 4 from the Import CLS Ledger Information from Client menu and the following screen appears: CLS displays the ledgers found in the import path. Use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the list of ledgers. Tag or un-tag ledgers by pressing the space bar or T. Press Enter to accept the tagged ledgers from the import path, or press Esc to return to the file selection window. Do you wish to CLEAR ALL deletion tags for this path and exit? This prompt appears if you press Esc to exit the selection window. Press Y to clear the tags, or press Esc to return to the selection window without removing the tags. Ready to begin deletion? (Y,N) Press Y to delete the selected ledgers from the import path, or press N to return to the selection window. Updating import log CLS deletes the selected ledgers from the import path and returns to the Import CLS Information to Client menu. CLS Import File Reports (5) You may print a listing for one or all ledgers in the import path, which includes information such as the export file date and time, a total count for each item exported (e.g., accounts, departments, etc.) and the beginning and ending dates of the exported transactions. You may print a detail report listing all information in the imported files. You may also print transmittal letters included with the exported files and an import log. Choose 5 from the Import CLS Ledger Information from Client menu to print import file reports. Select the report to print, and respond to the following prompts: Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger for which you want to print the selected report(s). Enter ALL to include information for all ledgers in the import path. Press F1 to select the ledger I.D. from a pop-up list. Log Number If you have more than one set of files in the import path for the selected ledger, choose the appropriate set by entering its log number. Press F1 to select the log number from a pop-up list. Enter ALL to include all log numbers for the ledger. Note: When CLS export files are created for a ledger, they are assigned a sequential log number. Log numbers are automatically incremented each time you create a set of export files. 1-28 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to print the selected report. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the selected report, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. CLS returns to the Ledger I.D. prompt when the report is complete. You may select another ledger, or press Esc to return to the CLS Import File Reports menu. Export CLS Ledger Information to Client (2) Choose 2 from the Interface with other CLS Software menu to export ledger information to a client or remote site. The following menu appears: Create Ledger Export Files (1) Use this routine to create ledger export files for the current ledger. CLS displays information about the current ledger, such as the last log number used and the last export date and time. Export Accounts Export Departments Export Employees Export Transactions Press Y at the prompt for each item to export. The default responses are set in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Transmittal Letter No. Select the transmittal letter to be exported with the CLS data. Press F1 to select the transmittal letter from a pop-up list. The default transmittal letter (DEF) lists what has been exported. CLS automatically displays the letter description. Heading Number (0-99). If you selected an actual transmittal letter number (not the default letter), enter the number of the Accounting Transfer 1-29

CLS Main Menu Programs letter heading you wish to use. Press F1 to select the heading from a pop-up list. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the export selections, or press Esc to return to the Export CLS Ledger Information to Client menu. Creating account export file... Creating department export file... Creating payroll export file... Creating transaction export file... Creating transmittal letter... Complete CLS creates export files for the selected items and returns to the Export CLS Ledger Information to Client menu. Depending on the items selected, CLS will create the following files in the export path: CLS Export Files rxa0xxx.### Accounts rxl0xxx.### Transmittal Letter rxc0xxx.### Control File rxp0xxx.### Payroll (Employees and Vendors) rxd0xxx.### Departments rxt0xxx.### Transactions xxx = Ledger I.D. ### = Log Number Send Export Files via Modem (2) Choose 2 from the Export CLS Ledger Information to Client menu and respond to the following prompts: Proceed with call? (Y,N) Press Y to begin the export process. Initializing modem one moment please CLS initializes your modem. If you designated your computer as the accountant site in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (5), enter the Modem Phone Number. The default modem phone number for the client is set in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (2). Press N to return to the Export CLS Ledger Information to Client menu. Dial Remote Site? (Y,N) Press Y to dial the modem phone number. CLS dials and connects with the remote site. The number of dialing attempts and the pause between attempts is set in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (5). The On Line Monitor displays the transfer progress. File transfer complete CLS exports the files to the export path and returns to the Export CLS Ledger Information to Client menu. Transfer Export Files to Diskette (3) Use this routine to copy CLS export files from the export path to one or more diskettes. Choose 3 from the Export CLS Ledger Information to Client menu and respond to the following prompts: Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger whose files you want to copy to a diskette. Enter ALL to include information for all ledgers in the export path. Press F1 to select the ledger I.D. from a pop-up list. 1-30 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs Log Number If there are multiple log numbers for the selected ledger, enter the log number to be exported. Enter ALL to export all log numbers to a diskette. Press F1 to select the log number from a pop-up list. Export Diskette Drive Enter the drive to which the CLS export files will be copied. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) With the floppy disk in place, press A to continue the export, or press Esc to return to the Export CLS Ledger Information to Client menu. Total capacity of drive 'A' Space used by EXISTING export files Current FREE space on drive 'A' Less: Space needed for new export files Space available AFTER export CLS displays the export disk statistics. A warning will appear if the selected ledger(s) are already present on the disk or if the export disk is full. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to copy the selected ledger(s) to a disk. Press N or Esc to return to the Export CLS Ledger Information to Client menu. Copying... Complete CLS copies the export files to the disk and returns to the Export CLS Ledger Information to Client menu. Delete Ledgers in Export Path (4) Choose 4 from the Export CLS Ledger Information to Client menu and the following screen appears: CLS displays the ledgers found in the export path. Use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the list of ledgers. Tag or un-tag ledgers by pressing the space bar or T. Press Enter to accept the tagged ledgers, or press Esc to return to the file selection window. Do you wish to CLEAR ALL deletion tags for this path and exit? This prompt appears if you press Esc to exit the selection window. Press Y to clear the tags, or press Esc to return to the selection window without removing the tags. Ready to begin deletion? (Y,N) Press Y to delete the selected ledgers from the export path, or press N to return to the selection Accounting Transfer 1-31

CLS Main Menu Programs window. Updating export log CLS deletes the selected ledgers from the export path and returns to the CLS Export CLS Information to Client menu. CLS Export File Reports (5) Choose 5 from the Export CLS Ledger Information to Client menu to print export file reports. You may list ledgers in the export path, print all information in exported files, print transmittal letters and print an export log. Select the report to print, and respond to the following prompts: Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger for which to print a report. Enter ALL to include all ledgers in the export path on the report. Press F1 to select the ledger I.D. from a pop-up list. Log Number If you have more than one set of files in the export path for the selected ledger, choose the appropriate set by entering its log number. Press F1 to select the log number from a pop-up list. Press Enter to include all log numbers for the ledger. Note: When CLS export files are created, they are assigned a sequential log number. Log numbers are incremented each time you create a set of export files. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to print the selected report, or press N to return to the Ledger I.D. prompt. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the selected report, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. CLS returns to the Ledger I.D. prompt when the report is complete. You may select another ledger, or press Esc to return to the CLS Export File Reports menu. 1-32 Accounting Transfer

CLS Main Menu Programs Computed Transactions 1.2 Use menu selection 5 of the CT program to create transactions to adjust inventory/cost of goods sold; use menu selection 6 to create transactions for estimated income taxes. The transactions created here will be based on calculations defined in program LI, Menu Selections 3 (5) and 3 (6), respectively. A diamond ( ) next to a selection indicates that current-period transactions for that selection already exist. Note: Menu selections 1-4 of the CT program are covered in section 2.1 of the CLS Payroll Guide. Enter CT from the CLS Main Menu and the following menu appears: Create Inventory/CGS Transactions This routine will create transactions to adjust inventory/cost of goods sold based on the calculations you defined in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (5). Notes: You can adjust inventory against either a single cost of goods sold account or separate beginning and ending inventory accounts on the P&L. If you are using separate beginning and ending inventory accounts, and you are preparing a comparative P&L, be sure to assign options V and W to the beginning and ending inventory accounts, respectively, in program MF, Menu Selection 1. If you do not, history for these accounts will not be reported correctly. Choose 5 from the CT menu and respond to the following prompt: Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to create the inventory/cgs adjustments. You may re-run this routine as often as you like. Computed Transactions 1-33

CLS Main Menu Programs 1 Inventory Adjustment Transactions Created Each inventory calculation will be displayed as the transactions are created. *** Complete *** *** Press ENTER to continue: When complete, use the Post Transactions program (PT) to post the transactions that have been created. Create Income Tax Transactions This routine creates estimated income tax transactions based on the tax calculations you defined in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (6). Two sets of transactions are created for each tax. The first set reverses the previous income tax expense (if any). The second records a new estimated income tax expense based on year-to-date net income. Choose 6 from the CT menu and respond to the following prompt: Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to create the income tax transactions. You may re-run this routine as often as you like. Creating Federal Income Tax provision Creating Georgia Income Tax provision Each income tax calculation will be displayed as the transactions are created. *** Complete *** *** Press ENTER to continue: When complete, use the Post Transactions program (PT) to post the transactions that have been created. Create Calculated JE Transactions This routine will create transactions for calculated journal entries based on the parameters you defined in program ET, Menu Selection 6. Choose 7 from the CT menu and respond to the following prompt: Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to create the calculated journal entries. You may re-run this routine as often as you like. Creating CJE-0001 Creating CJE-0002 Each calculated journal entry will be displayed as the transactions are created. *** Complete *** *** Press ENTER to continue: When complete, use the Post Transactions program (PT) to post the transactions that have been created. 1-34 Computed Transactions

CLS Main Menu Programs Delete Transactions 1.3 While you may use this program to delete posted transactions for the current accounting period, the recommended approach is to unpost transactions (PT 2) and delete them using the ET program s edit mode. Notes: To provide an audit trail, deleted transactions can be made to appear on general ledgers and transaction registers (marked DL); use LI, Menu Selection 3 (1) to do so. To deny access to the DT program, use the password control function in SI, Menu Selection 2, and enter a zero at the DT (Delete Transactions) prompt. Enter DT from the CLS Main Menu and the following menu appears: Delete Transactions Choose 1 from the DT menu to delete transactions. Select the correct printer, and respond to the following prompts: Account Number Enter the account number for the transaction(s) to be deleted. Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts for this ledger. CLS displays the account description. The first transaction posted to the account during the current period is shown, including the description or employee name, transaction date, source code, employee number, reference and amount. If a transaction has already been deleted, an asterisk (*) appears beside the amount; you may restore it (add it back) if needed. In the D/A? field, press D to delete a transaction or A to restore a transaction previously marked as deleted. Press Enter to leave the transaction as it is. Press Esc to return to the DT menu. *** End of data - press ENTER when finished: All of the transactions for this account have been displayed. When you are ready to continue, press Enter. You may enter another account number or press Esc to return to the DT menu. Delete Transactions (DT) 1-35

CLS Main Menu Programs 1.4 End of Period Processing The EP program prepares a ledger to begin a new accounting period. After creating a new generation of files, EP adds current period account balances to year-to-date balances and sets the current period fields to zero. If the new period begins a new fiscal year, the balance sheet is carried forward, year-to-date balances for all income and expense accounts are set to zero, and current-year earnings are posted to the appropriate retained earnings account(s). If the new period represents a new calendar year, employer and vendor balances will be reset to zero, and you may optionally delete inactive employees and vendors. During end of period processing, CLS displays the period-end date, fiscal period number and quarter-end date for the next generation. The dates and period number are incremented based on your response to the EP Period Increment prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Depending on your response to the Prompt for EP Bal Forward question in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), CLS may ask you at the end of a period or year if you want to carry balances forward. Note: If you need to make additional entries to a previous generation, select the appropriate generation number in Ledger Start-up (LS), make the entries and reclose the period. During end of period processing, CLS will inform you that the new generation already exists and ask if you want to keep existing transactions and period budgets. See Chapter 5 in the CLS Getting Started Guide, CLS Concepts, for more information on reclosing a period. Enter EP from the CLS Main Menu and the following menu appears: 1-36 End of Period Processing (EP)

CLS Main Menu Programs End of Period Processing Choose 1 to perform end of period processing, and the following screen appears: The current value of each field is displayed. You may enter a new value for the field, or press Enter to accept the current value. Fiscal Period Enter the fiscal period number corresponding to the new period-end date, or press Enter to accept the default period supplied by CLS. Period Ending Enter the period-end date for the next accounting period, or press Enter to accept the default date supplied by CLS. Note: CLS will automatically increment the period number and period-end date using the value entered at the EP Period Increment prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), and period-end dates entered in program LI, Menu Selection 7. Payroll Quarter-End Date Enter the payroll calendar quarter-end date for the new period, or press Enter to accept the default date supplied by CLS. If you are processing a fiscal-year ledger on a quarterly basis, be sure to change the payroll quarter-end date so that it falls within the fiscal quarter. Fiscal Year-End Date If this is the end of a fiscal year, enter the fiscal year-end date for the new period, or press Enter to accept the default date supplied by CLS. Bring Balances Forward [Y] If you entered 1 or 2 to Prompt for EP Bal Forward (0-2) in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), you will be asked at the end of each period or year if you want to bring ledger balances forward. Press Enter to accept the default Y response and bring balances forward. Press N if you do not want to carry the balances forward. Data Drive or Path CLS displays the location of the current ledger files. Backup Drive or Path Enter the path where you want to store the current generation data files. The default backup drive or path is set in SI, Menu Selection 1 (4). If necessary, CLS transfers the current generation to the backup path and creates the new generation in the data path. Note: A separate default back-up path may be defined in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (4), for use when closing a fiscal year. End of Period Processing (EP) 1-37

CLS Main Menu Programs Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to continue. Press Esc to return to the Fiscal Period prompt. The next file generation will be '014.' You will see the following message only if you chosen to back up to a floppy disk drive: TOTAL capacity of drive A (Bytes) Current FREE space on drive A Add: space now used by generation 014 files Less: space needed for new generation 014 files Space available on drive A after end of period processing Begin End of Period Processing? (Y,N) The new file generation number and the available space for both the new generation and your backup files appear. Press Y to continue end of period processing or N to return to the EP menu. CLS displays the work in progress during end of period processing and indicates which files are affected. You may see: Backing up 'JCC.013' files to C:\NEWCLS\TEMP... Creating a temporary next-generation transaction file Creating a temporary Source 6 transaction file Accumulating employer tax liabilities Series 100 Updating files for 'JCC.014' in path C:\NEWCLS Updating account master file Updating payroll master file Copying Source 6 transactions Updating ledger control file End of Period Processing is complete. Path C:\NEWCLS contains your backup files. Your new ledger files are located in path C:\NEWCLS. *** End of End of Period processing *** Select Program or press ENTER for the Main Menu When EP is complete, you may begin working with the new ledger generation, or log onto another ledger using the Ledger Start-up (LS) program. If you are reclosing a period, you may see the following message(s): This new file generation '014' already exists in path C:\NEWCLS Would you like to KEEP EXISTING TRANSACTIONS? (Y,N) [Y] Would you like to KEEP NEXT PERIOD BUDGETS? (Y,N) [Y] Would you like to UPDATE PAYROLL RATES WITH CURRENT RATES? (Y,N) [N] If the end of period is also the end of the calendar or fiscal year, you may also see the following message(s): Caution End of calendar year. Payroll balances will be cleared. Caution End of fiscal year. P&L balances will be cleared. End of calendar year... Would you like to UPDATE PAYROLL RATES WITH NEXT YEAR RATES? (Y,N) [Y] Would you like to DELETE INACTIVE EMPLOYEES/VENDORS? (Y,N) [N] 1-38 End of Period Processing (EP)

CLS Main Menu Programs Enter Transactions 1.5 Use the Enter Transactions (ET) program to enter transactions or journal entries. Depending on the answer to Show ET Program Menu in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), you may also enter a Trial Balance (and let CLS create a set of current period entries for you), a Summary Journal by Account, Pro Forma Journal Entries, or Formal Journal Entries. Tip: You can access the CLS pop-up calculator during transaction entry by pressing the Alt-C hot-keys. You must have installed the calculator as instructed in Chapter 2 of the CLS Getting Started Guide. Enter ET from the CLS Main Menu. If you indicated in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), that you would like to Show ET Program Menu, you will see the menu below. Otherwise, the Enter Transactions (ET) Source Code Table will appear, as shown below. Enter Transactions CLS validates each field to minimize errors. Features such as Autofill, Entry Mode and Add/Decimal Mode increase transaction entry speed. Press F1 in the appropriate field to pop-up a Chart of Accounts or an employee/vendor list. Choose 1 from the ET menu to enter transactions. The following screen appears: Enter Transactions (ET) 1-39

CLS Main Menu Programs Notes: You must use the Post Transactions (PT) program to post any transactions you have entered. When unposted transactions are present or there are pending trial balance entries, an asterisk (*) appears next to the ledger I.D. on all menus. Transactions must be in balance before you can print financial statements. Source Code (0-19) Select the source code for the transactions you are going to enter, or press Enter to accept the default value. The default source code is set in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (1). Although not shown, you may also use Source Codes A, P, Q or R, which are assigned to transactions imported from other accounting packages. Month/Year (mm/yy) Enter the month and year for the transactions. After you make this entry, you will only need to enter the day for each transaction, unless the month differs from what you entered here. Batch No. (0-99) You may tag transactions with an optional batch number and then prepare Transaction Registers for selected batches using the TR program. Entry Mode (1-6) Select the Entry Mode, or press Enter to accept the default value. The default entry mode is set in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (1). Press F1 to select the entry mode from a pop-up list. Transaction Entry Modes Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Return to Description or Employee field after each entry. Return to Day field after each entry. Return to Ref. field after each entry. Return to Account field after each entry. Return to Amount field after each entry. Auto-prompting payroll mode. Add/Decimal Mode (A,D) Select the decimal mode for the transactions you will be entering, or press Enter to accept the default value. The default mode is set in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (1). Press F1 to select the decimal mode from a pop-up list. A D Add Mode: If no decimal point is entered in the Amount field, the A mode places the decimal two digits to the left of the last digit (e.g., 1234 = 12.34). Decimal Mode: If no decimal point is entered in the Amount field, the D mode places the decimal point after the last digit (e.g., 1234 = 1234.00). Plus (+)/Minus (-) (0-2) Press 0 if you want to enter the sign (+ or -) before the amount. Press 1 if you want to enter a sign after the amount in program ET; the sign will also act as the Enter key. Press 2 if you want to enter a sign after the amount throughout CLS. The default mode is set in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (1). Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of options. Shortcut: If the Source Code Table default settings (Source Code, Month/Year, Batch No., etc.) are correct, you may press Esc to move directly to Continue? (Y,N). 1-40 Enter Transactions (ET)

CLS Main Menu Programs Continue? (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the Y default and the ET transaction entry screen appears with the current transaction number displayed. Press N to exit the ET program. Description or Employee Enter the transaction description (up to 25 characters) or an employee or vendor number. Entering a zero or decimal point repeats the previous description, day and reference fields and moves the cursor to the account field. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of employees or vendors for this ledger (an asterisk indicates employees/vendors without balances or transactions). Note: Depending on your response to the Memorize Descriptions (0-5) prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), CLS will memorize and autofill transaction descriptions and accounts. If you choose to memorize and/or autofill accounts, CLS will also autofill corresponding amounts entered in the DM program. New amounts entered in ET will not be memorized. Press F4 to select a memorized description from a pop-up list. Day Enter the transaction day. Use a zero, a decimal point or the plus (+) key to increment the previous value in the day field; use the minus (-) key to decrement it. You may also change the transaction month in this field, but you must return to the Source Code Table (previous ET screen) to change the year. To change the month, enter the new month and day (mmdd format); do not use a leading zero on the month. When the month is entered along with the day, two digits must be used for the day (e.g., March 9 should be entered as 309). Reference Enter the check or reference number, up to eight characters. The reference may be numeric or alphanumeric. Use a zero or a decimal point to increment the reference field. Account Enter the account number or payroll journal column number (for employee or vendor transactions). Use a zero or decimal point to increment the previous account field. If you selected the auto-create function in the LI program, you may also create new postable accounts on-the-fly while entering transactions. Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts for this ledger. Amount Enter the transaction amount. If this is a credit entry, the amount should be entered as a negative number. You may use a plus (+) or minus (-) sign by itself to repeat the amount of the previous transaction as a debit or credit. Enter Transactions (ET) 1-41

CLS Main Menu Programs In Entry Mode 6, the signs (+ or -) assigned to columns 1-16 on the Payroll Journal in program PF are automatically applied to an amount entered without a sign. To override an automatic credit, enter a plus sign; to override an automatic debit, enter a minus sign. Note: The total amount posted to each employee/vendor per quarter must not exceed ± $21 million. Amounts posted to a ledger account must not exceed ± $2.5 billion. Ref-Total The balance shown here is the total for the current check or reference number. This total clears when the reference number changes or you return to the Source Code Table. Press Enter in the last field to accept a transaction. To correct a field, enter N to return to the first field on this line, or press F6, Shift-Tab or @ to back up field-by-field. To change the Entry Mode, enter the new mode (1-6) in the Y/N field. CLS will assume you would like to accept the current transaction and change the entry mode as well. You may enter a C in the Y/N field to cancel consecutive transactions for the current reference number. When you enter Y or a number in the Y/N field, CLS returns to the field corresponding to the current Entry Mode so you can enter the next transaction. Special characters that can speed up the transaction entry process are discussed below:. or 0 Entered in the Description or Employee field, this repeats the Description, Day, and Reference fields and moves the cursor to the Account field. Entered in the Day, Reference, or Account fields, this increments the previous value of the field and moves the cursor to the next field. + Entered in the Amount field, this repeats the previous amount as a debit. Entered in the Day field, this increments the previous value. - Entered in the Amount field, this repeats the previous amount as a credit. Entered in the Day field, this decrements the previous value. Arrows (, ) Move the cursor within a field. C Entered in the Y/N field, this cancels consecutive transactions for the current reference number. Enter or Tab Entered in any field, this repeats the previous entry. 1-42 Enter Transactions (ET)

CLS Main Menu Programs Home Moves the cursor to the beginning of a field. End Moves the cursor to the end of a field. Insert Toggles the input mode between insert and typeover. Delete Deletes the character indicated by the cursor. Backspace Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Alt-B Deletes all characters from the cursor position to the end of the field. Alt-R Restores a field to its original value if you have not left it. Esc Entered in any field, this displays the transaction file totals for the current period and prepares to exit to the Source Code Table. CLS ignores any partially entered transaction and warns you if the totals are out of balance. Debits = (Total of transaction debits) Credits = (Total of transaction credits) Net = (Net of transaction entries) You will see the prompt: Is this acceptable? (Y,N). Press N to continue with the next transaction. If you are satisfied with the totals, press Y or Esc to return to the Source Code Table. You may then select another source code, month and year, batch number, entry mode or decimal mode, or press Esc to leave the ET program. F1 You may press F1 in the following fields: In the Description or Employee field, this lists employees and vendors for this ledger. (An asterisk (*) indicates employee/vendors without balances or transactions). In the Account field, this lists the Chart of Accounts for this ledger. F2 Changes transaction entry to the Edit Mode. You may edit all unposted transactions regardless of source code. Move around the edit screen using the arrow keys (, ), Page-Up, Page-Down, Home and End keys. Select the transaction to edit, and press Enter or Tab to select the field to correct. Press F6, Shift-Tab or @ to back up one field at a time. Edited transactions will be revised after you enter Y to accept the transaction. If you change an amount, the reference totals for any following entries with the same reference number are changed. Press Esc to cancel the change or to return to the transaction entry mode. While in the Edit Mode, press F3 to block a group of transactions to be deleted or added back to the file. You may also assign a new batch number, month, source or year to any block of transactions. Enter Transactions (ET) 1-43

CLS Main Menu Programs F3 You may press F3 in the following fields: In the Description or Employee field, you will be prompted to enter an employee number. You may then edit information entered for the selected employee/vendor. In the Account field, you will be prompted to enter an account number. You may then edit information entered for the selected account. F4 In the Description or Employee field, this lists memorized transaction descriptions for this ledger. With the description list displayed, press the first letter of a description and CLS will advance to that section of the list. F5 or? Entered in any field, this displays the transaction file totals for the current period. F6, Shift-Tab or @ Backs up one field in the current line. Use this to correct errors in the current line. F7 Press F7 to change the Source Code to be used for subsequent transactions. F8 Press F8 to change the batch number to be used for subsequent transactions. F9 Press F9 to change the year to be used for subsequent transactions. F10 Press F10 to display a help screen showing time-saving keystrokes available for use in the ET program. Enter a Trial Balance The availability of this option is based on your response to the Show ET Program Menu prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). You must answer Y to this prompt if you want to be able to enter a trial balance and let CLS create the required transactions. Choose 2 from the Enter Transactions menu and the following menu appears: Asterisks beside menu selections 2 and 3 indicate routines that will be unavailable until the trial balance is entered. Enter Trial Balance (1) Select 1 to enter a trial balance, and respond to the following prompt: 1-44 Enter Transactions (ET)

CLS Main Menu Programs Set new balances to zero? Press Y to begin with all new balances set to zero. Press N to begin with the new balances set to the existing ledger balances. The Enter Trial Balance Screen appears: CLS displays account numbers, descriptions, current balances and new balances. Use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the new balances and make the necessary entries. When your changes are complete, press Esc to move to the Accept or Clear? (A,C) prompt. Accept or Clear? (A,C) Press A to accept the changes. Press C to clear all entries and return to the Enter Trial Balance menu. View/Print Audit Trail (2) Select 2 from the Enter Trial Balance menu to view or print an audit trail of the Trial Balance entries. Respond to the following prompts: (1) Balance Sheet accounts, (2) P&L accounts, or press ENTER for both: Press 1 to include only Balance Sheet accounts, press 2 to include only P&L accounts. Press Enter to include both Balance Sheet and P&L accounts. Include accounts with no activity? (Y,N) Press Y to include amounts with no activity (where the balance has not changed), or press N to suppress them. Print zero balance accounts? (Y,N) If you answered Y to the above prompt, you may choose to include or exclude accounts with zero balances. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the audit trail, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. CLS returns to the Enter Trial Balance menu when the report is complete. Create Transactions (3) Select 3 from the Enter Trial Balance menu to create transactions from the balances entered. The following screen appears: Enter Transactions (ET) 1-45

CLS Main Menu Programs Source Code (0-19) Enter the source code for the new transactions. Press F1 to select the source code from a pop-up list. Batch No. (0-99) You may tag transactions with an optional batch number and then prepare a transaction register for the new transactions using the TR program. Transaction Date Enter the date for the new transactions. CLS defaults to the current period-end date. Reference Enter a reference for the new transactions. CLS defaults to CLS-TB. Description Enter a description for the new transactions. CLS defaults to Trial Balance. Accept or Escape (A,Esc) Press A to accept the transaction settings, or Esc to return to the Enter Trial Balance menu. Complete CLS creates the trial balance entries and returns to the ET menu. Enter Summary Journal by Account The availability of this option is based on your response to the Show ET Program Menu prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). You must answer Y to this prompt if you want to be able to enter a summary journal by account and let CLS create the required transactions. Choose 3 from the Enter Transactions menu and the following menu appears: Asterisks beside menu selections 2 and 3 indicate routines that will be unavailable until the summary journal is entered. 1-46 Enter Transactions (ET)

CLS Main Menu Programs Enter Summary Journal by Account (1) Select 1 to enter a summary journal and the following screen appears: CLS displays account numbers, descriptions and amounts. Use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the accounts and make the necessary entries. When your changes are complete, press Esc to move to the Accept or Clear? (A,C) prompt. Accept or Clear? (A,C) Press A to accept the changes. Press C to clear all entries and return to the Enter Summary Journal by Account menu. View/Print Audit Trail (2) Select 2 from the Enter Summary Journal by Account menu to view or print an audit trail of the summary journal entries. Respond to the following prompts: (1) Balance Sheet accounts, (2) P&L accounts, or press ENTER for both: Press 1 to include only Balance Sheet accounts, press 2 to include only P&L accounts. Press Enter to include both Balance Sheet and P&L accounts. Include accounts with no activity? (Y,N) Press Y to include amounts with no activity (where the balance has not changed), or press N to suppress them. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the audit trail, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. CLS returns to the Enter Summary Journal by Account menu when the report is complete. Create Summary Journal Transactions (3) Select 3 from the Enter Summary Journal by Account menu to create transactions from the amounts entered. The following screen appears: Enter Transactions (ET) 1-47

CLS Main Menu Programs Source Code (0-19) Enter the source code for the new transactions. Press F1 to select the source code from a pop-up list. Batch No. (0-99) You may tag transactions with an optional batch number and then prepare a transaction register for the new transactions using the TR program. Transaction Date Enter the date for the new transactions. CLS defaults to the current period-end date. Reference Enter a reference for the new transactions. CLS defaults to CLS-SJ. Description Enter a description for the new transactions. CLS defaults to Summary Journal. Accept or Escape (A,Esc) Press A to accept the transaction settings, or Esc to return to the Enter Trial Balance menu. Complete CLS creates the summary journal entries and returns to the ET menu. Enter Pro Forma Journal Entries The availability of this option is based on your response to the Show ET Program Menu prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). You must answer Y to this prompt if you want to be able to define Pro Forma Journal Entries, and then enter only the new dollar amounts each period. You may define as many journal entries as you need, and each journal entry can include any number of lines. Four steps are involved in the pro forma journal entry process. First, the journal entries must be defined. Second, the appropriate dollar amounts must be entered each period. Third, an optional journal entry listing may be printed. And, fourth, the transactions associated with these journal entries must be created and then posted. Choose 4 from the Enter Transactions menu and the following menu appears: Define Pro Forma Journal Entries (1) Select 1 to define your pro forma journal entries, and the following screen appears: 1-48 Enter Transactions (ET)

CLS Main Menu Programs Journal Reference Enter a unique reference number for each journal entry. The same reference number will be used for the journal entry each period. Note: Choose your reference numbers carefully; reference numbers can only be changed by deleting a journal entry and re-defining it. JE Description Enter a unique description for each journal entry. This description will be used as the transaction description for each line of the journal entry, unless specific line descriptions are entered below. Source (0-19) Enter the source code to use for each journal entry. If you wish, you can use LI 4 to set up a source code to be used only for pro forma journal entries. Batch (0-99) Enter an optional batch number to use for each journal entry; the default is 0. Options You may enter up to four options for each journal entry: N Don t clear balances when closing O Journal Entry is Optional X Journal Entry is Inactive Y Year-end only Journal Entry A/C A/C Description Line Description Enter an account number for each line included in the journal entry. The corresponding account description will be displayed. An optional line description may also be entered, which will become the transaction description when transactions are created. In the A/C field, you may press F1 to list accounts, F2 to enter the edit mode, or F3 to add or edit accounts. In the edit mode, you may press Enter to change an account number or a line description, F4 to insert a new line, F5 to move a line, or F6 to delete a line. Press the up-arrow ( ) to edit the JE Description, Source, Batch or Options fields. Press Esc to move to the Accept or Delete? (A,D) prompt. Accept or Delete? (A,D) Press A or Esc to accept your journal entry. Press D to delete this journal entry and return to the Enter Pro Forma Journal Entries menu. Enter Transactions (ET) 1-49

CLS Main Menu Programs Enter Pro Forma Journal Entry Amounts (2) Select 2 to enter pro forma journal entry amounts, and following screen appears: To enter dollar amounts for a specific journal entry, enter the appropriate Journal Reference. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list. For each line of the journal entry, CLS displays the account number and description, the line description and an amount. Use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the lines and enter the current amounts. Note: no transactions will be created for lines with a zero dollar amount. While entering dollar amounts, you may press F2 to enter the edit mode. In the edit mode, you may press Enter to change an account number or a line description, F4 to insert a new line, F5 to move a line, or F6 to delete a line. Note: The JE Description, Source, Batch and Options fields may be changed only in menu selection 1. When your changes are complete, press Esc to move to the Accept or Clear? (A,C) prompt. Accept or Clear? (A,C) If you have entered dollar amounts and they are in balance, you may create the transactions now or use menu selection 4 (described below) to create them later. Press A to accept the dollar amounts you have entered and create transactions now. Press C to clear all dollar amounts for this journal entry and return to the Enter Pro Forma Journal Entries menu. Press Esc to exit, saving the amounts you have entered. List Pro Forma Journal Entries (3) Select 3 from the Enter Pro Forma Journal Entries menu to view or print a list of pro forma journal entries, and the following screen appears: Enter Journal Reference or press ENTER for all Journals Press Enter to include all pro forma journal entries, or enter a specific journal entry reference. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list. 1-50 Enter Transactions (ET)

CLS Main Menu Programs Created, Open (C,O) or press ENTER for all Journals Enter C if you want to include journal entries for which transactions have been created this period. Enter O if you want to include journal entries for which transactions have not been created this period (whether or not dollar amounts have been entered). Press Enter to include all journals. Include lines with no activity? (Y,N) [Y] Press Y to include lines with no activity (no dollar amount has been entered), or press N to suppress them. Continue? (Y,N) Enter Y to continue, or N to return to the Define Pro Forma Journal Entries menu. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the list, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Create Pro Forma JE Transactions (4) If transactions have not yet been created, you may select 4 from the Enter Pro Forma Journal Entries menu to create transactions from the amounts entered. The following screen appears: CLS lists all of the Pro Forma Journal Entries defined for this ledger. For each journal entry, a status is displayed. If the status field is blank, no dollar amounts have been entered for the journal entry. A diamond ( ) indicates that dollar amounts have been entered, but the journal is out of balance. A check ( ) indicates that dollar amounts have been entered and the journal is in balance. For each journal entry, CLS also indicates whether transactions have already been created this period. CLS automatically selects the eligible journal entries for which transactions may be created: amounts have been entered and are in balance, and no transactions have been created for them this period. Create Transactions, Select Journal Entries or Escape (C,S,Esc) Press C to create transactions for the selected journal entries. Press S if you want to create transactions for only some of the eligible journal entries, or if you want to recreate transactions for a journal entry. Press Esc to return to the Define Pro Forma Journal Entries menu. Tag or Untag ALL eligible Journal Entries (T,U) or ENTER to select If you pressed S above, you may press T to tag all eligible journal entries or U to un-tag all selected journal entries. To tag selected journal entries, press the Enter key and use the arrow keys (, ) to select them; press the space bar to tag or un-tag them. When finished with the selection process, Enter Transactions (ET) 1-51

CLS Main Menu Programs press Enter or Esc to return to the Create Transactions, Select Journal Entries or Escape prompt. Complete CLS creates the pro forma journal entries and returns to the ET menu. Enter Formal Journal Entries The availability of this option is based on your response to the Show ET Program Menu prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). You must answer Y to this prompt if you want to be able to enter formal journal entries here. A formal journal entry consists of a formal journal entry memo, along with the transactions that make up the journal entry. You may also attach a memo to a set of transactions that have already been entered. Once formal journal entries have been created, they can be printed using TR 3 or 6. Four steps are involved in the formal journal entry process. First, the journal entries must be entered. Second, an optional list of the changes or additions may be printed. Third, formal journal entries additions/deletions/changes must be processed. And fourth, any new transactions generated by the formal journal entries must be posted. Note: Unlike other ET menu selections, additions or changes made to formal journal entries will be lost if you leave this menu selection without processing them. Choose 5 from the Enter Transactions menu and the following menu appears: Asterisks beside menu selections 2 and 3 indicate routines that will be unavailable until formal journal entries have been entered. Enter Formal Journal Entries (1) Select 1 to enter formal journal entries, and the following screen appears: 1-52 Enter Transactions (ET)

CLS Main Menu Programs Source (0-19) Enter the source code to use for each formal journal entry. If you wish, you can use LI 4 to set up a source code to be used only for formal journal entries. Batch (0-99) Enter an optional batch number to use for the formal journal entry; the default is 0. Reference Enter a unique reference number for each formal journal entry. Date Enter the date to be used for all transactions associated with the formal journal entry. Description Enter a unique description to be used as the transaction description for each line of the journal entry unless specific transaction descriptions are entered below. Journal Entry Memo Enter the journal entry memo for this formal journal entry. You may enter approximately eleven and a half complete lines of text. When the finished, use the Tab key to move to the transaction fields, or use Shift-Tab to return to the journal entry description field. A/C A/C Description Line Description Amount You will see a diamond ( ) in the left-hand column of the transaction fields. When the cursor is on a diamond, you may use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll up or down. You may also press Enter to move to the account field, F4 to insert a new line, F5 to move a line, or F6 to delete a line. Use Tab to move to the Accept, Delete or Reset prompt, or use Shift-Tab to return to the journal entry memo field. Enter an account number for each line of the journal entry. The corresponding account description will be displayed. In the A/C field, you may press F1 to list accounts, or F3 to add or edit accounts. An optional transaction description may also be entered, which will become the transaction description when transactions are created. To accept a transaction, press Enter in the amount field; press Esc to return to the left-hand side of the screen without saving it. Accept, Delete or Reset? (A,D,R) Press A to accept a new or revised journal entry and save it in a temporary file. Press D to delete the entire formal journal entry, including all the transactions associated with it. Press R to refresh the screen with the information stored in the ledger data files. If either D or R is pressed, and the formal journal entry does not yet exist in the ledger data files, the new journal entry will be removed from the temporary file. Enter Transactions (ET) 1-53

CLS Main Menu Programs Notes: Additions, deletions or changes to formal journal entries do not take place until you run Menu Selection 3, Process Additions/Deletions/Changes. They will be lost if you do not process them. If you want to delete the journal entry memo for an existing formal journal entry, but want to keep the transactions, don t delete the journal entry. Instead, blank out the journal entry memo, then accept the entry and process it using Menu Selection 3. List Changes to Formal JE s (2) Select 2 from the Enter Formal Journal Entries menu to view or print a list of the changes to be made. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue. Press Esc or N to return to the Enter Formal Journal Entries menu without printing the report. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the list of changes to be made, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. CLS returns to the Enter Formal Journal Entries menu when the report is complete. Process Additions/Deletions/Changes (3) Select 3 from the Enter Formal Journal Entries menu to process additions, deletions or changes to the formal journal entries. New or replacement transactions will be created if necessary. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue. Press Esc or N to return to the Enter Formal Journal Entries menu without processing. Complete CLS creates or updates the formal journal entries. If new or replacement transactions were created, CLS will take you to the PT menu so you can post them; otherwise it will return to the ET menu. Enter Calculated Journal Entries The availability of this option is based on your response to the Show ET Program Menu prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). You must answer Y to this prompt if you want to be able to enter calculated journal entries here. The primary purpose of calculated journal entries is to automate the process of allocating overhead expenses to departmental accounts. You can also use them to create simple debit/credit pairs of transactions based on pre-defined percentages of certain account balances or on fixed amounts. Calculated journal entries consist of one or more journal entries and the calculations associated with them. The journal entries will be processed in the order in which they appear on-screen. Within each journal entry, the calculations will be executed in the order in which they appear onscreen. Three steps are involved in defining a calculated journal entry. First, each journal entry must be 1-54 Enter Transactions (ET)

CLS Main Menu Programs created. Second, each calculation within a journal entry must be defined. And last, if you are allocating overhead to individual departments, you must specify the departments involved. Two steps are involved in actually creating the calculated journal entries. First, use either CT 7 or ET 6 (4) to generate the appropriate transactions. Next, any transactions generated by the calculated journal entries must be posted using PT 1. Calculated journal entries will be assigned source code J. Choose 6 from the Enter Transactions menu and the following menu appears: Asterisks (*) beside menu selections 2, 3 and 4 indicate routines that will be unavailable until calculated journal entries have been defined. A diamond ( ) by menu selection 4 indicates that CJE transactions have already been created for this period; they will be replaced if you continue. Define Calculated Journal Entries (1) Select 1 to define calculated journal entries, and the following screen appears: Select a Calculated Journal Entry Note: If you haven t yet created any calculated journal entries, you will see the Add a new Calculated Journal Entry screen instead. Choose a journal entry and press any of the following keys: Enter Press Enter to add or edit a calculation for the journal entry. F1 Press F1 to add a new journal entry. CLS will provide a default reference, which you can override. You may also specify a description, batch number and options. F2 Press F2 to edit the journal entry. You may change the journal entry description, batch number and/or options. Enter Transactions (ET) 1-55

CLS Main Menu Programs F3 Press F3 to change the journal entry reference. You cannot duplicate an existing reference. F4 Press F4 to insert a new journal entry above the current cursor position. F5 Press F5 to move the journal entry (i.e., change its processing sequence). F6 Press F6 to delete a journal entry and all of its associated calculations. Add or edit a Calculated Journal Entry (F1 or F2 above) CJE Ref Accept the default reference provided by CLS or enter your own. Description Enter a description for this calculated journal entry. This will become the default description for each of its calculations. Batch No. Enter a batch number for the transactions created by this journal entry. The default is 0 (zero). CJE Options You may choose any of the following options: F Use CJE at fiscal year end only D Don t auto-create department accounts P Use CJE for non-fye periods only X Journal Entry is inactive Change a CJE Reference (F3 above) 1-56 Enter Transactions (ET)

CLS Main Menu Programs Current CJE Ref Description Batch No. CJE Options CLS will display the current reference and description of the journal entry you selected. New CJE Reference Enter the new reference for this journal entry. CLS will verify that this reference isn t already in use by another calculated journal entry. Select a CJE Calculation Notes: To select a CJE Calculation, Select a Calculated Journal Entry (above) and press Enter. If you haven t yet created any calculated journal entries, you will see the Add a new CJE Calculation screen instead. Choose a CJE calculation and press any of the following keys: Enter or F2 Press Enter or F2 to edit a calculation. F1 Press F1 to add a new calculation. CLS will provide the calculation number (an internal reference); you cannot change it. Your entries will determine the way the calculation behaves. F4 Press F4 to insert a new calculation above the current cursor position. F5 Press F5 to move the calculation (i.e., change its processing sequence). F6 Press F6 to delete a calculation and any of its associated departments. Enter Transactions (ET) 1-57

CLS Main Menu Programs Add or edit a CJE Calculation (Enter, F1 or F2 above) Note: For Allocation Methods 1-3, press F2 in any field to select the departments you wish to allocate amounts to, and follow the on-screen directions. When adding a new department, you may press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. Calc Description Enter a description for this calculation. This description will appear in each transaction generated by the calculation. Allocation Type Choose the type of allocation you wish to perform: A Allocate account balance(s) F Allocate a fixed amount Allocation Method Choose the allocation method you wish to use: 1 Department allocation fixed percent Allocates a fixed percentage to each of the listed departments. 2 Department allocation total amount Allocates the total amount between the listed departments, based on each department s relative share of the basis. 3 Department allocation pro rata amount Allocates between the listed departments, based on each department s actual share of the basis. The total amount will not be allocated unless all departments with a share of the basis are listed. 4 Non-departmental fixed percent Use this method to create a pair of transactions that are based on a fixed percentage of the basis or on a fixed amount. Accounts to Allocate For allocation methods 1-3: List the expense accounts whose balances are to be allocated. You may use a colon to specify a range of accounts (e.g., 801:80999). Use a space or comma to separate accounts or ranges. 1-58 Enter Transactions (ET)

CLS Main Menu Programs Accounts for Basis For Allocation Methods 2-4: List the revenue accounts to be used as the basis for the allocation. (While this basis can be based on something other than revenue, the list of basis accounts must not contain the accounts to be allocated). Department to Allocate For Allocation Methods 1-3: Enter the department to be allocated from (i.e., the overhead department). Remember, press F2 to enter the list of departments to allocate balances to. Department Filter For Allocation Method 4: Optionally select a single department to filter the accounts used to calculate the amount to be allocated, or leave the field blank to use all the accounts in the range. Portion to Allocate For Allocation Type A, Allocation Methods 1-3: Enter (as a percentage) the portion of the allocation amount you want divided among the listed departments. Normally this will be 100%. Percentage to Allocate For Allocation Type A, Allocation Method 4: Enter the percentage of the basis to be used in this calculation. Minimum Balance You may specify a minimum balance for the allocation accounts (Allocation Methods 1-3) or for the basis accounts (Allocation Method 4); the default is $0.00. Transactions will not be created if the allocation (or basis) account total is already at or below the minimum balance. Use a Calculation Option (A, N or O, below) to specify what should happen if the balance will fall below the minimum if transactions are created. Optional Source Account Optional Target Account For Allocation Methods 1-3: You may enter specific accounts to be used for the cost allocation transactions. If these fields are left blank, the transactions will use the accounts being allocated. Source Account Target Account For Allocation Method 4: Enter the accounts to be used for the transactions. These are required fields. Calculation Options You may choose any of the following options: A Always allocate the full amount D Don t auto-create department accounts F Use calculation at fiscal year end only N Don t create if balance will fall below minimum O Only use amount above minimum P Use calculation for non-fye periods only X Calculation is inactive Accept, Delete or Escape? (A,D,Esc) Press A to accept a new or revised calculation. Press D to delete the entire calculation. Press Escape to leave without saving your changes. Enter Transactions (ET) 1-59

CLS Main Menu Programs List Calculated Journal Entries (2) Select 2 from the Enter Calculated Journal Entries menu to view or print a list of the Calculated Journal Entries and their calculations. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue. Press Esc or N to return to the Enter Calculated Journal Entries menu without printing the report. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the list, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. CLS returns to the Enter Calculated Journal Entries menu when the report is complete. Print Calculated JE Audit Trail (3) Select 3 from the Enter Calculated Journal Entries menu to view or print the Calculated Journal Entry transactions that will be created if you run CT 7 or ET 6 (4). The transactions will not be created after the report is printed. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue. Press Esc or N to return to the Enter Calculated Journal Entries menu without printing the report. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the list, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. CLS returns to the Enter Calculated Journal Entries menu when the report is complete. Create Calculated JE Transactions (4) Select 4 from the Enter Calculated Journal Entries menu to create the calculated journal entries based on the parameters you have chosen. You may also use CT 7 if you prefer. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to create the calculated journal entries. You may re-run this routine as often as you like. When complete, use the Post Transactions program (PT) to post the transactions that have been created. 1-60 Enter Transactions (ET)

CLS Main Menu Programs Ledger Consolidation 1.6 The Ledger Consolidation (LC) program lets you consolidate up to 25 ledgers into a pre-defined consolidation ledger. For example, several ledgers of subsidiary companies can be consolidated into a single holding company ledger. The consolidation ledger I.D. must start with an ampersand (&) to prevent confusion with a real ledger. Note: When creating a consolidation ledger, copy the chart of accounts from one of the ledgers to be consolidated and answer Y to the Copy Master Ledger Setup Information prompt. Also copy the supplemental report formats from the master ledger if you plan to print a Cash Flow Statement for the consolidated ledger. The consolidation process creates a single ledger with combined account balances, so that financial statements may be produced for the consolidated entity. Payroll balances and transaction detail are not consolidated. More information on the ledger consolidation process may be found in Chapter 5 of the Getting Started Guide, CLS Concepts. Enter LC from the CLS Main Menu and the following menu appears: Ledger Consolidation (LC) 1-61

CLS Main Menu Programs Consolidate Ledgers Choose 1 from the LC menu to consolidate ledgers, and the following screen appears: Data Drive or Path CLS displays the current data drive or path. Consolidation Path Enter the location of the consolidation ledger, or press Enter to accept the default. Consolidation Ledger I.D. (&??) Enter the ledger I.D. for the consolidation ledger. The first character must be an ampersand (&) and the ledger must already exist. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of ledgers. Consolidation Generation Enter the generation of the consolidation ledger. The current file generation for the consolidation ledger will probably be 000, since you do not need to run End of Period Processing (EP) on consolidation ledgers. Press F1 to select the generation from a pop-up list. CLS displays the name of the consolidation ledger. You may consolidate up to 25 ledgers into the consolidation ledger. Enter each ledger using the format: Drive:\Path\Ledger.Generation. It is not necessary to indicate a drive or path if the ledgers to be consolidated are in the default data path. Press Esc when finished. (CLS will save information about this consolidation for later use.) Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue. Press N to return to the Consolidation Path prompt. ***Warning*** [Ledger I.D.] not found. You may enter a different Ledger I.D., press ENTER to skip this Ledger, or press ESC to abort the consolidation. Enter Choice: This prompt appears if CLS cannot find one of the ledgers to be consolidated. You may enter a new ledger I.D. (and drive or path) to be consolidated. Press Enter to continue without including this ledger, or press Esc to stop the consolidation process. Complete CLS consolidates the selected ledgers and returns to the LC menu. 1-62 Ledger Consolidation (LC)

CLS Main Menu Programs Ledger Initialization 1.7 Use the LI program to create and define the parameters for a new ledger. Among the items you will define are: Ledger Name Number of Accounting Periods Current Period-End Date Account Ranges Source Code Descriptions Financial Statement Headings Financial Statement Footnotes Period-End Dates Transmittal Letter Address The LI program also lets you delete ledgers and ledger generations, change a ledger I.D., change a ledger's current generation number, rebuild the ledger control file, expand the account master file and change the account number format. Enter LI from the CLS Main Menu and the following menu appears: Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-63

CLS Main Menu Programs Create a New Ledger Choose 1 from the LI menu to create a new ledger, and the following screen appears: Ledger I.D. Depending on your selection at the Ledger I.D. Length prompt in SI, Menu Selection 1 (1), you may enter a three or four-character ledger I.D. This code may be any sequence of letters or digits. CLS will warn you if the ledger you are trying to create already exists. Note: If this ledger will be used as a consolidation ledger, you must use an ampersand (&) as the first character of the Ledger I.D. Ledger Name 1 Ledger Name 2 Enter the company name, up to 50 characters per line. Note: The ledger name can be changed later using Menu Selection 3 (1) or 3 (2). Account Format - Major Portion (3-6) Set the length of the major portion of the account number. CLS defaults to 3 digits. Account Format - Dept Length (0-4) Set the length of the departmental portion of the account number. CLS defaults to 2 digits. Comparative Financial Statements (Y,N) Period-Budget Income Statements (Y,N) Select the type of financial statements you want to prepare for this ledger. The default responses are those set in SI, Menu Selection 1 (1). Once a ledger has been created, you may change your selection of comparative reports using LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), but only within the available record size. For example, if you do not select comparative and period-budget reports when you create the ledger, you may not print a Prior-Year Comparative Income Statement or a Period-Budget Income Statement unless you expand the account master file using the LI program, Menu Selection 9 (7). Would you like to create this ledger? (Y,N) Press Y to create the ledger. Press N or Esc to return to the Ledger I.D. prompt without creating the ledger. Creating Ledger 'TGP'... Complete CLS creates the new ledger and returns to the LI menu. 1-64 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Copy Chart of Accounts, etc. Choose 2 from the LI menu to copy an existing Chart of Accounts, Report Formats, Table of Contents, Footnotes, Notepad, Client Bill, Income Tax Summary, Financial Ratios or Pro Forma Journal Entries to a new ledger. Copy Chart of Accounts (1) Use this routine to copy a Chart of Accounts. The new ledger cannot have any accounts already set up. If you need additional accounts, copy the Chart of Accounts first and then add the new accounts. Data Drive or Path CLS displays the location of the new ledger files. Master Drive or Path Enter the location of the ledger with the Chart of Accounts to be copied. Note: Enter the same drive for the new ledger and the master ledger only if both are on the same disk. If the new ledger is on a floppy disk, the master ledger must be on the hard drive or on a floppy disk in another drive. Master Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger with the Chart of Accounts to be copied. Press F1 to select from a popup list of ledgers. Enter JCC to use the sample data. Master Generation CLS supplies the current generation, which you may change. Press F1 to select the generation from a pop-up list. Copy Master Ledger setup information? (Y,N) Press Y to copy ledger information such as account ranges, source codes, financial statement headings and footnotes, etc. from the master ledger. The new ledger's name, budget and comparative report selections, creation date and transmittal letter address will not be changed. Press N to copy the Chart of Accounts without copying ledger setup information. Copy ONLY non-departmental accounts? (Y,N) If the master ledger is departmentalized, press Y to copy only the non-departmental accounts. Press N to copy all accounts. Copying Master Chart of Accounts This may take a few minutes... 5100 5200 5300 10100 10300... *** Complete *** Each account number appears as it is copied. Balances in the new ledger are set to zero. CLS returns to the Copy Chart of Accounts, etc. menu after copying the master Chart of Accounts to the new ledger. Copy Report Formats (2) Use this routine to copy supplemental report formats from one ledger to another. A diamond ( ) will appear beside this menu selection if report formats already exist for this ledger; they may be overwritten. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-65

CLS Main Menu Programs Data Drive or Path CLS displays the location of the new ledger files. Master Drive or Path Enter the location of the ledger with the report file to be copied. Note: Enter the same drive for the new ledger and the master ledger only if both are on the same physical disk. If the new ledger is on a floppy disk, the master ledger must be on the hard drive or on a floppy disk in another drive. Master Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger with the report format to copy. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of ledgers on file. Enter JCC to use the sample data. Master Generation CLS supplies the current generation, which you may change. Press F1 to select the generation from a pop-up list. Continue? (Y,N) Verify that you selected the correct ledger with the report formats to copy. Press Y to continue, or press N to return to the Data Drive or Path prompt. Select the reports you wish to copy: You must individually select the reports you wish to copy. A diamond ( ) next to a particular report indicates that it already exists in the current ledger, and will be overwritten if you select it. A space next to a particular report indicates that it isn t present in either the master or the current ledger. Copying Report Master File This may take a few minutes... Cash Flow Statement Line 0000 STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS *** Complete *** Each line description appears as it is copied. Line balances in the new ledger are set to zero. CLS returns to the Copy Chart of Accounts, etc. menu after copying the master report file to the new ledger. Copy Table of Contents, Footnotes, Notepad, Client Bill (3) Use this routine to copy the Table of Contents, Footnotes, Notepad or Client Bill from one ledger to another. A diamond ( ) will appear beside this menu selection if any of these documents already exist for this ledger; they may be overwritten if necessary. Data Drive or Path CLS displays the location of the new ledger files. Master Drive or Path Enter the location of the ledger with the table of contents file to be copied. Master Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger with the table of contents file to copy. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of ledgers on file. Enter JCC to use the sample data. 1-66 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Master Generation CLS supplies the current generation, which you may change. Press F1 to select the generation from a pop-up list. Continue? (Y,N) Verify that you selected the correct ledger with the table of contents file to copy. Press Y to continue, or press N to return to the Data Drive or Path prompt. Select the documents you wish to copy: You must individually select the documents you wish to copy. A diamond ( ) next to a particular document indicates that it already exists in the current ledger, and will be overwritten if you select it. A space next to a particular document indicates that it isn t present in either the master or the current ledger. Copying TOC, Footnotes, Notepad, Client Bill... *** Complete *** CLS copies the Table of Contents, Footnotes, Notepad and/or Client Bill to the selected ledger and returns to the Copy Chart of Accounts, etc. menu. Copy Memorized Descriptions (4) Use this routine to copy memorized descriptions from one ledger to another. A diamond ( ) will appear beside this menu selection if memorized descriptions already exist for the current ledger; they may be overwritten. Data Drive or Path CLS displays the location of the new ledger files. Master Drive or Path Enter the location of the ledger with the memorized descriptions to be copied. Master Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger with the memorized descriptions to copy. Press F1 to select from a popup list of ledgers on file. Enter JCC to use the sample data. Master Generation CLS supplies the current generation, which you may change. Press F1 to select the generation from a pop-up list. Continue? (Y,N) Verify that you selected the correct ledger with the memorized descriptions to copy. Press Y to continue, or press N to return to the Data Drive or Path prompt. Copying Description Master File... *** Complete *** CLS copies the memorized descriptions to the selected ledger and returns to the Copy Chart of Accounts, etc. menu. Copy Leadsheets (5) Use this routine to copy leadsheet definitions from one ledger to another. A diamond ( ) will appear beside this menu selection if leadsheets already exist for the current ledger; they may be overwritten. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-67

CLS Main Menu Programs Data Drive or Path CLS displays the location of the new ledger files. Master Drive or Path Enter the location of the ledger with the leadsheets to be copied. Master Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger with the leadsheets to copy. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of ledgers on file. Enter JCC to use the sample data. Master Generation CLS supplies the current generation, which you may change. Press F1 to select the generation from a pop-up list. Continue? (Y,N) Verify that you selected the correct ledger with the leadsheets to copy. Press Y to continue, or press N to return to the Data Drive or Path prompt. Copy Leadsheet Accounts? (0-2) You may also copy leadsheet account assignments from the master ledger. Select 0 if you do not want to copy the account assignments, 1 if you want to replace the leadsheet accounts with those in the master ledger, or 2 if you want to merge the leadsheet accounts in the master ledger. Copying Leadsheets... *** Complete *** CLS copies the leadsheets to the selected ledger and returns to the Copy Chart of Accounts, etc. menu. Copy Income Tax Summary (6) Use this routine to copy the income tax summary setup from one ledger to another. A diamond ( ) will appear beside this menu selection if the income tax summary already exists for this ledger or if this ledger has not been set up in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), to use the income tax summary. Notes: An asterisk (*) will appear beside this menu selection if a chart of accounts does not exist for the new ledger. The account number format must be the same for both the master ledger and the new ledger. Data Drive or Path CLS displays the location of the new ledger files. Master Drive or Path Enter the location of the ledger with the income tax summary to be copied. Master Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger with the income tax summary to copy. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of ledgers on file. Enter JCC to use the sample data. Master Generation CLS supplies the current generation, which you may change. Press F1 to select the generation from a pop-up list. 1-68 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Continue? (Y,N) Verify that you selected the correct ledger with the income tax summary to copy. Press Y to continue, or press N to return to the Data Drive or Path prompt. Copying Income Tax Summary... *** Complete *** CLS copies the income tax summary to the new ledger and returns to the Copy Chart of Accounts, etc. menu. Copy Financial Ratios (7) Use this routine to copy financial ratios from one ledger to another. A diamond ( ) will appear beside this menu selection if ratios already exist for this ledger; they may be overwritten. Data Drive or Path CLS displays the location of the new ledger files. Master Drive or Path Enter the location of the ledger with the financial ratios to be copied. Master Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger with the ratios to copy. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of ledgers on file. Enter JCC to use the sample data. Master Generation CLS supplies the current generation, which you may change. Press F1 to select the generation from a pop-up list. Continue? (Y,N) Verify that you selected the correct ledger with the ratios to copy. Press Y to continue, or press N to return to the Data Drive or Path prompt. Copying Financial Ratios... *** Complete *** CLS copies the financial ratios to the new ledger and returns to the Copy Chart of Accounts, etc. menu. Copy Pro Forma Journal Entries (8) Use this routine to copy pro forma journal entries from one ledger to another. A diamond ( ) will appear beside this menu selection if pro forma journal entries already exist for this ledger; they may be overwritten. Data Drive or Path CLS displays the location of the new ledger files. Master Drive or Path Enter the location of the ledger with the pro forma journal entries to be copied. Master Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger with the pro forma journal entries to copy. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of ledgers on file. Enter JCC to use the sample data. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-69

CLS Main Menu Programs Master Generation CLS supplies the current generation, which you may change. Press F1 to select the generation from a pop-up list. Continue? (Y,N) Verify that you selected the correct ledger with the pro forma journal entries to copy. Press Y to continue, or press N to return to the Data Drive or Path prompt. Copying Pro Forma Journal Entries... *** Complete *** CLS copies the pro forma journal entries to the new ledger and returns to the Copy Chart of Accounts, etc. menu. Revise Basic Ledger Information Choose 3 from the LI menu to revise basic ledger information for the current ledger. You may also define current/retained earnings accounts and special format P&Ls. Revise Basic Ledger Setup Information (1) Notes: The company name entered here will also be used as the default when a payroll or vendor series is created for this ledger. Use the page-up, page-down and arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the screen. Company Name 1 Company Name 2 Enter the company name, up to 50 characters per line. 1-70 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Retention Cycle (1-99) Enter the number of prior generations to keep on the backup disk for this ledger. No. of Fiscal Periods (1-13) Enter the number of accounting periods per year. To process this ledger quarterly, select four periods per year, or select 12 periods per year and process every three months. EP Period Increment Enter the number of periods to use for incrementing the period number and period-end date during end of period processing (EP). First Active Period Enter the first active period for this fiscal year. Except for short years, the first active period should be 1. FYE Date Enter the fiscal year-end date in mmddyy format. Current Fiscal Period Current PE Date Enter the current fiscal period number and the current period-end date in mmddyy format. Previous Fiscal Period Previous PE Date The previous period number and date are set by CLS. They are used by the P&L Statement (PL) program to determine the number of months in the current period. Calendar Quarter (1-4) Calendar Quarter Ending Date Select the current calendar quarter, and enter the quarter-end date. Although this information is used only by the CLS passive payroll, it must be entered. Assets Low Account Liab & Equity Low Account Liab & Equity High Account Income Low Account Expense High Account Enter the valid account ranges for your Chart of Accounts. Account numbers may be up to eight digits long. If an account number is entered with a length less than or equal to the length of the major portion, the departmental digits will be automatically set to zero. Balance Sheet Type (S,D,J) Select a Standard, Departmental, or Job-Cost Balance Sheet. Press F1 to select the report type from a pop-up list. Balance Sheet Format (1,2) Press 1 to select a three-column current-year and six-column comparative Balance Sheet format. Press 2 to select a two-column format for both current-year and comparative Balance Sheets. Press F1 to select the format from a pop-up list. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-71

CLS Main Menu Programs BS Master Job Account BS Last Job Account If you selected a Job Cost Balance Sheet, enter the master job account and last job account. See Chapter 5, CLS Concepts, in the CLS Getting Started Guide for additional information about job costing. Comparative Balance Sheet Press Y to prepare a prior-year Comparative Balance Sheet for this ledger. CLS will then update the comparative balance fields of all Balance Sheet accounts at the end of each period. Notes: You must select Y to be able to enter Comparative Balance Sheet history using the MF program, Menu Selection 3. CLS will not recognize a Y response unless you selected comparative financial statements when the ledger was created or expanded the account masterfile in LI, Menu Selection 9 (7), to include comparative financial statements. BS Job Cost Budgets Press Y if you selected a Job Cost Balance Sheet and would like to produce work-in-progress subschedules comparing actual expenditures with budgeted amounts. Print Underlines on BS Press Y to print a single line under subtotals and a double line under section totals on the Balance Sheet and the Statement of Changes in Financial Position. Prepare Subschedule (1-3) Press 1 if you would like subsidiary schedules (with account detail for all group accounts, or for all jobs if you selected a Job Cost Balance Sheet) printed along with the Balance Sheet. Press 2 to print only the Balance Sheet. Press 3 to print only the subschedule. Press F1 to select from a popup list of options. BS Subschedule Format (1-3) Select the format for the Balance Sheet schedule. Press 1 to print current period and year-to-date balances, press 2 to print only year-to-date balances in the left column, or press 3 to print only yearto-date balances in the right column. Income Statement Type (S,D,J) Select a Standard, Departmental, or Job-Cost Income Statement. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of available report types. P&L Master Job Account P&L Last Job Account If you plan to prepare a Job Cost Income Statement, enter the master job account and last job account. Comparative P&L Press Y to prepare a prior-year Comparative P&L Statement for this ledger. CLS will update the comparative balance fields of all Income Statement accounts at the end of each period. Notes: You must select Y to be able to enter Comparative P&L history using the MF program, Menu Selection 3. 1-72 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs CLS will not recognize a Y response unless you selected comparative financial statements when the ledger was created or expanded the account masterfile in LI, Menu Selection 9 (7), to include comparative financial statements. Period-Budget P&L Press Y if you plan to prepare a Period-Budget P&L Statement for this ledger. Press N if you do not want a Period-Budget P&L or you are planning to use annual budgets which will be de-annualized to produce current-period and year-to-date budgets. Notes: You must select Y to be able to enter period budgets using the MF program, Menu Selection 4. CLS will not recognize a Y response unless you selected period-budget income statements when the ledger was created or expanded the account masterfile in LI, Menu Selection 9 (7), to include period-budget income statements. P&L Percent Decimals (1,2) Press 1 if you want percentages or ratios on Profit and Loss Statements to be shown with one decimal place. Press 2 if you want two decimal places. Trend Analysis Dollar Format (0-5) Select the dollar format for the Trend Analysis (3, 6, and 12 period P&Ls). Press F1 to select the format from a pop-up list. Trend Analysis Dollar Format 0 Standard format (dollars and cents) 3 Round dollars and use short date 1 Round amounts to whole dollars 4 Limit and round dollars and abbreviate month 2 Use short date format 5 Preview Mode Note: If you select option 4, you may laser-print a 12-period P&L on standard (8½" x 11") paper in the landscape mode. Trend Analysis Total Column (1,2) Select the Total column type for the Trend Analysis (3, 6 and 12-period P&Ls). Press 1 to print year-to-date totals in the Total column, or press 2 to print the total of the balances in the columns shown. Press F1 to select the total column type from a pop-up list. Special P&L 1-4 Dollar Format (0-5) Select the dollar format for the special format P&Ls. Press F1 to select the format from a pop-up list. Special Format P&L Dollar Format 0 Standard format (dollars and cents) 3 Round dollars and use short date 1 Round amounts to whole dollars 4 Limit and round dollars and abbreviate month 2 Use short date format 5 Preview Mode Statement of Income & RE (0-2) Press 0 if you do not want this report printed, press 1 if you want it to print on standard P&Ls, or press 2 if you want it to print on all P&Ls. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of available selections. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-73

CLS Main Menu Programs New Page for Income and RE Stmt If you chose to prepare a Statement of Income and Retained Earnings at the previous prompt, press Y to print the report on a separate page. Press N to print the report at the end of the P&L. Prepare Subschedule Press 1 if you would like subsidiary schedules (with account detail for all group accounts, or for all jobs if you selected a Job Cost P&L) printed along with the P&L. Press 2 to print only the P&L. Press 3 to print only the subschedule. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of options. Cash Flow Statement (0-8) Statement of Chgs (0-8) User-defined Rept 1-3 (0-8) Comp Cash Flow Statement (0-8) Comp Statement of Chgs (0-8) Comp User-defined Rept 1-3 (0-8) Select the account format for each supplemental report. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of report options. Supplemental Report Account Range Options 0 Inactive supplemental report 5 BS & PL accounts - allow unassigned accounts 1 BS accounts only - allow unassigned accounts 6 BS & PL accounts - validate all BS accounts 2 BS accounts only - validate all accounts 7 BS & PL accounts - validate all PL accounts 3 PL accounts only - allow unassigned accounts 8 BS & PL accounts - validate all accounts 4 PL accounts only - validate all accounts Current on Cash Flow Statement Press Y if you would like to show current period activity on the Cash Flow Statement. Press N to suppress the current period activity column. Bracket Credit Balances Press Y to place parentheses around contra balances on the Balance Sheet, P&L Statement, Cash Flow Statement and Statement of Changes in Financial Position. Press N to show these balances with a trailing minus (-) sign. Print Account Numbers Press Y to print account numbers on financial statements. Print Zeros on Financial Stmts Press Y to print zeros on financial statements. Dollar-Sign Type (0-2) Press 0 to suppress the dollar sign on financial statements. Press 1 to print a fixed dollar sign, or press 2 to use a floating dollar sign. Press F1 to select the dollar-sign type from a pop-up list. Dollar Format (0,2) Select the dollar format for financial statements (other than 3, 6 and 12-period or special format P&Ls). Press 0 to use the standard format (dollars and cents). Press 1 if you want amounts rounded to whole dollars. Press 2 to use the Preview Mode. Press F1 to select the format from a pop-up list. 1-74 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Financial Statement Print Options: Use Global Settings Press Y to use the special printing effects (bold, italics and/or underline) defined in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (2), for all ledgers in the current data path. Press N to set these effects at the ledger level using programs MF, RF and the prompts below. Ledger Column Headings (BI) Ledger Footnote Positions A-D,G (BIU) Ledger Footnote Position E,F (BIU) Ledger Page Numbers (BIU) If you chose to set printing effects for each ledger, choose the effect to use for column headings, footnotes and page numbers when laser-printing financial statements. AT Suspense Account (optional) You may define an account to be used in place of invalid accounts when importing transactions using the Accounting Transfer (AT) program. After importing a transfer file, you may then use program ET to edit the transaction account numbers as needed. If the suspense account is not defined and CLS finds invalid accounts, transactions for those accounts will be rejected. Press F1 to select from a pop-up chart of accounts for this ledger. Master Department (optional) You may enter a master department to be used by program MF, Menu Selection 6. If no entry is made, CLS will use the master accounts. Show ET Program Menu Press Y if you would like to have access to the ET program menu. This will let you enter a trial balance, a Summary Journal Entry or Pro Forma Journal Entries. CLS will then create the required transactions. Use Income Tax Summary Press Y if you plan to enter tax form, schedule and line information in program MF, Menu Selection 1. You may use program ML, Menu Selection 5, to list the income tax cross-reference and program TB, Menu Selection 6, to print an income tax summary. Note: If you have installed the CLS ~ Tax Package Interface add-on program, but select Y at the Use Income Tax Summary prompt, you will not be able to assign tax package interface codes to accounts in this ledger using MF, Menu Selection 1. Auto Create Accounts Press Y if you want to create postable accounts and departmental or job accounts during transaction entry (ET). Departmentalize all Transactions Press Y to allow only departmentalized transactions to be entered in the Enter Transactions (ET) program. If you selected a departmental format at the Balance Sheet Type (S,D,J) or Income Statement Type (S,D,J) prompts, CLS will validate departmental accounts during transaction entry based on the account ranges defined in LI and the departments defined in program DF. Memorize Descriptions (0-5) Depending on your response to this prompt, CLS will memorize and autofill transaction descriptions during transaction entry (ET). Press F1 to select the memorize mode from a pop-up list. If you choose to autofill accounts, the corresponding amounts entered in DM will also be autofilled; new Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-75

CLS Main Menu Programs amounts entered in ET will not be memorized. Memorize Description Modes 0 Do not memorize or autofill descriptions 1 Memorize descriptions, but do not autofill 2 Memorize and autofill descriptions 3 Memorize and autofill descriptions and accounts 4 Autofill descriptions, but do not memorize 5 Autofill descriptions and accounts, but do not memorize Display Accounts (0-2) An entry in this field is optional; if left blank, CLS will use the value entered in SI 1 (1). Enter 0 if you do not want account names displayed while entering transactions in ET, 1 if you do want them displayed, or 2 to display both account and department names. AT Edit List Type (C,E) An entry in this field is optional; if left blank, CLS will use the value entered in SI 1 (1). Enter C if you want CLS to default to a complete edit listing when importing transactions in the AT program, or E if you want to default to exceptions only. Prompt for EP Balance Forward (0-2) Depending on your response here, you may be asked at the end of each period or year (EP) if you want to bring ledger balances forward. Press 0 to automatically bring balances forward, press 1 to be prompted only at year-end, or press 2 to be asked at the end of each period if you want to bring balances forward. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of available selections. Default Source Code (0-19) You may enter a default source code to be used by the ET program for this ledger. If this field is left blank, the ET program will use the default source code defined in SI 1 (1). Prepare Posting Journal Press Y if you would like a report printed when transactions are posted or deleted. The answer to this prompt will be used as the default in program PT. Access Beginning Balances Press Y to allow entry of beginning payroll balances using EF, Menu Selection 2. Show Deletes on GL Show Deletes on QA Press Y to include deleted transactions on the General Ledger or in query account detail (QA). Press N to suppress them. Summarize Payroll on GL (0-2) Summarize Payroll on QA (0-2) Depending upon your selection here, CLS will show a summary of transactions posted to the payroll journal on the General Ledger or in query account detail (QA) in place of the transaction detail. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of options. 1-76 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Summarize Payroll Options 0 Don t summarize payroll 1 Summarize deductions only 2 Summarize deductions and gross wages TF, TW Consolidation (0-2) The payroll selection here will be used as the default when printing tax forms (TF), 940s, 941s and state continuation sheets (TW). Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of options. Consolidation Options 0 Print separate totals for each series. 1 Consolidate series totals by Federal I.D. and use the same employer/payer name and address. 2 Consolidate series totals by State I.D. and use the same employer/payer name and address. Keep Annual Detail for TR Press Y if you want CLS to keep annual transaction detail so you may prepare a year-to-date General Ledger or Transaction Register. Keeping annual detail may use considerable disk space if you have a large number of transactions per month. Press N if you want only current period detail. Note: If you answer Y to this prompt, CLS stores all year-to-date transactions in the current generation. CLS can store approximately 300,000-400,000 transactions in a ledger s transaction file. Sort Transactions on TR The Transaction Register by Source Code is normally printed with transactions sorted by reference number. Press N if you want to print transactions in the order in which they were entered. This choice slightly decreases the processing time when posting transactions, but produces less informative reports. Show Deletes on TR Press Y to show deleted transactions (marked DL) on the Transaction Register. Print Footnotes on TR Press Y to print footnotes on current period or year-to-date Transaction Registers. CLS uses the footnotes defined in LI 6, but will only print those that appear at the bottom of a page. Print Title Accounts on GL Press Y to print title accounts on the General Ledger. Print Zero Balance Accts on GL Press Y to print accounts with zero balances on the General Ledger. Print Footnotes on GL Press Y to print footnotes on current period or year-to-date general ledgers. CLS uses the footnotes defined in LI 6, but will only print those that appear at the bottom of a page. Print Company Name 2 on Reports Press Y to print the second line of the company name on non-financial reports. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-77

CLS Main Menu Programs Export Accounts Export Departments Export Employees/Vendors Export Transactions If you will use the Accounting Transfer (AT) program to interface with another Client Ledger System product, choose the items to be exported. Update transmittal letter name? Update employer name? Correct? (Y,N) If you change the company name, you can also update this information for use by other CLS programs. You may update the company (employer) information to be used in the Transmittal Letter (TL) program and PF, Menu Selection 1. Press N to update the information only in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the ledger information. Press Esc to return to the previous menu. Complete CLS updates the ledger information and returns to the Revise Basic Ledger Information menu. Revise Basic Company Information (2) Notes: The company name, address, and the employer's federal and state payroll tax I.D.s entered here will be used as default values when a payroll series is created for this ledger. Use the page-up, page-down and arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the screen. Company Name 1 Company Name 2 Enter the company name, up to 50 characters per line. Address Line 1 Address Line 2 City State Zip Enter the complete company address. 1-78 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Entity Type Enter the entity type for this ledger (e.g., (a corporation) ). Business License Enter the business license number. Sales Tax ID Other Tax ID Enter the sales tax and/or other tax I.D.s. Pin for EFTPS Enter the pin number for EFTPS. Federal I.D. No. Enter the employer's federal withholding I.D. (FEI) number. Enter hyphens (-) as needed. W/H State #1 Enter the standard two-character postal abbreviation of the withholding state. State #1 W/H I.D. Enter the employer's state withholding I.D., up to 12 characters. W/H State #2 You may designate a second withholding state. Due to the added complexity of tracking gross wages and withholding by state in a single payroll series, we do not recommend it. State #2 W/H I.D. If you entered a second withholding state, enter the second state withholding I.D., up to 12 characters. SUTA/SDI State Enter the abbreviation of the state to be used for unemployment tax reporting. This state may be different from the withholding states above. State Unemp. I.D. Enter the employer's State Unemployment Tax I.D. You may enter up to 25 characters. Arizona: When you enter the State Unemployment I.D., enter a caret (^) in front of the check digit, if any, and in front of the branch code. For example, if 9 is the check digit and 123 is the branch code, enter 1234567^9^123. California: When you enter the State Unemployment I.D., enter a caret (^) in front of the branch code, if any. For example, if 123 is the branch code, enter 12345678^123. Florida: When you enter the State Unemployment I.D., enter a caret (^) in front of the location code. For example, if 000 is the location code, enter 12345678^000. Texas: When you enter the State Unemployment I.D., enter a caret (^) in front of the unit number, if required. For example, if 0089 is the Unit Number, enter 12-3456-7^0089. Note: Branch codes for Arizona and California are used in the CLS ~ SUTA Magnetic Media add-on program. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-79

CLS Main Menu Programs Contact Name 1 and 2 Telephone: Work Telephone: Home Telephone: Pager Telephone: Mobile Telephone: Fax E-mail Address Enter the company contact(s) and the appropriate telephone numbers. You may also enter information for a second contact. Telephone: Modem Baud Rate If you plan to transfer files to and from this site via modem, enter the modem telephone number and the baud rate to be used. Press F1 to select the baud rate from a pop-up list. Note: If the exact baud rate is not listed, select the next highest setting. Web Site Address Enter the company web site address. Ledger Password If you wish, you may enter a ledger level password. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the ledger information. CLS will warn you if the ledger password will be changed or deleted. Press Esc to return to the previous menu. Update transmittal letter name and address? Update employer name, address and contact? Update employer federal and state IDs? Correct? (Y,N) If you change the company name or address, and/or the employer federal and state identification numbers, you may also update this information for use by other CLS programs. You may update the company (employer) information to be used in the Transmittal Letter (TL) program and PF, Menu Selection 1. The employer identification numbers will also be updated in PF. Press N to update the information only in LI, Menu Selection 3 (2). Define Current/Retained Earnings Accounts (3) Use this routine to define Current and Retained Earnings accounts, Contribution and Withdrawal account ranges, and Dividend and Adjustment account ranges for up to thirty-five (35) shareholders or partners. 1-80 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Shareholder/Partner No. (1-35) Shareholder/Partner Name Enter a shareholder/partner number and name. Press F1 to select the shareholder/partner from a pop-up list. Current Earnings % (Max 100%) Current Earnings Account Enter the account to which current earnings will be assigned when a Balance Sheet is prepared, and then enter the percentage to allocate to it. If you enter less than 100%, you must define additional shareholders/partners until the total Current Earnings % equals 100. Percentages may use up to six decimal places (e.g., 33.333333%). Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts for this ledger. Note: Each partner or shareholder must be assigned a different current earnings account. Retained Earnings Account Enter the account to which retained earnings should be posted at the end of the fiscal year. Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts for this ledger. Note: Each partner or shareholder must be assigned a different retained earnings account. Prior Year Adjustments Contributed Capital Capital Withdrawn Dividends Declared Cash Dividends Other Adjustments Enter the range of accounts for each classification. Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts for this ledger. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the shareholder/partner. Press Esc to return to the Shareholder/Partner No. prompt without updating the record. Shareholder/Partner '1' has been updated. CLS updates the selected shareholder/partner and returns to the Shareholder/ Partner No. (1-35) prompt. You may select another shareholder/partner, or press Esc to return to the Revise Basic Ledger Setup Information menu. Press Esc again to return to the LI menu. Define P&L Percentage Divisor Account Ranges (4) Use this routine to define up to nine account ranges to be used for alternate percentage divisors on the Profit & Loss Statement. To use these divisors, select program MF, Menu Selection 1, and assign a numeric option (1-9) to specific title or postable P&L accounts. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-81

CLS Main Menu Programs Percentage Divisor Range 1 Percentage Divisor Range 9 Enter the beginning and ending account ranges for each percentage divisor. Press F1 to select the account from a pop-up list. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the account ranges, or press Esc to return to the Revise Basic Ledger Setup Information menu. Ranges have been updated. CLS updates the ranges and returns to the Revise Basic Ledger Setup Information menu. Define Inventory/CGS Calculations (5) Use this routine to define up to 12 different inventory adjustment calculations for the current ledger. Use the CT program, Menu Selection 5, to create the actual inventory adjustment transactions each period. Notes: You can adjust inventory against either a single cost of goods sold account or separate beginning and ending inventory accounts on the P&L. If you are using separate beginning and ending inventory accounts, and you are preparing a comparative P&L, be sure to assign options V and W to the beginning and ending inventory accounts, respectively, in program MF, Menu Selection 1. If you do not, history for these accounts will not be reported correctly. Calculation No. (1-12) Select the inventory calculation you wish to add or revise. Calculation Type (1,2) Press the up-arrow to change the calculation type. Press 1 if you want CLS to calculate the cost of goods sold. Press 2 if you want CLS to calculate new beginning and ending inventory balances. The selected type will apply to all inventory calculations for this ledger. Transaction Description Enter the description you want to use when transactions for this inventory calculation are created by the CT program. Balance Sheet Inventory A/C Enter the balance sheet inventory account to be affected by this calculation. This account must be unique for each calculation. 1-82 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Cost of Goods Sold % Gross Profit % Enter the estimated cost of goods sold percentage for this inventory item. CLS will display the corresponding gross profit percentage. Sales Accounts: From To Enter the range of sales accounts on which cost of goods sold should be calculated. If only one account applies, enter the same account at both the from and to prompts. If you selected Calculation Type 1 above: Cost of Sales Account Enter the cost of sales account to be used for this inventory item. If this ledger is departmentalized, you will also see: Dept Filter Type (0,1) Enter 0 if you do not want to use a department filter. Enter 1 if this calculation should be applied only to sales account(s) for a specific department. Department Filter If you selected a department filter, enter the appropriate department number here. If you selected Calculation Type 2 above: Beginning Inventory Account Purchase Accounts: From To Ending Inventory Account Enter the beginning inventory account, range of purchase accounts, and ending inventory account. If there is only one purchases account, enter the same account at both the from and to prompts. If this ledger is departmentalized, you will also see: Dept Filter Type (0,3) Enter 0 if you do not want to use a department filter. Enter 1 if this calculation should be applied only to sales and purchase accounts for a specific department. Enter 2 if only sales accounts should be filtered by department. Enter 3 if only purchase accounts should be filtered by department. Department Filter If you selected a department filter, enter the appropriate department number. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the account ranges, or press Esc to return to the Revise Basic Ledger Setup Information menu. Inventory calculation 1 has been updated. CLS updates the inventory calculation and returns to the Calculation No. prompt. Press Esc to return to the Revise Basic Ledger Setup Information menu. Define Income Tax Calculations (6) Use this routine to define estimated income tax calculations (federal, state and other) for the current ledger. To use these calculations, select program CT, Menu Selection 6, to create the estimated income tax transactions each period. The tax transactions will be created in reverse order so, for example, net income can be adjusted by the calculated state tax before the federal tax is computed. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-83

CLS Main Menu Programs For each of the tax calculations you wish to use, respond to the following prompts: Tax Table I.D. or Tax Rate Select the tax table to be used for the calculation, or simply enter the tax rate to be used (as a percentage, not a decimal). Notes: A federal tax table has already been defined for you using program SI, Menu Selection 6. You must define state and any other tax tables you need before they can be used here. The standard federal tax table I.D. is **. Use *1 *9 as the I.D.s for alternate federal tax tables. The standard state tax table I.D. will be the state s postal code (e.g., CA, GA, TX). Alternate state tax tables I.D.s must begin with a letter (e.g., C1, G1, T1). Tax table I.D.s for the Other tax calculation must be numeric. Description Enter a description (up to 15 characters) to be associated with this calculation. Calculations which are based on a tax table will use the Tax Description given to the table. Calculations which are based on a tax rate will use the description entered here. Expense A/C Enter the expense account to be used when the transactions are created in the CT program. Liability A/C Enter the liability account to be used when the transactions are created in the CT program. Net Income Adj If you wish to adjust the net income on which the tax calculation should be based, enter the amount of the adjustment here. Use (+) for an amount which should be added to net income; use (-) for an amount which should be subtracted from net income. If the amount entered is below $1.00, (e.g., 0.75), the tax calculation will be based on a portion of net income (e.g., 75%); the sign will be ignored. Tax Adjustment If you wish to adjust the tax which has been calculated, enter the amount of that adjustment here. Use (+) for an amount which should be added to the computed tax, or (-) for an amount which should be subtracted from it. 1-84 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Deduct Before (0-1) or (0-3) For state and other taxes only: Indicate whether net income should be adjusted be the amount of this tax before computing the next tax. Enter 0 if you do not want net income adjusted. Enter 1 (the default) if you do want net income adjusted. For other taxes only: Enter 2 if only the federal tax calculation is affected; enter 3 if only the state tax calculation is affected. Press F1 for your choices. Excl. H-Opt A/C Enter Y (the default) if you want to exclude from the tax calculation any accounts which you assigned an H option in program MF, Menu Selection 1, (e.g., Officers Life Insurance, Penalties, etc.). Enter N if you do not want these accounts excluded. Limit Tax Credit (Y,N) In the event of a loss, you may cap the amount of any tax credit which might be generated by the CT program. Enter N (the default) if you want CLS to generate a tax credit for any losses which might occur. Enter Y if you want to place a limit on the calculated tax credit. Maximum Credit If you answered Y to Limit Tax Credit, enter the maximum tax credit CLS is allowed to generate. If you don t want CLS to calculate any tax credits, enter zero. Minimum Tax If there is a minimum tax amount due, regardless of net income, enter the minimum tax here. Zero if below If the tax owed is assumed to be zero if the computed tax falls below a certain minimum, enter the minimum amount here. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the changes, or press Esc to return to the Revise Basic Ledger Setup Information menu. Define Special Format P&L's (7) If you plan to print a Special Format Income Statement on a recurring basis using Batch Processing (BP), use this selection to enter the format. The Special Format P&L also allows access to history and budget amounts by period. You may reference specific and relative (trailing) periods for current period and year-to-date balances. Special Format (1-4) Select the number of the first available format. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list. Format Description Enter a description for the report format. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-85

CLS Main Menu Programs Format Enter the report format, or press F1 to select from a pop-up list of format options. Following are the special format P&L column codes and the codes which allow you to access budget and history amounts by period: Current Period Balances: @b (Budget) e.g., This Year: @b1, @b2...@b12 Relative: @b0, @b-1, @b-2, etc. @l (Last Year) e.g., @l1, @l2...@l12, etc. @p (By Period) e.g., This Year: @p1, @p2...@p12 Relative: @p0, @p-1, @p-2, etc. Year-to-Date Balances: @B (Budget) e.g., This Year: @B1, @B2...@B12 Relative: @B0, @B-1, @B-2, etc. @L (Last Year) e.g., @L1, @L2...@L12, etc. @P (By Period) e.g., This Year: Relative: @P1, @P2...@P12 @P0, @P-1, @P-2, etc. Notes: You may use numbers between one and nine as codes to insert spaces between columns on a special format P&L. For example, the format 99AB will produce a year-to-date-only P&L with 18 additional spaces between the account description and the year-to-date columns. A colon (:) may be used to sum current period balances for a range of periods (e.g., @p1:3 sums periods 1-3, @p-2:0 sums the last three periods). Special Format P&L Column Codes Current Period Code Column Description Year-to-Date Code a THIS YEAR Current period A b THIS YEAR Current percent B c THIS YEAR Current ratio C d LAST YEAR Current period D e LAST YEAR Current variance E f LAST YEAR Current variance % F g LAST YEAR Current percent G h LAST YEAR Current ratio H i BUDGET Current period I j BUDGET Current variance J k BUDGET Current variance % K l BUDGET Current percent L m BUDGET Current ratio M n TOTAL BUDGET Current period N o TOTAL BUDGET Current variance O p TOTAL BUDGET Current variance % P q TOTAL BUDGET Current percent Q r TOTAL BUDGET Current ratio R Ratio Description Current Ratio Divisor YTD Ratio Divisor If the Special Format Income Statement for this ledger will contain ratio columns, you may enter a ratio description (up to 25 characters) and current and year-to-date ratio divisors (0-999,999,999.99). For example, you might enter a ratio divisor of 500,868, the square footage of 1-86 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs office space, to get a dollar breakdown per square foot. If the ratio divisor is zero, the ratio description will not be printed on the financial statements. If you prepare a Special Format P&L with ratio columns and you use a zero ratio divisor, the ratio columns will default to percent of sales. Note: Separate P&L Ratio Divisors/Descriptions are available for Departmental Income Statements (see program DF). Ratio Decimals (1,2) Press 1 if you want ratios to be shown to one decimal place. Press 2 if you want two decimal places. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the report format. Press Esc to return to the Special Format (1-4) prompt without updating the format. Format '1' has been updated. CLS updates the report format and returns to the Special Format (1-4) prompt. Press Esc to return to the Revise Basic Ledger Setup Information Menu. Press Esc again to return to the LI menu. Revise Source Code Descriptions Choose 4 from the LI menu to add or revise source code descriptions for the current ledger. The following screen appears: Source 0 Source 19 Source codes identify types of accounting transactions. To add or revise descriptions, use the arrow keys (, ) to select the source code number. Enter a new description, up to 25 characters. To delete a description, press the space bar. Note: Source Codes 6, 7, 9 and 16-18 have reserved functions. Source Code 9 is always used for prior-period adjustments. The other Source Codes are described below. The source code descriptions may be changed without affecting their function. Repeat Source Code 6 Source Code 6 is reserved for entries such as depreciation or amortization which automatically repeat in each accounting period. Press Y if you want Source Code 6 transactions to repeat. Press N to use Source Code 6 for another purpose. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-87

CLS Main Menu Programs Note: If periods are skipped during end-of-period processing, additional sets of Source Code 6 transactions will be created by CLS as Source Code B transactions. Reverse Source Code 7 Source Code 7 is reserved for accrual entries such as accounts payable which should be automatically reversed in the following accounting period. Press Y if you want Source Code 7 transactions to automatically reverse themselves. CLS assigns Source Code C to a reversed Source Code 7 transaction. Press N to use Source Code 7 for another purpose. Use Source Code 16 as Repeating Workpaper Entry? (Y,N) Press Y if you would like to use source code 16 as a repeating workpaper entry. Source code 16 transactions will automatically repeat in each accounting period. Note: If periods are skipped during end-of-period processing, additional sets of Source Code 16 transactions will be created by CLS as Source Code B transactions. Use Source Code 17 as Reversing Workpaper Entry? (Y,N) Press Y if you would like to use source code 17 as a reversing workpaper entry. Source code 17 transactions will automatically repeat themselves. CLS assigns Source Code C to a reversed Source Code 17 transaction. Use Source Code 18 as Standard Workpaper Entry? (Y,N) Press Y if you would like to use source code 18 as a standard workpaper entry. Note: Use TB, Menu Selection 3 (4) to print a trial balance that shows workpaper entries. Use TB 4 (2) or 5 (2), to print a worksheet that shows workpaper entries. Use TB 6 to print leadsheets that show workpaper entries. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the source code descriptions, or press Esc to return to the LI menu. Complete CLS updates the source code descriptions and returns to the LI menu. Revise Financial Statement Headings Choose 5 from the LI menu to revise financial statement headings for the current ledger. The following menu appears: Note: Press the asterisk (*) to reset the parameters for Menu Selections 1-9 to their default values. 1-88 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Balance Sheet Period Descriptions and Date-Line (1) You can change the column headings on comparative and job-cost Balance Sheets. You can also modify the word TOTAL which is used by CLS to create total descriptions. You may wish to change it to Total if your Balance Sheet titles are in mixed-case. You may also modify the Balance Sheet Date-Line and enter a title for the Statement of Changes in Equity. At the prompts for This Year, Last Year and Date-Line, you may embed key words in the text to cause CLS to insert appropriate dates. Press F1 at these prompts to list key words. You might use @Pedate for this year and @Lydate for last year. Key words are case-sensitive; if the key word is entered in uppercase, the inserted date will be in uppercase; if it is entered in mixed-case, the inserted date will be in mixed-case. P&L Period Descriptions and Date-Line (2) You can change the current period and year-to-date column headings on Profit and Loss Statements. You can modify the phrase * TOTAL which is used by CLS to create total descriptions. You may wish to change it to TOTAL, or Total if your P&L Statement titles are in mixed-case. You can also change the P&L Statement Date-Line. At the Description and Date-Line prompts, you may embed key words in the text to cause CLS to insert the appropriate phrase. Press F1 at these prompts to list key words. You might use @Curper to show the number of months in the current period, and @Ytdper or @Periods to show the number of months year-to-date. Remember, key words are case-sensitive. Text entered at a Short-name prompt will be substituted for a response to the corresponding Description prompt when the description column is too narrow to accommodate the longer heading. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-89

CLS Main Menu Programs The examples below demonstrate the flexibility in the Date-Line presentation: Use: FOR THE @PERIODS ENDED @PEDATE To show: FOR THE TWO MONTHS ENDED FEBRUARY 28, 1999 Use: For the @periods ended @Pedate To show: For the two months ended February 28, 1999 Use: For the @Cp and @Periods ended @Pedate To show: For the One and Two Months ended February 28, 1999 Use: For the @xperiods ended @Pedate To show: For the one and two months ended February 28, 1999 Use: For the @yp periods ended @Pedate To show: For the two periods ended February 28, 1999 Use: For the @Periods ended @Pedate and @Lyear To show: For the Two Months ended February 28, 1999 and 1998 Use: For the @periods ended @Pedate and @Lydate To show: For the two months ended February 28, 1999 and February 28, 1998 P&L Current-Period Column Headings (3) You can change the current-period column headings on Profit and Loss Statements. For example, you may change Actual to Amount or Percent to %. You may want to substitute Variance for LY- Var or Budg-Var, or you might want column headings to appear in uppercase. The lowercase letter which appears next to each column is the current-period special-format P&L code corresponding to that column. At the column heading prompts, you may embed key words in the text to cause CLS to insert the appropriate phrase. Press F1 at these prompts to list key words. Key words are case-sensitive. 1-90 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs P&L YTD/TOTAL Column Headings (4) You can change the headings for year-to-date and total columns on Profit and Loss Statements. For example, you may change Actual to Amount, or Percent to %. You may want to substitute Variance for LY-Var or Budg-Var, or you might want column headings to appear in uppercase. The uppercase letter which appears next to each column is the year-to-date or total special-format P&L code corresponding to that column. At the column heading prompts, you may embed key words in the text to cause CLS to insert the appropriate phrase. Press F1 at these prompts to list key words. Key words are case-sensitive. Balance Sheet and P&L Subschedule Titles (5) You may use this routine to define alternate Balance Sheet and P&L subschedule titles. Balance Sheet Subschedule Title: Enter a title for the Balance Sheet subschedule. P&L Subschedule Title: Enter a title for the P&L subschedule. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the report titles, or press Esc to return to the Revise Financial Statement Headings menu. Complete CLS updates the report titles and returns to the Revise Financial Statement Headings menu. Gross Profit Analysis Description (6) This routine allows you to enter a report title for the Gross Profit Analysis. If a title is entered here, departmental Profit & Loss Statements will print without page breaks. Title for Gross Profit Analysis: Enter a title for the Gross Profit Analysis. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the report title, or press Esc to return to the Revise Financial Statement Headings menu. Complete CLS updates the report title and returns to the Revise Financial Statement Headings menu. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-91

CLS Main Menu Programs Income and Retained Earnings Descriptions (7) This selection allows you to enter a report title and change income and retained earnings descriptions used on the Statement of Income and Retained Earnings. Use program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), to decide where the Statement of Income and Retained Earnings is to print. Depending on your response to the New Page for Income & RE Stmt prompt, you may print this report on a new page or at the end of the P&L. Title for separate Statement of Income and Retained Earnings: Enter a report title. Show Account Detail? (Y,N) Press Y to show the account detail for the account ranges (prior-year adjustments, contributed capital, capital withdrawn, dividends declared, cash dividends and other adjustments) entered in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (2). Apply Font Options to Intermediate Lines? (Y,N) Press Y if you would like to apply bold, underline and italics options to intermediate lines. Line 0 Beginning Retained Earnings Class (0-9) 0 Line 9 Ending Retained Earnings Class (0-9) 9 Line descriptions (0-9) appear on the Statement of Income and Retained Earnings in the sequence in which they are entered. To change a line description, enter your own text. By changing the class, you may change the order in which the lines appear on the Statement of Income and Retained Earnings. Press F1 at the Class prompts to select the line type from a pop-up list. Income and Retained Earnings Line Classes 0 Beginning Retained Earnings 5 Capital Withdrawn 1 Prior Year Adjustments 6 Dividends Declared 2 Adjusted Retained Earnings 7 Cash Dividends 3 *Net Income 8 Other Adjustments 4 Contributed Capital 9 Ending Retained Earnings *The Net Income description is used only by the separate Statement of Income and Retained Earnings. Accept or Escape (A,Esc)? Press A to accept the income and retained earnings descriptions, or press Esc to return to the Revise Financial Statement Headings menu. Complete CLS updates the report descriptions and returns to the Revise Financial Statement Headings menu. 1-92 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Supplemental Report Period Descriptions and Date-Line (8) You can change the this year, last year, current period and year-to-date column headings on supplemental reports. You can modify the phrase * TOTAL which is used by CLS to create total descriptions. You may wish to change it to TOTAL, or Total if your supplemental report titles are in mixed-case. You can also change the report Date-Line. At the Description and Date-Line prompts, you may embed key words in the text to cause CLS to insert the appropriate phrase. Press F1 at these prompts to list key words. You might use @Curper to show the number of months in the current period, and @Ytdper or @Periods to show the number of months year-to-date. Remember, key words are case-sensitive. Text entered at a Short-name prompt will be substituted for a response to the corresponding Description prompt when the description column is too narrow to accommodate the longer heading. Define Report-Specific Date-Lines (9) You may use this program to define date-lines specific to a particular report. You can enter a separate date-line for each Balance Sheet, P&L or Supplemental Report provided by CLS. At each date-line prompt, you may embed key words in the text to cause CLS to insert the appropriate phrase. Press F1 at these prompts to list key words. You might use @Curper to show the number of months in the current period, and @Ytdper or @Periods to show the number of months year-to-date. Remember, key words are case-sensitive. Revise Financial Statement Footnotes Choose 6 from the LI menu to revise financial statement footnotes for the current ledger. Message 1-3 Line 1 See Attached Review Report Line 2 Enter new footnotes (up to 60 characters per line), or press Enter to accept the default values. To delete a message, press the space bar. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-93

CLS Main Menu Programs Position Use one of the following codes to position the message on the financial statements. Press F1 to select the footnote position from a pop-up list. Footnote Positions A Top of page, above ledger name E Bottom of page, centered B Top of page, below ledger name F Bottom of page, left-justified C Top of page, above date line G Top of page, below report title D Top of page, below date line * Do not print this footnote Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A if you are satisfied with the messages and their positions, or press Esc to return to the Revise Financial Statement Headings menu. Complete CLS updates the footnotes and returns to the LI menu. Revise Historical Period-End Dates Choose 7 from the LI menu to revise period-end dates for the current ledger. CLS uses these dates for Source Code 9 entries (ET), or when preparing a three, six or 12-period Balance Sheet or Profit and Loss Statement, and other places throughout CLS. The following screen appears: Period 1-12 Enter the appropriate period-end date for the current and prior-year at each period prompt. (CLS will calculate default period-end dates based on the number of periods in the fiscal year and the fiscal year-end date.) Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A if you are satisfied with the period-end dates. Press Esc to return to the LI menu without changing the dates. Complete CLS updates the period-end dates and returns to the LI menu. Assign Batches and Transmittal Letters Choose 8 from the LI menu to revise batch descriptions, assign transmittal letters to the current ledger or enter a transmittal letter address. 1-94 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Revise Batch Descriptions (1) Batch Description 1 Batch Description 2 Batch Description 3 Batch Description 4 Enter descriptions for the four report sets defined in Batch Processing (BP). Note: Global batch descriptions may be defined using program SI, Menu Selection 1 (7, 2); they will be used unless ledger-specific batch descriptions have been defined. Ledger-specific batch descriptions can be changed for all ledgers using Program SI, Menu Selection 1 (7, 3). Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the batch descriptions, or press Esc to return to the Set Batch Processing Options menu without saving any changes. Batch Descriptions have been updated. CLS updates the batch descriptions and returns to the Set Batch Processing Options menu. Assign Transmittal Letters (2) Select Transmittal Letters (1) In Batch Processing (BP), transmittal letters 1-3 are printed before financial statements. Transmittal letter four will be printed as a divider between the footnotes and subsidiary schedules. Cover Page (*,A-Z) Select the cover page you wish to assign to this ledger. Cover pages are created in program SI, Menu Selection 4 (1). Press F1 to select the cover page from a pop-up list. Letter Heading No. (0-99) Letter Text No. (0-999) Enter the numbers of the letter headings and texts to assign to this ledger. The letter headings and texts are created in program SI, Menu Selections 3 and 4 (2). Press F1 to select headings and texts from pop-up lists. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-95

CLS Main Menu Programs Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A if the heading and text selections are correct. Press Esc to return to the Transmittal Letter Selection menu without saving any selections. Complete CLS saves your selections and returns to the Transmittal Letter Selection menu. Enter Transmittal Letter Address (2) Attention Enter the name of the person to whom the financial statements will be sent. Address 1-5 Enter the address where you will be sending financial statements. The transmittal letter name and address print in transmittal letters where the key word @client appears. Signature 1 Signature 2 Enter the name of the person whose signature is to appear at the bottom of the transmittal letter (or you may simply make the signature part of the letter). You may use the second signature line for the city and state. The signature lines print where the key words @sig1 and @sig2 appear. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A if the address is correct. Press Esc to return to the Transmittal Letter Selection menu without saving the address. Complete CLS saves the transmittal letter address and returns to the Transmittal Letter Selection menu. Ledger File Maintenance Choose 9 from the LI menu to perform maintenance routines such as deleting a ledger, changing a ledger I.D., rebuilding the ledger control file and expanding the account master file. The following menu appears: 1-96 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Note: Menu Selection 9, 9 will appear only if the CLS ~ Tax Package Interface has been installed. Delete a Ledger (1) This routine deletes all generations of a ledger from the current data path. Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger to be deleted. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of ledgers. Ledger Name CLS displays the name of the ledger to be deleted. Ledger Password This prompt appears if a password exists for this ledger. Enter the ledger password. Caution: All data on file for this ledger will be deleted. Press ESC to exit. Verify that this is the correct ledger before continuing. This routine completely deletes a ledger from the data disk; back up a ledger you want to keep before deleting it. Would you like to delete this ledger? (Y,N) Press Y to delete the ledger. Press N or Esc to return to the Ledger I.D. prompt without deleting the ledger. Deleting Ledger TGP... Complete CLS deletes the selected ledger and returns to the Ledger I.D. prompt. You may delete another ledger, or press Esc to return to the Ledger File Maintenance menu. Delete Ledger Generations (2) Use this routine to delete a single ledger generation or a batch of ledger generations. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-97

CLS Main Menu Programs Delete a Single Generation (1) File Format (O,N) Select the file format of the ledger generation to be deleted. Press O to delete a generation with the old CLS file format (version 4.20 or earlier), or press N to delete a generation with the new CLS file format (version 4.30 or later). Press F1 to select the format from a pop-up list. Data Drive or Path Enter the location of the ledger to be deleted, or press Enter to accept the default. Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger with the generation to be deleted. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of ledgers in the designated path. File Generation Enter the file generation to be deleted. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of existing file generations. Ledger Name Period Ending CLS displays the name and current period-end date for the selected ledger. Ledger Password This prompt appears if a password exists for this ledger. Enter the ledger password. Caution: All data for this generation will be deleted. Press ESC to exit. Verify that this is the correct ledger generation before continuing. This routine completely deletes a file generation from the data path; back up a ledger you want to keep before deleting it. Would you like to delete this generation? (Y,N) Press Y to delete the selected ledger generation, or press N to return to the File Generation prompt. Deleting Generation 'TGP.000'... Complete CLS deletes the selected file generation and returns to the Ledger I.D. prompt. You may delete another generation, or press Esc to return to the File Format (O,N) prompt. Press Esc again to return to the Delete Ledger Generations menu. 1-98 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Batch Deletion of Generations (2) File Format (O,N) Select the file format of the ledger generation to be deleted. Press O to delete a generation with the old file format (version 4.20 or earlier), or press N to delete a generation with the new file format (version 4.30 or later). Press F1 to select the format from a pop-up list. Data Drive or Path Enter the location of the ledgers to delete, or press F1 to create a directory list. If you entered the data drive or path: CLS displays the generations found in the selected path. Use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the list of ledger generations. Tag or un-tag generations by pressing the space bar or T. Press Enter to accept the tagged generations, or press Esc to return to the Data Drive or Path prompt. If you pressed F1 to create a directory list: CLS displays a list of directories. Use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the list of directories. As you scroll through the directory list, CLS informs you if any ledgers exist in the selected path. Press Enter to select a directory and CLS displays a list of ledgers found in the selected path. Tag or untag generations by pressing the space bar or T. Press Enter again to accept the tagged generations, or press Esc to return to the directory list. Do you wish to delete the current generation of this ledger? This prompt appears if you select the current generation of a ledger. Press Y to tag the current generation for deletion, or press N to skip it. Do you wish to CLEAR ALL selected ledger tags for this path? This prompt appears if you press Esc to exit. Press Y to clear the tags, or press Esc to return to the selection window without removing the tags. Ready to begin deletion? (Y,N) Press Y to delete the selected generations, or press N to return to the Data Drive or Path prompt. Deleting generation '&CL.000'... Deleting generation 'TGX.000'... Batch deletion complete! CLS deletes the selected ledger generations and returns to the File Format (O,N) prompt. You may delete another batch of ledger generations, or press Esc to return to the Delete Ledger Generations menu. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-99

CLS Main Menu Programs Change a Ledger I.D. (3) This routine changes the ledger I.D. of a ledger or a specific generation. Current Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger to change. Press F1 to select the ledger from a pop-up list. File Generation CLS displays the current file generation for this ledger. You may select another generation if you wish. Ledger Name Period Ending CLS displays the name of the selected ledger, and the selected period-end date. New Ledger I.D. Enter the new I.D. for this ledger. Change ALL ledger generations, or only the SELECTED generation (A,S) [A] CLS normally changes the ledger I.D. for all generations of the ledger in the current data path. If you only want to change the I.D. of the selected generation, enter S. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the new ledger I.D. Press Esc to return to the Current Ledger I.D. prompt without changing the ledger I.D. Complete CLS changes the ledger I.D. of the selected generation(s) and returns to the Current Ledger I.D. prompt. You may select another ledger, or press Esc to return to the Ledger File Maintenance Menu. Duplicate a Ledger (4) This routine duplicates a ledger or a specific ledger generation. 1-100 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Current Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger to be duplicated. Press F1 to select the ledger from a pop-up list. File Generation CLS displays the current file generation for this ledger. You may select another generation if you wish. Ledger Name Period Ending CLS displays the name of the ledger to be duplicated, and the selected period-end date. Duplicate I.D. Enter an I.D. for the duplicate ledger. Duplicate ALL ledger generations, or only the SELECTED generation (A,S) [A] CLS normally duplicates all generations of this ledger in the current data path. If you only want to duplicate the selected generation, enter S. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the new ledger I.D. Press Esc to return to the Current Ledger I.D. prompt without changing the ledger I.D. Complete CLS duplicates the selected generations and returns to the Current Ledger I.D. prompt. You may select another ledger, or press Esc to return to the Ledger File Maintenance Menu. Reset Ledger Generation (5) This routine changes a ledger s default generation number which appears in Ledger Start-up (LS). You will normally use it only when recovering files from a backup disk. Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger whose default generation number you want to change. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of ledgers. Ledger Name Current Generation Period Ending CLS displays the name and current generation number of the selected ledger, and the current period-ending date. New Generation Enter the number for the new current generation. CLS displays the period-end date for the selected generation. This will become the default generation for Ledger Start-up (LS). Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-101

CLS Main Menu Programs Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to reset the ledger generation. Press Esc to return to the Ledger I.D. prompt without changing the generation number. Complete CLS changes the default generation number and returns to the Ledger I.D. prompt. You may select another ledger, or press Esc to return to the Ledger File Maintenance Menu. Rebuild Ledger Control File (6) This routine rebuilds the ledger control file, which contains a list of the ledgers in a data path, along with the current generation number for each. If the ledger control file is damaged, use this routine to rebuild it. This file is also used by several programs which display the current generation number, and by the Batch Processing (BP) and Ledgers on File (LF) programs which display a list of the ledgers on a particular drive. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue, or press N to return to the LI menu. Complete CLS creates a new ledger control file containing an entry for each ledger found in the data path and returns to the LI menu. The highest generation number found for each ledger will be assumed to be the current generation. Expand Account Master File (7) Depending on your selections when you created a ledger, you may use this routine to expand the account master file to include comparative history or period-budgets. An asterisk (*) next to this menu selection indicates comparative financial statements and period-budget income statements are already available for this ledger, and this routine is not available (or necessary). Comparative Financial Statements Period-Budget Income Statements Depending on your response to these prompts in program LI, Menu Selection 1, you may press Y if you now wish to produce comparative financial statements and/or period-budget income statements. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to change the size of the account master file. Press Esc to return to the Ledger File Maintenance menu. Complete CLS changes the account master file size as requested and returns to the Ledger File Maintenance menu. 1-102 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Change Account Format (8) Use this routine to change the account number format for the current ledger. Current Account Format CLS displays the account format defined in program LI, Menu Selection 1. New Account Format - Major Portion (3-6) New Account Format - Dept Length (0-4) Select a new length for the major and/or departmental portion of the account number. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the new account format, or press Esc to return to the Ledger File Maintenance menu without changing the format. Note: This routine will change only the departmental portion of existing accounts, not the major portion. Account format has been updated. CLS updates the account format and returns to the Ledger File Maintenance menu. Select a Tax Package (9) This program only applies if you have installed the CLS ~ Tax Package Interface. Use this routine to indicate which tax package vendor and tax package will be used with the current ledger. When adding or revising accounts in program MF, Menu Selection 1, you may select from a pop-up list of tax codes corresponding to your selection here. Vendor (A-H) Select a tax package vendor. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of available vendors. Tax Package (1-3) Select a tax package. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of available packages. Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-103

CLS Main Menu Programs Tax Code Template (1-999) You may enter the tax code template to be used with this ledger. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept your selections. Press Esc to return to the Ledger File Maintenance menu. Complete CLS saves your selections and returns to the Ledger File Maintenance menu. 1-104 Ledger Initialization (LI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Ledger Startup 1.8 This program is executed when you start CLS. To switch from one ledger to another, select LS from the CLS Main Menu. Once you select a ledger and generation using LS, that ledger remains active until you select another or exit CLS. Enter LS from the CLS Main Menu and the following screen appears. Today's Date The date displayed is your system date. Press the up-arrow ( ) to change the date if needed, and enter a new one using the mmddyy format. Data Drive or Path Enter the location of the ledger, or press Enter to accept the default location. *** Warning *** Single-User Version This message appears if you are using the single-user version of CLS in a network environment and another user is currently logged onto a ledger, or if you exited CLS abnormally. Press Y to continue Ledger Start-up; in a network environment, processing on the ledger in use will be aborted. Press N to exit CLS. Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. for the ledger to be processed. The ledger I.D. for the sample ledger is JCC. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of ledgers in the current data path. (Ledger I.D.) not found in path C:\NEWCLS Would you like to create it? (Y,N) If CLS cannot find the selected Ledger I.D., this prompt appears. If this is a new ledger, press Y and the Ledger Initialization (LI) program appears, allowing you to create the ledger. Press N to return to the Ledger I.D. prompt. Ledger Start-up (LS) 1-105

CLS Main Menu Programs File Generation CLS displays the current generation number for the selected ledger. You may select another generation, or press Enter to accept the current value. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of generations for this ledger. Note: The first generation number assigned to a ledger when it is created is 000. The ledger generation will be incremented each time you run End of Period Processing (EP). Several generations can be kept on a single disk and easily accessed by entering the appropriate generation number. Ledger Name Period Ending CLS displays the name and period-end date for the selected ledger. Correct? (Y,N) CLS will warn you if there are unposted transactions or pending trial balance entries on file for this ledger. Press Y to accept the ledger, and the CLS Main Menu appears. Press N to return to the Data Drive or Path prompt. 1-106 Ledger Startup (LS)

CLS Main Menu Programs Post Transactions 1.9 The Post Transactions (PT) program posts transactions to the ledger, updating account and employee or vendor balances in the process. Transactions must be posted before running financial statements. You may also use this program to unpost transactions if you wish to edit them in program ET. Enter PT from the CLS Main Menu and the following menu appears: Note: An asterisk (*) next to a menu selection indicates the selection is currently unavailable. An asterisk next to the Ledger I.D. at the top left corner of the screen indicates that there are unposted transactions or pending trial balance entries. Post Transactions Choose 1 from the PT menu to post transactions, and the following screen appears: Would you like a Posting Journal? (Y,N) Press Y to print a posting journal. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. The default response to this prompt is set in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Post Transactions (PT) 1-107

CLS Main Menu Programs CLS displays the work in progress. As each transaction block is processed, each account with transaction activity is shown. As employee or vendor transactions are processed, each employee or vendor with transaction activity is displayed. *** Complete *** Preparing Posting Journal - one moment please... If you requested a posting journal, CLS prints the report and returns to the PT menu. Unpost Transactions Choose 2 from the PT menu to unpost transactions, and the following screen appears: Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to unpost transactions, or press N to return to the Post Transactions menu. *** Complete *** CLS unposts transactions for the selected ledger and returns to the PT menu. Note: Use the Transaction Register (TR) program to display or print unposted transactions, or edit them using the Enter Transactions (ET) program. 1-108 Post Transactions (PT)

CLS Main Menu Programs Query Account Detail 1.10 Use the Query Account Detail (QA) program to review a specific account s beginning and ending balances and current or year-to-date transaction detail. You may query a group or department account, or query net income, displaying or printing current period and year-to-date net income. You may also query the current ledger s balance. Enter QA from the CLS Main Menu and the following menu appears: Query Current Detail Choose 1 from the QA menu to query current period account detail, and respond to the following prompts: Include Zero Amount Transactions Enter Y to include all transactions for the account, even those with a zero amount. New Page for Each Account If you request a list or a range of accounts, enter Y if you want each account to appear on separate page. Account Number Enter the account number to be queried. Press F1 to select from a pop-up chart of accounts for this ledger. Press F2 to enter up to 10 accounts to be queried. Press F3 to enter a range of accounts. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. When the report is complete, CLS returns to the Account Number prompt. Select another account, or press Esc to return to the QA menu. Query Account Detail (QA) 1-109

CLS Main Menu Programs Beginning and ending account balances are displayed along with descriptions, dates, source codes, employee numbers, reference numbers and amounts. Depending on your response to the Show Deletes on QA prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), deleted transactions may be included, with DL displayed after the amount. Source Code 9 transaction amounts print in the Balance column if you query current detail and in the Amount column for a year-to-date query. Asterisks (*) indicate account totals. Pound-signs (#) indicate period subtotals and appear only on a year-to-date query. Query Year-to-Date Detail Choose 2 from the QA menu to query year-to-date account detail. The following screen appears: Note: The cursor appears at the Account Number prompt. Press the up-arrow ( ) to change the beginning and ending periods. Include Zero Amount Transactions Enter Y to include all transactions for the account, even those with a zero amount. New Page for Each Account If you request a list or a range of accounts, enter Y if you want each account to appear on separate page. Beginning Period Ending Period Enter the range of periods for which to query the account(s). Account Number Enter the account number to be queried. Press F1 to select from a chart of accounts for this ledger. Press F2 to enter up to 10 accounts to be queried. Press F3 to enter a range of accounts. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. Beginning and ending account balances are displayed along with descriptions, dates, source codes, employee numbers, reference numbers and amounts. Depending on your response to the Show Deletes on QA prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), deleted transactions may be included, with DL displayed after the amount. Source Code 9 transaction amounts print in the Balance column if you query current detail and in the Amount column for a year-to-date query. Asterisks (*) indicate account totals. Pound-signs (#) 1-110 Query Account Detail (QA)

CLS Main Menu Programs indicate period subtotals and appear only on a year-to-date query. Note: Year-to-date detail is available only if you answered Y to the Keep Annual Detail prompt in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). When the report is complete, CLS returns to the Account Number prompt. You may select another account, or press Esc to return to the QA menu. Query a Group Account Choose 3 from the QA menu and respond to the following prompts: Account Number to be Queried: Enter the group account number to be queried. Press F1 to select from a pop-up chart of accounts for this ledger. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. When the report is complete, CLS returns to the Account Number to be Queried prompt. You may select another account, or press Esc to return to the QA menu. Query a Department Account Choose 4 from the QA menu and the following menu appears. Choose 1 to show all departments for a single account. Choose 2 to show all accounts for a single department. If you selected 1: Account Number to be Queried: Enter the master account number (e.g., 801) to be queried. CLS will display and total the departmental accounts associated with the master account. Press F1 to select from a pop-up chart of accounts for this ledger. If you selected 2: Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments If you selected a departmental report, enter the department number, or press Enter to calculate net income for all departments. Include accounts with no activity [Y] Press Enter to accept the default and include accounts with no activity. Enter N to suppress them. Query Account Detail (QA) 1-111

CLS Main Menu Programs (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. When the report is complete, CLS returns to the appropriate prompt. You may press Esc to return to the Query Departmental Accounts menu. Query Net Income Choose 5 from the QA menu and respond to the following prompts: Departmental Net Income? (Y,N) This prompt appears only if you select a departmental Income Statement in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Press Y to display departmental net income. Press N to display company net income. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments If you selected a departmental report, enter the department number, or press Enter to calculate net income for all departments. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. When the report is complete, CLS returns to the (D)isplay or number of copies to print prompt or the Departmental Net Income prompt if you selected departmental net income. Press Esc to return to the QA menu. Query Ledger Balance Choose 6 from the QA menu and respond to the following prompts: Departmental Balances? (Y,N) This prompt appears only if you select a departmental Balance Sheet or Income Statement in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Press Y to display the ledger balance by department. Press N to suppress the departmental balances. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments If you selected a departmental report, enter a department number, or press Enter to query the ledger balance for all departments. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the information, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. When the report is complete, CLS returns to the (D)isplay or number of copies to print prompt. Press Esc to return to the QA menu. 1-112 Query Account Detail (QA)

CLS Main Menu Programs Query Transaction Detail 1.11 Use the Query Transaction Detail (QT) program to examine current or year-to-date transactions. You may query transactions based on specific criteria such as source code, batch number or payee name. You may enter ranges for reference numbers, accounts, employees, departments and transaction amounts. The year-to-date query allows you to select a range of periods. You can also use this program to correct transaction descriptions. However, you cannot change an employee or vendor number assigned to a transaction. Enter QT from the CLS Main Menu and the following menu appears: Query Current Detail (1) Query Year-to-Date Detail (2) Choose 1 from the QT menu to query current period transaction detail. Choose 2 to query year-todate transaction detail. Note: Except for Sort By, all fields are optional; they may be used to print or display a list of transactions matching specific criteria. Query Transaction Detail (QT) 1-113

CLS Main Menu Programs Sort By (1,2) Enter 1 to sort and total the selected transactions by source code and reference. Enter 2 to sort and total them by source code and payee. Source Code Enter the source code to be used for this query. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of source codes. Batch No. Enter the batch number to be used for this query. Payee Name Enter the name of the payee for whom transactions should be selected. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of memorized payees. Notes: Use quotation marks to filter specific payees. For example, entering Bell (insert a space before the second quotation mark) will select payees with Bell as a separate word (e.g., Bell Temp, Bell Reagal); it will not include payees with bell as part of the name (e.g., Bellweather). Enter a caret (^) before the payee name to filter only payees which begin with that name. For example, entering ^Atlanta will filter only payees which begin with Atlanta (e.g., Atlanta Gas Light, Atlanta Tire). Period For a year-to-date query, enter the range of periods for which transactions should be selected. Date Range For a year-to-date query, enter the range of dates for which transactions should be selected. Reference Enter the range of reference numbers to be used in this query. Account Number Employee Number Department Number Enter the range of accounts, employees and/or departments to be used in this query. Press F1 to select the appropriate numbers from a pop-up list. Transaction Amount Enter the range of amounts to be used in this query. Transaction Sign (B,C,D) If you entered a range of positive amounts in the transaction amount fields above, you may select the sign of the transactions to be included in the query. Enter B to include both debits and credits, C to include only credits, or D to include only debits. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue, or press N to return to the QT menu. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the information, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single 1-114 Query Transaction Detail (QT)

CLS Main Menu Programs copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. When the report is complete, CLS returns to the Source Code prompt. You may define another query, or press Esc to return to the QT menu. Correct Transaction Descriptions (3) Choose 3 from the QT menu to correct transaction descriptions. The following menu will appear: Select 1 to globally change a transaction description within this ledger generation. Select 2 to change the description associated with a specific transaction. Batch Correction of Descriptions (1) Current Description Enter the transaction description to be changed. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list. New Description Enter the correct transaction description. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the change. Press Esc to return to the Current Description prompt without saving the change. Correct Selected Descriptions (2) Query Transaction Detail (QT) 1-115

CLS Main Menu Programs Use the arrow keys (, ) to select a specific transaction. Press Enter, then enter a new description. Press Enter again to accept the change. Note: Since CLS doesn t store a separate description for each transaction entered in ET, it may not be possible to change the description for a single-line item. 1-116 Query Transaction Detail (QT)

CLS Main Menu Programs System Initialization 1.12 Use the System Initialization (SI) program to define system-level parameters such as operator preferences, CLS payroll options and data paths. If you plan to communicate with another CLS product by modem or floppy disk transfer, you should also define the import and export settings for your location. You may also use SI to set financial statement print options (bold, italics and underline), define printers and passwords, add, revise or delete transmittal letters, maintain or print certain ACRS and MACRS tables, define income tax tables, define Quicken QuickPay accounts or correct beginning balances in a damaged ledger. Many of the responses entered here are used as default responses in other CLS programs. CLS allows you to override most of the system settings for individual ledgers. Enter SI from the CLS Main Menu and the following menu appears: Set System Parameters Choose 1 from the SI menu to define system parameters. The following menu appears: System Initialization (SI) 1-117

CLS Main Menu Programs Set Operator Preferences (1) From the Set Systems Parameters menu choose 1 to define operator preferences, and the following screen appears: The current value of each field is displayed. You may enter a new value for the field or press Enter to accept the current, or default, value. Ledger I.D. Length (3,4) Choose the length of CLS ledger I.D.s to be used as the default when new ledgers are created. A ledger I.D. may be any combination of three or four characters (letters or digits). Note: If you create ledgers with four-character I.D.s and then reduce the I.D. length to three characters, you will not be able to access ledgers with longer I.D.s. If you select fourcharacter I.D.s, you will be able to access ledgers with three-character I.D.s. Message Delay (0-9) Press 1-9 to display error messages for 1 to 9 seconds. Press 0 if you want CLS to display error messages and wait for a response. Print Time on Reports (Y,N) Press Y if you would like the run time printed on supporting reports, the General Ledger, Payroll Journal and Transaction Register. Default Printer No. Select the number of the printer you want to be active when CLS is started. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of available printers. Default Report Copies (D, 1-9) Select the number of copies to be used as the default when a report is selected. Press D if you would like CLS to default to the display mode. Century Break (20-80) Enter the pivot year to be used when assigning the correct century to CLS dates. Years falling after this number will be in the 1900s; years before it will be in the 2000s. The default is 80. Default Comparative Stmts (Y,N) Default Period Budget Stmts (Y,N) Press Y if you would like CLS to default to Comparative Financial Statements and/or Period-Budget Income Statements when new ledgers are created. 1-118 System Initialization (SI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Default Memorize Desc. (0-5) Your response here will be used as the default for new ledgers. CLS will memorize and autofill transaction descriptions during transaction entry (ET). Press F1 to select the memorize mode from a pop-up list. Note: The memorize mode may be set for each ledger using program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Memorize Description Modes 0 Do not memorize or autofill descriptions 3 Memorize and autofill descriptions and accounts 1 Memorize descriptions, but do not autofill 4 Autofill descriptions, but do not memorize 2 Memorize and autofill descriptions 5 Autofill descriptions and accounts, but do not memorize Default Retention Cycle (1-99) The retention cycle set here is used as the default when a new ledger is created. You may change the retention cycle used during end of period processing for each ledger in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Confirm Ledger Balance (Y,N) Press Y if you would like CLS to check the actual ledger balance before printing a Balance Sheet or an Income Statement, and before running End of Period Processing. AT Edit List Type (C,E) Press C if you would like a complete edit list when importing transactions in the AT program. Press E (the default) if you would like only the exceptions to be listed. Add/Decimal Mode (A,D) Select the decimal mode to be used throughout CLS. The decimal placement entered here is used as the default in program ET. Press F1 to select the add/decimal mode from a pop-up list. A D Add Mode: If no decimal point is entered in the Amount field, the A mode places the decimal two digits to the left of the last digit (e.g., 1234 = 12.34). Decimal Mode: If no decimal point is entered in the Amount field, the D mode places the decimal point after the last digit (e.g., 1234 = 1234.00). Plus (+)/Minus (-) Mode (0-2) Press 0 if you will enter a sign (+ or -) before an amount. Press 1 if you will enter a sign (+ or -) after an amount in program ET; the sign will also act as the Enter key. Press 2 if you will enter a sign (+ or -) after an amount throughout CLS. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of options. Default Source Code (0-19) Source codes identify different types of transactions or journal entries. Enter the source code to be used as the default for entering transactions in program ET. This default can be overridden In LI 3 (1). Default Entry Mode (1-6) Select a number to define the field where you want to begin after each transaction entry (ET). The entry mode selected here will be used as the default in program ET. Press F1 to select the entry mode from a pop-up list. Regardless of your selection, the cursor always returns to field one for a description entry on the first transaction or after entering a payroll check. System Initialization (SI) 1-119

CLS Main Menu Programs Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Transaction Entry Modes Return to Description or Employee field after each entry. Return to Day field after each entry. Return to Ref. field after each entry. Return to Account field after each entry. Return to Amount field after each entry. Auto-prompting payroll mode. Display Accounts in ET (0-2) Press 1 (the default) if you want account descriptions to appear during transaction entry. Press 2 to display account descriptions and department names. Confirm New Dept Accts (Y,N) Press Y if you would like CLS to confirm a new departmental account entered during transaction entry (ET) with Add dep t acct? (Y,N). Press N to create the departmental account without being prompted. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept your operator preferences. Press Esc to return to the Set Systems Parameters menu without saving any changes. Operator preferences have been updated. CLS updates your operator preferences and returns to the Set Systems Parameters menu. Set Financial Statement Options (2) From the Set Systems Parameters menu choose 2 to Set Financial Statement Options, and the following menu appears: Choose 1, Set Fin. Stmt. Print Options, to apply bold, italics and underline effects to Balance Sheets, Profit & Loss Statements and supplemental reports. The following screen will appear: Note: Due to the limitations of the resident fonts on earlier Hewlett-Packard and compatible printers (HP III and older), we recommend using an HP 4 or later printer. Certain combinations of bold, italics and underline will not print consistently on older printers. 1-120 System Initialization (SI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Use these global settings (Y,N) Press Y to use these global print settings for all ledgers. Press N if you will set up different print settings for each ledger using LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), MF, Menu Selection 1, and RF 1. Use Bold, Italics, Underline for: Dateline Column Headings Footnote Pos. A-D,G Footnote Pos. E,F Page Numbers Enter the correct bold, italics and underline print option(s) at each prompt. Press F1 to select the bold, italics and underline effects from a pop-up list. Account and Line Settings Type 1-99 Enter the correct bold, italics and underline print option(s) at each prompt. Press F1 to select the bold, italics and underline effects from a pop-up list. Accept, Reset or Escape? (A,R,Esc) Press A to accept the print options, or press R to reset the options to their default value (bold only). Press Esc to return to the Set Financial Statement Options menu. Financial Statement Print options have been updated. CLS updates the financial statement print options and returns to the Set Financial Statement Options menu. Choose 2, Set Enforced Cosmetics Options, to select the appropriate case (Upper, Proper, or As Entered) for titles, totals, footnotes and account/line descriptions on Balance Sheets, Profit & Loss Statements and supplemental reports. The following screen will appear: Use these global settings (Y,N) Press Y to use these global Enforced Cosmetics settings for all ledgers. Press N if you will set up different Enforced Cosmetics options for each ledger using MF, Menu Selection 9. Print using the following case: Dateline Column Headings Footnote Pos. A-D,G Footnote Pos. E,F Select the correct case at each prompt. Press F1 to select the case from a pop-up list. System Initialization (SI) 1-121

CLS Main Menu Programs Account and Line Case Type 1-99 Select the correct case at each prompt. Press F1 to select the case from a pop-up list. Accept, Reset or Escape? (A,R,Esc) Press A to accept the Enforced Cosmetics settings, or press R to reset the settings to their default values. Press Esc to return to the Set Financial Statement Options menu. Enforced Cosmetics settings have been updated. CLS updates the Enforced Cosmetics settings and returns to the Set Financial Statement Options menu. Choose 3, Protected Account Descriptions, to enter a list of key words that should always be shown a certain way in the financial statements if proper case is being used. Enter the key words as they should appear. A short list of pre-defined key words has been provided. You may add or delete key words as needed. Accept, Delete or Escape? (A,D,Esc) Press A to add or update a key word, or press D to delete it. Press Esc to return to the Set Financial Statement Options menu. Protected Key Word and has been updated. CLS adds, updates or deletes the appropriate key word. Set Payroll Options (3) For instructions on setting up system-level payroll options in SI 1 (3), please refer to Chapter 2, CLS Payroll Maintenance Programs, in the CLS Payroll Guide. 1-122 System Initialization (SI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Set CLS Data Paths (4) Choose 4, Set CLS Data Paths, and the following screen appears: The current value of each field is displayed. You may enter a new value for the field, or press Enter to accept the current value. Note: CLS does not handle the longer directory names supported by Windows 95 and 98. Directory names may be a maximum of eight characters. Valid Data Drives (F:H) Enter the letters of the data drives CLS will be using. Enter the floppy disk drives first, separated from the hard drives by a colon. For example, AB:CDEF indicates A and B are floppy disk drives and C, D, E and F are hard drives. If you are using only hard drives, the colon must precede the drive letters (:CDEF). If you are using only floppy drives, the drive letters must be followed by a colon (AB:). Data Drive or Path Enter the drive or path where you will keep your ledger data. This will usually be drive C if you are storing data on the hard drive or drive A if you are using a floppy disk. AT Import Drive or Path Enter the drive or path to be used when importing data using the Accounting Transfer (AT) program. BU Backup Drive or Path Enter the drive or path to be used when backing up CLS ledgers using the Ledger Backup/Restore (BU) program. EP Normal Backup Path EP Year-End Backup Path Enter the drive or path where you will store your backup data files during normal and year-end processing. This is where the current ledger generation is transferred during end of period processing. We recommend storing backup generations on the same drive as the current generation. Note: If these fields are left blank, CLS will use the current data path as the backup path. Transmittal Letter Path When the single-user version of CLS is used in a network environment, this field may be used to specify a shared path for transmittal letters. Otherwise, it should be left blank. System Initialization (SI) 1-123

CLS Main Menu Programs Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the data paths. Press Esc to return to the Set Systems Parameters menu without saving any changes. Set Import/Export Parameters (5) If you plan to interface with another Client Ledger System product such as CLS ~ The Limited Edition, CLS ~ General Ledger or CLS ~ Remote Entry, choose 5 to define import and export parameters. The following screen appears: The current value of each field is displayed. You may enter a new value for the field, or press Enter to accept the current value. Site Type (A,C) Select the site type. Press A if CLS is installed at the accountant site, or press C if it is installed at the client site. Press F1 to select the site type from a pop-up list. Site I.D. Enter a unique site I.D. to identify the transfer files on diskette. Is Computer a PS/2? (Y,N) Press Y if your computer is an IBM PS/2. Serial Port (COM1:-COM4:) Enter the serial port to which your modem is connected. Press F1 to select the serial port from a pop-up list. Modem Initialization code This field should normally be left blank, since CLS uses a pre-defined initialization code. A code entered here will override the CLS default. Baud Rate Select the modem's baud rate. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list. Note: If your modem's baud rate is not listed, select the next highest setting. Data Bits (7,8) 8 Stop Bits (0,1,2) 1 Parity (N,O,E) N Press Enter at each of these fields to accept the default responses provided by CLS. 1-124 System Initialization (SI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Default Import Mode (1,2) Select the default import filter to use when importing a transfer file. Select 1 to add new items only, or press 2 to completely update existing data. Press F1 to select the import mode from a pop-up list. Dialing Prefix If necessary, enter the dialing prefix required to access your modem (e.g., 9,). Times to Attempt Dialing Enter the number of times your modem should attempt to re-dial a remote site. Pause between Attempts Enter the number of seconds your modem should pause between dialing attempts. Import Diskette Drive Enter the default drive to use when importing a file located on a floppy disk. Export Diskette Drive Enter the default drive to use when exporting a file to a floppy disk. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) If the information on the screen is correct, press A. Press Esc to return to the Set System Parameters menu without saving any changes. Printer Maintenance (6) Use this routine to set up each CLS printer. You may also enter printer codes to override the default codes used by CLS when laser-printing financial statements, supporting reports and transmittal documents with bold, italics and underline effects. Printer Setup (1) Choose 1 to define each printer you will use with CLS. You may refer to Chapter 2 in the CLS Getting Started Guide for detailed information on laser printer setup. The current value of each field is displayed. You may enter a new value for the field, or press Enter to accept the current value. Select Printer (1-9) Select the number of the printer you wish to define. Press F1 to select the printer from a pop-up list. System Initialization (SI) 1-125

CLS Main Menu Programs Printer Description CLS automatically displays the printer description whenever you select a printer. You may change it here. To delete a CLS printer, simply remove the description. Printer Port Enter the printer port assignment. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of possible ports. Do not select PFIL: unless you are using Printfil with CLS; please refer to the documentation provided with Printfil for additional setup instructions. Laser Printer (Y,N) Press Y if this is a laser printer. Landscape Mode (Y,N) Laser printers only: Press Y if this printer will be used only in landscape mode. Press N if this printer will be used only in portrait mode. Solid Underline (Y,N) Laser printers only: Press Y if you want a solid underline printed below totals on a Balance Sheet, P&L or Supplemental Report. Press N if you want a dashed line printed. Enable B/I/U Laser printers only: Press Y if you would like to enable bold, italics and underline printing for this printer. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of options. Lines Per Page [66] Enter the lines per page to be used by CLS for all reports. CLS defaults to 66 lines per page in portrait mode. Printer DOS Command Use this prompt to execute a batch file (e.g., redirect printer output) before printing a report. Printer Setup Code Use this prompt to define a setup code (e.g., print all reports in italics, change the left margin, etc.) to be sent to your printer before printing each report. Refer to Chapter 2 of the CLS Getting Started Guide for specific laser-printer setup codes. Compressed-Print Code Normal-Print Code Enter the codes used by the printer to start compressed printing (16-17 characters per inch) and return to normal printing (10 characters per inch). That portion of the compressed and normal-print codes which can be represented by printable characters may be entered as text; characters which are not printable (and can only be represented as ASCII characters) must be entered as sets of two or three digits, with each set preceded by a backslash (\). A backslash followed by non-numeric characters or at the end of a series of numbers will be interpreted as the backslash character (092). The setup code, compressed and normal-print codes may also be entered in sets of two or three digits, with each set preceded by a backslash (\) and no spaces or other characters between the sets. Consult your printer manual for the correct codes. For example, the HP Laser Jet II, III, and 4 compressed-print code can be entered as \27&k2S or \27\38\107\50\83. The normal-print code may be entered as \27&k0S or \27\38\107\48\83. 1-126 System Initialization (SI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the printer setup. Press Esc to return to the Select Printer prompt without saving any changes. Printer '3' information has been updated. CLS updates the printer setup and returns to the Select Printer (1-9) prompt. You may define another printer, or press Esc to return to the Set System Parameters menu. Override Printer Codes (2) Choose 2 to override the default printer codes used by CLS for laser-printing financial statements, supplemental reports and transmittal documents with bold, italics and underline effects. Leave these fields blank to accept the CLS default values. Note: Consult your printer manual for the correct font sets, underline characters and commands. Select Printer (1-9) Select the number of the printer for which to enter printer codes. Press F1 to select the printer from a pop-up list. Default Font Set CLS returns to the default font set (Roman 8) after printing underline characters. Enter the command to select the default font set used by your printer. Extended Font Set CLS uses the extended font set to print underline characters. Enter the command to select the extended font set used by your printer to print underline characters Single Underline Char Double Underline Char Enter the character used by your printer to print underlines. Bold On Command Bold Off Command Italics On Command Italics Off Command Underline On Command Underline Off Command Enter the commands used by your printer to turn bold, italics and underline printing on and off. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the printer codes, or press Esc to return. System Initialization (SI) 1-127

CLS Main Menu Programs Printer '3' information has been updated. CLS updates the printer setup and returns to the Select Printer (1-9) prompt. You may define codes for another printer, or press Esc to return to the Printer Maintenance menu. Set Batch Processing Options (7) Use this routine to change the printer used during batch processing for all ledgers in the current data path. You may also rename the four batch report set descriptions. Reset Batch Printer (1) Batch Printer Select the number of the batch printer to be assigned to all ledgers in the current data path. Press F1 to select the printer from a pop-up list. Printer Description CLS displays the description of the selected printer. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the new batch printer, or press Esc to return to the Batch Printer prompt. Updating batch processing Complete CLS updates each ledger s batch processing setup with the new printer and returns to the Set System Parameters menu. Revise Global Batch Descriptions (2) Batch Description 1 Batch Description 2 Batch Description 3 Batch Description 4 Enter default descriptions for the four report sets defined in Batch Processing (BP). Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the batch descriptions, or press Esc to return to the Set Batch Processing Options menu without saving any changes. 1-128 System Initialization (SI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Batch Descriptions have been updated. CLS updates the batch descriptions and returns to the Set Batch Processing Options menu. Reset Ledger Batch Descriptions (3) Global Batch Number (1-4) Global Batch Description Select the global batch processing description you want to apply to all ledgers in the current data path. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the batch description, or press Esc to return to the Set Batch Processing Options menu without saving any changes. Updating ledger batch processing CLS updates this batch description for all ledgers in the current data path and returns to the Set Batch Processing Options menu. Reset Ledger Retention Cycle (8) Use this routine to change the retention cycle used for all ledgers in the current data path. Retention Cycle (1-99) Select the retention cycle to be used for all ledgers in the current data path. Updating ledger retention cycle Complete CLS updates the retention cycle for all ledgers in the current data path and returns to the Set System Parameters menu. List System/Printer Parameters (9) Use this routine to display or print your system and printer parameters. Respond to the following prompt: (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the report, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. System Initialization (SI) 1-129

CLS Main Menu Programs CLS will prompt you to select a printer. After printing, CLS returns to the Set System Parameters menu. Password Maintenance Choose 2 from the SI menu to define or revise a system password. Note: Use the page-up, page-down, up-arrow and down-arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the program prompts. Password #1 Password #2 Enter a new system password, or press Enter to accept the current one. Passwords may be up to 25 characters. You must define the programs to be accessed by each password. Each time you log onto CLS, only those programs to which your password gives you access will appear on the menus. At each program prompt, select a value between zero and three: CLS System Passwords 0 Neither password 1 nor password 2 has access to this program. (This option is not a valid response to the SI program prompt.) 1 Only password 1 has access to this program. 2 Only password 2 has access to this program. 3 Both passwords 1 and 2 have access to this program. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to update the system passwords, or press Esc to return to the SI menu. 1-130 System Initialization (SI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Letter Heading Maintenance Use this routine to create up to 99 letter headings. Letter headings may be assigned (along with corresponding texts) to a ledger in program TL, Menu Selection 9, or program LI, Menu Selection 8. Choose 3 from the SI menu to add or revise transmittal letter headings. The following screen appears: Heading No. (1-99) Enter a heading number. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of headings on file. Heading Line 1-4 A heading consists of up to four lines of 36 characters each. A heading prints where the key word @lhead appears in the transmittal letter. Accept, Delete, or Escape? (A,D,Esc) Press A to add a new heading or save changes to an existing one. Press D to delete a heading, or press Esc to return to the Heading No. (1-99) prompt without modifying the file. Letterhead No. '01' has been updated. Letterhead No. '02' has been deleted. CLS adds, updates or deletes the selected heading and returns to the Heading No. (1-99) prompt. You may select another heading, or press Esc to return to the SI menu. Text Maintenance Use this routine to add or revise transmittal letters. You may also create a Cover Page, a Table of Contents, Footnotes, Notepad or Client Bill to send with financial statements. Special keywords allow you to apply bold, italics and underline effects to text/keywords when laserprinting your documents. Due to limitations of the resident fonts on earlier Hewlett-Packard and compatible printers (HP III and older), we recommend using at least an HP 4 or later printer. Certain combinations of bold, italics and underline are not available on older printers. Choose 4 from the SI menu and the following menu appears: System Initialization (SI) 1-131

CLS Main Menu Programs For Menu Selections 1-6: Enter your document text. Sentences automatically wrap to the next line. The text editor uses the following cursor movement keys: Backspace Delete End Enter Home Insert Page-Up, Page-Down Cursor Movement Keys (F2) Use to correct errors. Use to correct errors. Moves cursor to the end of a line. Inserts blank lines and marks the end of a paragraph. Blank lines are indicated by the paragraph symbol ( ). Blank lines at the end of your document will print blank pages. Moves cursor to the beginning of a line. Toggles between the insert and typeover modes. Move around in the document. Certain key words embedded in the text allow you to customize a transmittal letter. Type these key words exactly as shown; they are case-sensitive! Press F1 to list the key words. Transmittal Letters - System Level (2) Use this routine to edit, copy and delete transmittal letters. You may create up to 999 transmittal letters. Up to four letters may be assigned to a ledger. Letters may be up to 600 lines long. Transmittal letters are accessible by all ledgers in the current data path. Edit a Transmittal Letter (1) Letter No. (1-999) Enter the number of the letter to create or change. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of transmittal letters on file. Letter No. 998 provides an example using the bold, italics and underline effects. Letter No. 999 provides instructions for using the text editor. Letter Description CLS displays the letter description for existing letters, which you may change if necessary. If you are creating a new letter, enter the description. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y if the selected letter is correct. Press N to return to the Letter No. (1-999) prompt. When your letter is complete, press Esc and respond to the following prompt: Save changes to letter no. '1'? (Y,N) Press Y to save changes to the letter or N to abandon the changes. CLS returns to the Letter No. (1-999) prompt. Select another letter, or press Esc to return to the Text Maintenance menu. Copy a Transmittal Letter (2) Letter No. (1-999) Enter the number of the letter to be copied. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of transmittal letters on file. Letter Description CLS displays the letter description. New Letter Number (1-999) Enter a number for the new letter. CLS will warn you if you will overwrite an existing letter. 1-132 System Initialization (SI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to copy the selected letter. Press N to return to the Letter No. (1-999) prompt. Complete CLS copies the selected letter and returns to the Letter No. (1-999) prompt. You may copy another letter, or press Esc to return to the Text Maintenance menu. Delete a Transmittal Letter (3) Letter No. (1-999) Enter the number of the letter to be deleted. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of transmittal letters on file. Letter Description CLS automatically displays the letter description. Would you like to delete this letter? (Y,N) Press Y to delete the selected letter. Press N to return to the Letter No. (1-999) prompt. Complete CLS deletes the selected letter and returns to the Letter No. (1-999) prompt. You may delete another letter, or press Esc to return to the Text Maintenance menu. @3periods, @6periods @AcctBal {acct. list}, @AcctBalL {acct. list}, @AcctBalT {acct. list} @Center {text} @cityst @citystl @client @contact @cp @curper @Cydate @Cyear @entity @Fon{BIU}, @Foff @fp Transmittal Letter Key Words (F1) Key words embedded in the text customize a document; key words print specific information where the keyword is positioned. Type these words exactly as shown; they are case-sensitive. Used to calculate the number of periods included when presenting a three-period or sixperiod P&L using the trend-analysis option. The number will not exceed 3 (or 6). Sums a range of accounts for the current year (e.g., @AcctBal{103, 105, 108-110} sums accounts 103, 105, 108, 109 and 110). Format code T may be used to indicate the right-most column position of the amount; the maximum column you may use is 65. Format code F determines dollar format (e.g., @AcctBal{103-105, T50, F3} sums accounts 103, 104 and 105, T50 indicates that the right-most digit of the amount should be in column 50 of the page, F3 means use format 3 when printing.) See the table on the next page for dollar format codes. Use @AcctBalL {acct.list} to pull in last year balances. Centers the text/keywords inside the braces. Client (ledger) city and state (2-character abbreviation). Use @cityst<c> to center the city and state. Client (ledger) city and state (full form). Use @citystl<c> to center the city and state. Client name and address. Use @client<c> to center the client name and address. Use @client1 for the Attention line only, or @client2 for the client name and address without the attention line. Contact name. Current-period month count (e.g., one). Number of months in the current period. Also @Pedate. Current period-end date. Use @Cydate<c> to center the current period-end date. The current period year. Inserts a client s entity type in the transmittal letter. Turns bold, italics and/or underline on and off. @Fon{BIU} preceeds the text/keyword that is to be printed in bold, italics and/or underline and @Foff follows it. Fiscal-year month count (e.g., twelve). Continued on the next page System Initialization (SI) 1-133

CLS Main Menu Programs @fisper @Fydate @Fyear @ledger @ledger2 @lhead @Lydate @Lyear @Note1<c>, @Note2<c>, @Note3<c> @Page @Pedate @periods @sig1, @sig2 @Today @xperiods @yp @ytdper Number of months in fiscal year. Fiscal year-end date. Fiscal year. Also @ledger1. Line 1 of the ledger name. Use @ledger<c> or @ledger1<c> to center line one of the ledger name. Line 2 of the ledger name. Use @ledger2<c> to center line two of the ledger name. Letterhead. Use @lhead<c> to center the letterhead. Use @LHEAD(C) to print the letterhead in all capitals. Current period-end date last year. Last year. Footnotes 1-3, centered. Use @Note1<cx> to center footnote no. 1 at the bottom of the page. Page break. Period-end date. Use @Pedate<c> to center the period-end date. Use @PEDATE to print the ledger period-end date in all capitals. Also @ytdper. Number of months or periods. Use @PERIODS to print the number of elapsed months or periods in capitals. Document signature lines. Today's date. Use @Today<c> to center today's date. Number of months, current and year-to-date. If the current and year-to-date months are the same value, only one will print. If they are different, both will be printed (e.g., one month and two months). If you do not want to use and, enter another connector in braces following the keyword (e.g., xperiods{&}). Year-to-date month count (e.g., six). Number of months year-to-date. Also @periods. Transmittal Letter Dollar Format Codes Format code F is used with the @AcctBal, @AcctBalL and @AcctBalT keywords to specify the dollar format. Code Rounded Amounts Include Dollar Sign Include Commas F1 4 - - F2-4 - F3 - - 4 F4 4 4 - F5 4-4 F6-4 4 F7 4 4 4 Cover Page, Table of Contents, Footnotes, Notepad and Client Bill (1,3,4,5,6) In addition to standard transmittal letters, CLS allows you to create other documents to accompany the financial statements. You may create multiple Cover Pages which are accessible to all ledgers. You may also create a Table of Contents, Footnotes, Notepad or Client Bill for each ledger. Additional key words may be used in a client bill. 1-134 System Initialization (SI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Client Bill Key Words (F1) Additional key words embedded in the text allow you to customize a client bill. These key words cause specific information from the ledger s time-tracker program to print where the keyword is positioned. Type these words exactly as shown. These client bill key words are not case-sensitive. @~addtime @~addrate @~addfee @~basecharge @~billamt @~fixedfee @~itemsno @~irate @~transno @~trate @~wutime @~wurate Displays additional time worked (hours:mins). Displays the rate charged for the additional time. Displays any additional fee charged. Displays the base-charge for this ledger. Displays the total amount of the bill Displays the client s fixed fee amount (if any). Displays the number of additional billable items. Displays the rate for each additional billable item. Displays the number of current transactions. Displays the charge per current transaction. Displays the current period write-up time (hours:mins) Displays the rate charged for the write-up time. When your document is complete, press Esc and respond to the following prompt: Save changes to 'Client Bill'? (Y,N) Press Y to save changes to the document or N to abandon the changes. CLS returns to the Text Maintenance menu. Select another document to edit, or press Esc to return to the SI menu. Depreciation Maintenance Choose 5 from the SI menu to revise MACRS/ACRS Tables. MACRS/ACRS Table Maintenance (1) Enter Table No. (1-23) Enter the number of the table to be changed. System Initialization (SI) 1-135

CLS Main Menu Programs Enter Year Enter the year to be changed. Month 1-12 Enter the correct percentage for each month. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the percentages you have just entered. CLS returns to the Enter Year prompt, and you may select another year to change. Press Esc to return to the Enter Year prompt without saving any changes. Print MACRS/ACRS Tables (2) Choose 2 to print MACRS/ACRS tables. The same set of tables as in Menu Selection 1 appears. Enter Table No. (1-23) Enter the number of the table to be printed. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the report, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. After printing, CLS returns to the Enter Table No. (1-23). You may select another table, or press Esc to return to the SI menu. Define Income Tax Rates and Limits Choose 6 from the SI menu to define income tax tables to be used in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (6), when defining estimated income tax calculations. Note: When you define the income tax calculations in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (6), you can either select one of the tax tables defined here or enter a tax rate to be used. Tax Table I.D. Enter the I.D. you wish to assign to this tax table. Use the following rules when assigning a table I.D.: The standard federal tax table I.D. is **. Use *1 *9 for alternate federal tax tables. The standard state tax table I.D. will be the state s postal code (e.g., CA, GA, TX). Alternate state tax tables I.D.s must begin with a letter (e.g., C1, G1, T1). Tax table I.D.s for the Other tax calculation must be numeric. 1-136 System Initialization (SI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Effective Date Enter the date this tax table became (or will become) effective. When estimated income tax transactions are created using the CT program, CLS will compare the FYE date of the ledger with the effective date of the tax tables to select the appropriate table to use. Tax Description Enter the transaction description to be used by the CT program when estimated income transactions are created using this tax table. Deduct Before (0,1) or (0-3) For state or other tax tables only: When defining a state tax table, indicate whether the tax should be deducted from net income before the federal tax estimate is computed. If you are defining an other tax table, indicate whether the tax should be deducted from net income before computing the federal and/or state tax estimate. This is a default setting that can be overridden when the tax calculation is defined in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (6). Taxable Income Percent For each tax table you define, enter the appropriate taxable income levels and the percentage to apply to income above that level. Shown below is a sample federal tax table. Taxable Income Percent 1..Greater than 0.00 15.000000 2. Greater than 50,000.00 25.000000 3..Greater than 75,000.00 34.000000 4..Greater than 100,000.00 39.000000 5..Greater than 335,000.00 34.000000 6..Greater than 10,000,000.00 35.000000 7..Greater than 15,000,000.00 38.000000 8..Greater than 18,333,333.00 35.000000 9..Greater than Accept, Delete or Escape? (A,D,Esc) Press A to accept the income levels and percentages you have entered. CLS returns to the Tax Table I.D. prompt. You may select another tax table to work with or press Esc again to return to the System Initialization menu. Press D to delete the current tax table. Press Esc to return to the Tax Table I.D. prompt without saving any changes. Define Quicken QuickPay Accounts Choose 7 from the SI menu to define a cross-reference between Quicken QuickPay categories and CLS expense and liability accounts. You may define a cross-reference table for each ledger, or define a single table to be shared by all ledgers for which you want to import QuickPay transactions. System Initialization (SI) 1-137

CLS Main Menu Programs Define Quicken QuickPay Expense Accounts (1) Ledger setup will be updated. If you logged onto a ledger in Ledger Start-up (LS), the QuickPay cross-reference table will apply only to the current ledger. Global setup will be updated. If you did not log onto a ledger in Ledger Start-up (LS), the QuickPay cross-reference table will be used by all ledgers for which a specific cross-reference table has not yet been defined. You may enter one CLS gross pay account corresponding to Quicken's Payroll:Gross category, plus up to 14 additional expense accounts for Payroll:Comp FICA, Payroll:Comp SUTA, Payroll:Comp SDI, etc. for use by the CLS Accounting Transfer (AT) program. The AT program will recognize Quicken payroll categories and substitute the corresponding CLS expense account numbers in the paychecks it imports from Quicken. CLS will ignore case and look only at the spelling of the categories entered here and in Quicken. Complete CLS updates the Quicken QuickPay expense accounts and returns to the Define Quicken QuickPay Accounts menu. Define Quicken QuickPay Liability Accounts (2) Ledger setup will be updated. If you logged onto a ledger in Ledger Start-up (LS), the QuickPay cross-reference table will apply only to the current ledger. Global setup will be updated. If you did not log onto a ledger in Ledger Start-up (LS), the QuickPay cross-reference table will be used by all ledgers for which a specific cross-reference table has not yet been defined. You may enter accounts for the nine pre-defined liability categories such as Payroll-FWH, Payroll- FICA, Payroll-FUTA, etc., plus up to 11 additional payroll liability accounts for use by the 1-138 System Initialization (SI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Accounting Transfer (AT) program. The AT program will recognize Quicken payroll categories and substitute the corresponding CLS liability account numbers in the paychecks it imports from Quicken. CLS will ignore case and look only at the spelling of the categories entered here and in Quicken. Complete CLS updates the Quicken QuickPay liability accounts and returns to the Define Quicken QuickPay Accounts menu. Correct Beginning Ledger Balance Use this menu selection to correct a beginning account balance in a ledger which has become permanently out of balance. It should be used only to correct damaged ledgers; do not use it for any other purpose. Choose 8 from the SI menu to correct a beginning ledger balance, and the following screen appears: Account No. Enter the number of the account whose beginning balance you want to change. Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts for this ledger. CLS displays account information such as the account description and type, and the current balances. *Last Per Ending Bal Enter the correct balance. Correct? (Y,N) Press Y if the amount you entered is correct. Press N to return to the Account No. prompt without changing the balance. Account number '103' has been updated. CLS updates the balance and returns to the Account No. prompt. You may select another account, or press Esc to return to the SI menu. System Initialization (SI) 1-139

CLS Main Menu Programs 1.13 Worksheet Interface With the Worksheet Interface program, you may use Lotus 1-2-3 and compatible spreadsheet programs such as Microsoft Excel, QuattroPro, Symphony, Microsoft Multiplan and SuperCalc to define report templates. A template describes the CLS accounts and balances you want transferred to a spreadsheet. The Worksheet Interface reads a template and then extracts account balances from a ledger's Chart of Accounts and transfers them to an output spreadsheet, minimizing the amount of work you have to do after the transfer. See the CLS ~ Worksheet Interface Manual for more information on creating templates. The Worksheet Interface program features: Complete access to CLS account history and budget balances Quick and easy transfer of data from CLS to a spreadsheet Reusable sample templates Enter WI from the Report Processing menu and the following menu appears: Lotus 1-2-3 ver. 1a Lotus 1-2-3 ver. 2 Symphony Multiplan From the WI menu, choose the spreadsheet program used to create the Worksheet Interface templates (Menu Selections 1-4). The prompts will be the same for each selection. The following screen appears if you chose Menu Selection 2. 1-140 Worksheet Interface (WI)

CLS Main Menu Programs Note: If you are using Lotus 1-2-3 version 3 or later, Excel or QuattroPro, use Menu Selection 2. TEMPLATE file name {.WK1} Enter the template data path (if different from the CLS data path) and file name. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of templates in the current data path. OUTPUT file name {.WK1} Enter the output data path (if different from the CLS data path) and file name. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of existing output files in the current data path. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the template and worksheet file names, or press Esc to return to the WI menu. Working *** Complete *** CLS extracts the information from CLS as defined by the template and exports it to the output spreadsheet. Worksheet Interface (WI) 1-141

CLS Main Menu Programs This page is left blank intentionally. 1-142 Worksheet Interface (WI)

Chapter Two 2 CLS File Maintenance Programs Ledger Backup/Restore (BU)... 2-2 Department File Maintenance (DF)... 2-10 Department File List (DL)... 2-13 Description File Maintenance (DM)... 2-14 DOS Shell Utility (DS)... 2-18 Lock File Release (LR)... 2-19 Master File Maintenance (MF)... 2-22 Master File List (ML)... 2-38 New Features in CLS (NF)... 2-41 Report File Maintenance (RF)... 2-42 Report File List (RL)... 2-46 Ledger Time-Tracker (TT)... 2-47 Verify File Integrity (VF)... 2-54

CLS File Maintenance Programs 2.1 Ledger Backup/Restore This program may be used to back up a ledger or a batch of ledgers to a floppy or hard disk drive. It may also be used to restore a ledger from a floppy disk, list the files on a disk or format a disk. Enter BU from the CLS Main Menu and the following menu appears: Backup a Ledger Choose 1 from the BU menu. The following screen appears: Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger to back up. Press F1 to select the ledger from a pop-up list. File Generation Enter the generation to back up. Press F1 to select the ledger generation from a pop-up list. 2-2 Ledger Backup/Restore (BU)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Ledger Name Period Ending Current Data Path CLS displays the ledger name, period-end date and the data path where the selected ledger files are located. Backup Drive or Path Enter the drive or path to which you want to copy the selected ledger. The default drive or path is set in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (4). Total capacity of drive 'A' Current FREE space on drive 'A' Add: Space used by EXISTING backup files Less: Space needed for NEW backup files Space available AFTER backup If you are backing up to a floppy disk, CLS displays the backup disk statistics for review. A warning will appear if the ledger already exists on the backup drive or if the backup disk is full. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to backup the selected ledger. Press N or Esc to return to the Ledger I.D. prompt. Backing up 'JCC.013' data files to path 'A:\' Complete Each data file appears as it is processed. When the backup is complete, CLS returns to the BU menu. Batch Backup of Ledgers Choose 2 from the BU menu and the following screen appears: File Format (O,N) Select the file format of the ledger generations to back up. Press O to back up CLS 4.2 or earlier ledgers or N to back up CLS 4.3 or later ledgers). Press F1 to select the file format from a pop-up list. Backup Drive or Path Enter the drive or path to which you want to copy the selected ledger. The default backup drive or path is set in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (4). Ledger Backup/Restore (BU) 2-3

CLS File Maintenance Programs Data Drive or Path Enter the location of the ledger generations to be backed up. CLS displays the ledger generations found in the selected path. Use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the list. Tag or un-tag the generations to be backed up by pressing the space bar or T. Press Enter to accept the tagged generations, or press Esc to return to the Data Drive or Path prompt. Do you wish to CLEAR ALL selected ledger tags? This prompt appears only if you press Esc to exit. Press Y to clear the tags or N to return to the selection window without removing the tags. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to accept the tagged ledger generations, or press N to return to the selection window. Total capacity of drive 'A' Current FREE space on drive 'A' Add: Space used by EXISTING backup files Less: Space needed for NEW backup files Space available AFTER backup If you are backing up to a floppy disk, CLS displays the backup disk statistics for review. A warning will appear if the ledger already exists on the backup drive or if the backup disk is full. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue the backup, or press N to return to the File Format (O,N) prompt. Backing up 'ABC.000' data files to path 'A:\' Batch backup complete! Each data file appears as it is processed. When the back up is complete, CLS returns to the File Format (O,N) prompt. You may backup another batch of ledgers/generations, or press Esc to return to the BU menu. Restore Ledger from Backup Disk Choose 3 from the BU menu and the following screen appears: Path to restore to CLS displays the current data path. Path to restore from Enter the drive containing the ledger to restore. Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger to restore. Press F1 to list the ledgers on the backup disk. 2-4 Ledger Backup/Restore (BU)

CLS File Maintenance Programs File Generation Enter the generation to restore. Press F1 to select the ledger generation from a pop-up list. Ledger Name Period Ending Last Activity CLS displays the ledger name, period-end date and date of last activity for the selected ledger. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to restore the selected ledger. Press N or Esc to return to the Path to restore from prompt. Restoring 'JCC.000' data files to path C:\NEWCLS Complete Each data file name appears as it is processed. When the restoration is complete, CLS returns to the BU menu. Backup/Restore Transmittal Letters Choose 4 from the BU menu to back up and restore transmittal letters. Backup Transmittal Letters (1) Choose 1 to backup transmittal letters, and the following screen appears: Backup Drive or Path Enter the drive or path to which to backup the transmittal letters. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue. Complete CLS backs up all of your CLS letterhead files, cover pages and transmittal letters and returns to the Backup/Restore Transmittal Letters menu. Ledger Backup/Restore (BU) 2-5

CLS File Maintenance Programs Restore Transmittal Letters (2) Choose 2 to restore transmittal letters, and the following screen appears: Path to Restore from Enter the path with the transmittal letters to restore. Replace ALL Transmittal Letters, or only those on the Backup Disk? (A,B) Enter A if you want all of your existing letterhead files, cover pages and transmittal letters deleted and replaced by those on the backup disk. Enter B if you want replace only those files which are on the backup disk, but keep any other files which are present. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue. Complete CLS restores the selected transmittal letters and returns to the Backup/Restore Transmittal Letters menu. Backup/Restore Magnetic Media Files Choose 5 from the BU menu to back up and restore magnetic media files. This menu selection appears only if you have installed the CLS ~ Magnetic Media add-on. Backup Magnetic Media Files (1) Choose 1 to backup magnetic media files, and the following screen appears: File Type (1-3) Press 1 to back up employee W-2 information, press 2 to back up employee SUTA information (CA and NJ only), or press 3 to back up vendor 1099/1098 information. Press F1 to select the file type from a pop up list. File Number (1-999) Select the number of the file to back up. Press F1 to select the file number from a pop-up list. 2-6 Ledger Backup/Restore (BU)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Current File Path CLS displays the path where the magnetic media file is located. Backup Drive or Path Enter the drive or path to which to backup the magnetic media file. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue. Complete CLS backs up the selected magnetic media file and returns to the Backup/Restore Magnetic Media Files menu. Restore Magnetic Media Files (2) Choose 2 to restore magnetic media files, and the following screen appears: Path to Restore to CLS displays the current data path. Path to Restore from Enter the path with the magnetic media file to restore. File Type (1-3) Press 1 to restore employee W-2 information, press 2 to restore employee SUTA information (CA and NJ only), or press 3 to restore vendor 1099/1098 information. Press F1 to select the file type from a pop up list. File Number (1-999) Select the number of the file to restore. Press F1 to select the file number from a pop-up list. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue. Complete CLS restores the selected magnetic media file and returns to the Backup/Restore Magnetic Media Files menu. Ledger Backup/Restore (BU) 2-7

CLS File Maintenance Programs List Files on a Diskette Choose 6 from the BU menu and the following screen appears: Drive to examine (A,B) Enter the drive where the disk to examine is located. Ready? (Y,N) Press Y to continue. One moment please - attempting to read drive 'A'... The files above are on this disk. Press ESC when finished. CLS displays the files on the disk. Scroll through the file list using the arrow keys (, ), Page-Up, Page-Down, Home, and End keys. CLS also displays the disk capacity and available space on the selected disk. Note: Only files in the root directory of a floppy disk will be displayed. Format a Diskette Choose 7 from the BU menu and the following screen appears: Note: This routine may not work reliably in Windows NT. Drive to format (A,B) Enter the drive containing the disk to format. Disk Capacity Select the disk capacity. You may select 360K (DS,DD) or 1.2M (DS,HD) 5¼" formats and 720K 2-8 Ledger Backup/Restore (BU)

CLS File Maintenance Programs (DS,HD) or 1.44M (DS,DD) 3½" formats. Press F1 to select the disk capacity from a pop-up list. Caution - This FORMAT routine will erase any files on the disk in drive 'A'. CLS warns you that existing files on the disk will be deleted. Ready? (Y,N) Press Y to format the selected disk. One moment please - attempting to read drive 'A'... The files above are on this disk. Press ENTER to continue or ESC to exit! CLS displays a list of files in the root directory. Press Enter to format the disk, or press Esc to return to the Drive to format (A,B) prompt. Formatting disk in drive 'A'. Press Ctrl+C to abort this process and return to CLS Insert new diskette for drive A: And press ENTER when ready If you do not want to continue, hold down the Ctrl key and press C. Otherwise, press Enter to continue - CLS will format the diskette. Format Complete. Volume Label (11 characters, ENTER for none)? You may enter an optional diskette volume label or press Enter for no label. Format another (Y/N)? When formatting of the current diskette is complete, you may format another disk if you wish. Enter N and press the Enter key to return to CLS and the Drive to format prompt. Ledger Backup/Restore (BU) 2-9

CLS File Maintenance Programs 2.2 Department File Maintenance Use this program to create departments and divisions for a specific ledger, including summary X, Y, and Z divisions. Departments and department-specific ratio divisors may be added, revised, deleted or queried. Note: You may use program MF, Menu Selection 6 (1), to batch create accounts for a specific department. Enter DF from the File Maintenance Menu and the following menu appears: Add/Revise a Department Choose 1 from the DF menu and the following screen appears: Dept or Division Enter the number of the department or division you want to add or revise. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. You may create a division using any combination of letters and numbers. CLS provides pre-defined X, Y and Z divisions, each with pre-defined department ranges. 2-10 Department File Maintenance (DF)

CLS File Maintenance Programs X One-decade Departmental Summary Y Two-decade Departmental Summary Z Three-decade Departmental Summary See Chapter 5 in the CLS Getting Started Guide, CLS Concepts, for more information about divisions. Dept/Division Name Enter or revise the department or division name. You may enter up to 50 characters. Stmt of Income & RE Press Y if you would like a Statement of Income and Retained Earnings printed for the selected department. Press N to suppress the report. Options Press H to suppress printing of this department on the Balance Sheet, P&L and supplemental reports unless specifically requested. Press X to mark this department inactive. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of options. Current Ratio Divisor YTD Ratio Divisor If you plan to define ratio columns using a special format Profit and Loss Statement, you may enter a divisor, up to ±999,999,999.99. Ratio Description If you entered a ratio divisor, you may enter a ratio description, up to 25 characters. Division Departments If you are creating a division, enter the departments to be included in the division. You may enter specific departments and/or department ranges; separate a range of departments with a colon (e.g., 1, 4, 7:9, 11, 13:15). Accept or Escape (A,Esc) If you are adding or revising a department, press A to save any changes. Press Esc to return to the Dept or Division prompt. Department '01' has been updated. Division '1A' has been added. CLS updates or adds the selected department or division and returns to the Dept or Division prompt. Select another department or division, or press Esc to return to the DF menu. Delete a Department Choose 2 from the DF menu to delete a department or division. This routine will not delete any of the accounts associated with the department being deleted. You may use program MF, Menu Selection 6 (2), to batch delete inactive departmental accounts. Dept or Division Enter the number of the department or division to be deleted. Press F1 to select the department or division from a pop-up list. CLS displays current department or division information. Would you like to delete this department? (Y,N) Press Y to delete the department or division or N to return to the Dept or Division prompt. Department File Maintenance (DF) 2-11

CLS File Maintenance Programs Department '02' has been deleted. Division '1A' has been deleted. CLS deletes the selected department or division and returns to the Dept or Division prompt. You may delete another department or division, or press Esc to return to the DF menu. Query a Department Choose 3 from the DF menu to query a department. Dept or Division Enter the number of the department or division to be queried. Press F1 to select the department or division from a pop-up list. CLS displays current department information. Select another department to query, or press Esc to return to the Department File Maintenance menu. Renumber a Department Choose 4 from the DF menu to renumber departments. CLS displays the current department numbers and names. New Dept Enter the number of the department to be renumbered. Press F1 to see the current department list. Comments CLS displays Merge or Renumber. Cannot link to a department being renumbered. CLS displays this message if you try to merge a department with a department that you have chosen to renumber. 2-12 Department File Maintenance (DF)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Department File List 2.3 Use this program to print a list of departments and divisions for the current ledger. Enter DL from the File Maintenance Menu and the following menu appears: Prepare a Department List Choose 1 to display or print a Department List, and respond to the following prompt: (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the report, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. When the report is complete, CLS returns to the DL menu. Department File List (DL) 2-13

CLS File Maintenance Programs 2.4 Description File Maintenance Depending on your response to the Memorize Descriptions (0-5) prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), CLS will memorize and autofill descriptions and accounts during transaction entry. Amounts entered here will be autofilled in ET if you chose to autofill the account field; amounts entered in ET will not be memorized. Use this program to create or revise memorized descriptions for a specific ledger. Note: You may also set the default Memorize Descriptions (0-5) option for new ledgers using program SI, Menu Selection 1 (1). Enter DM from the File Maintenance Menu and the following menu appears: Add/Revise a Description Choose 1 from the DM menu and the following screen appears: Description Key CLS uses the description key to search and autofill descriptions during transaction entry (ET). Press F1 to select the description from a pop-up list. Note: You may enter an abbreviation of the transaction description as the key. CLS will autofill 2-14 Description File Maintenance (DM)

CLS File Maintenance Programs the entire description as entered at the Displayed Description prompt (e.g., you could enter fmsi in ET, and CLS would autofill Financial MicroSystems). Displayed Description Enter the description as it should appear on the transaction entry screen. Default Account Enter a default account for the selected description. Default Amount Enter a default amount for the selected description (optional). Options Mark descriptions inactive using the X option. CLS will not autofill these descriptions during transaction entry. Press F1 to select this option from a pop-up list. Accept or Escape (A,Esc) If you are adding or revising a description, press A to save any changes. Press Esc to return to the Description Key prompt. Description HALL S FLOWERS has been updated. Description 'HAROLD'S' has been added. CLS updates or adds the selected description and returns to the Description Key prompt. You may select another description, or press Esc to return to the DM menu. Delete a Description Choose 2 from the DM menu to delete a description, and the following screen appears: Description Key Enter the description key for the description to be deleted. Press F1 to select the description from a pop-up list. Would you like to delete this description? (Y,N) Press Y to delete the selected description, or press N to return to the Description Key prompt. Description GA POWER CO has been deleted. CLS deletes the selected description and returns to the Description Key prompt. You may delete another description, or press Esc to return to the DM menu. Description File Maintenance (DM) 2-15

CLS File Maintenance Programs Delete Selected Descriptions Choose 3 from the DM menu to delete selected description, and the following menu appears: Asterisks beside menu selections 2 and 3 indicate routines which will be unavailable until descriptions have been selected. Select Descriptions to Delete (1) Choose 1 to select descriptions to delete, and the following screen appears: CLS displays the memorized transaction descriptions and their default accounts. Use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through these descriptions, and enter D beside those to be deleted. When your selections are complete, press Esc to move to the Accept, Clear All, Tag All, Tag Unused? (A,C,T,U) prompt. Accept, Clear All, Tag All, Tag Unused? (A,C,T,U) Press A to accept the changes. Press C to clear all of your selections and return to the Delete Selected Descriptions screen. Press T to tag all descriptions for deletion. Press U to tag all the descriptions that have not been used during the current year. View/Print Audit Trail (2) Choose 2 from the Delete Selected Descriptions menu to view or print the list of the memorized descriptions to be deleted. Respond to the following prompts: Include descriptions with no change? (Y,N) Press Y to include the descriptions that will not be deleted, or press N to suppress them. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the audit trail, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. CLS returns to the Delete Selected Descriptions menu when the report is complete. 2-16 Description File Maintenance (DM)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Delete Selected Descriptions (3) Choose 3 from the Delete Selected Descriptions menu to delete the descriptions. Continue or Escape (C,Esc) Press C to delete the selected memorized descriptions, or Esc to return to the Delete Selected Descriptions menu. Complete CLS deletes the descriptions and returns to the DM menu. Delete all Descriptions Choose 4 from the DM menu to delete all descriptions for the current ledger, and respond to the following prompt: ***Warning*** This routine will delete ALL memorized descriptions for this ledger! Use it with caution. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to delete all of the memorized descriptions for the current ledger. All memorized descriptions have been deleted. CLS deletes the descriptions and returns to the DM menu. Print Description List Choose 5 from the DM menu to display or print a Description List, and respond to the following prompt: (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the report, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. When the report is complete, CLS returns to the DM menu. Description File Maintenance (DM) 2-17

CLS File Maintenance Programs 2.5 DOS Shell Utility Use this routine to temporarily exit CLS to execute another DOS command. You should not use this routine to start another large program. The DOS shell requires approximately 85K of memory. Note: In order for the DOS Shell to work properly, the Path statement in your autoexec.bat file must include the CLS program path. Enter DS from the File Maintenance Menu and the following screen appears: From the DOS shell, type exit to return to CLS. 2-18 DOS Shell Utility (DS)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Lock File Release 2.6 The Lock File Release program is included only with the network version of CLS. In the event of system or workstation failure, CLS may display the message Ledger in use when you attempt to log onto a ledger after re-booting. Ledger locks remain set and should be removed using this feature. You may reset a lock for a single ledger or for all ledgers. Enter LR from the File Maintenance Menu and the following menu appears: Release Lock on a Single Ledger Choose 1 from the LR menu to release a ledger lock on a specific ledger, and the following screen appears: Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the locked ledger. Press F1 to select the ledger from a pop-up list of locked ledgers. File Generation Enter the generation of the locked ledger. Would you like to reset this lock? Press Y to reset the ledger lock. Lock File Release (LR) 2-19

CLS File Maintenance Programs Complete CLS resets the lock for the selected ledger and returns to the Ledger Startup (LS) program so you may log onto your ledger. Release All Ledger Locks Choose 2 from the LR menu to release all ledger locks, and the following screen appears: Would you like to reset these locks? Press Y to reset the ledger locks. Complete CLS resets the locks for all ledgers and returns to the Ledger Startup (LS) program so you may log onto your ledger. Clear Temporary Locks In the network version of CLS, CLS assigns a temporary lock when you start CLS; when you select a ledger, CLS replaces the temporary lock with a lock on that particular ledger. The temporary locks are shown as a set of dashes in LR 4. If you see more than one temporary lock, use Menu Selection 3 to remove them; the following screen appears: Would you like to clear these locks? Press Y to remove the temporary locks. Complete CLS removes all temporary locks and returns to the Ledger Startup (LS) program so you may log onto your ledger. Display All Ledger Locks If you experience problems releasing ledger locks, you may use this routine to determine if anyone is logged onto CLS. This program will display each user logged onto CLS and the ledger being used. 2-20 Lock File Release (LR)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Choose 4 from the LR menu and the following screen appears: When you are finished viewing the status of the CLS ledger activity, press Enter to return to the Lock File Release Menu. Lock File Release (LR) 2-21

CLS File Maintenance Programs 2.7 Master File Maintenance Use this program to create or revise the Chart of Accounts for a ledger. You can add, revise, delete, query or renumber accounts. Plan carefully before setting up the Chart of Accounts. Read Chapter 5 in the CLS Getting Started Guide, CLS Concepts, and make your decisions before beginning the set-up process. You can use the MF program to add budget or prior-year comparative balances to a ledger. You may also create department and job accounts. Enter MF from the File Maintenance Menu and the following menu appears: Note: Depending on your choices at the time you created the current ledger, an asterisk (*) may appear beside Menu Selection 3 or 4 to indicate that this routine is currently unavailable. If this is the case, use program LI, Menu Selection 9 (7), to expand the account master file if you now wish to enter history or budgets. Add/Revise an Account Choose 1 from the MF menu and the following screen appears: 2-22 Master File Maintenance (MF)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Account No. Enter the account number you want to add or revise. The account number must be within the range defined in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). If a new account number is entered with a length less than or equal to the length of the major portion, the departmental digits will be set to zero. Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts for this ledger. Description 1 Description 2 Enter the account description, up to 25 characters per line. For title accounts, the descriptions will be linked. For postable accounts, they will be stacked. Memo You may enter a note about this account. The memo will only print on the chart of accounts with memo line report (ML, Menu Selection 2). Type Account types affect the formatting of your Balance Sheet and Income Statement (see Chapter 5 in the CLS Getting Started Guide, CLS Concepts, for more information). Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of account types. The default account type is 0, a postable account. CLS Account Types 0 Postable Account. Transactions may be entered/posted only to type 0 accounts. 1 Balance Sheet Title Account. This must be the first account in the Balance Sheet section of the Chart of Accounts. 2 Income Statement Title Account. This must be the first account in the Income Statement section of the Chart of Accounts. 3 Sub-Schedule Title. Changes a Subsidiary Schedule title from its default description to another description. The new description will be effective on the subsidiary schedule until changed again. 4 Major Section Heading. Defines a major classification of accounts such as Assets or Liabilities and Equity. Accounts following this heading are totaled on financial statements when another type 4 account or the end of the Balance Sheet is reached. 5 Intermediate Section Heading. Defines an intermediate account classification such as Liabilities or Expenses, where further subclassification is provided by type 6 accounts. The accounts following this heading are totaled on financial statements when a type 4 account, another type 5 account, or the end of the Balance Sheet or Income Statement is reached. 6 Minor Section Heading. Defines account classifications such as Current Assets or Current Liabilities on a Balance Sheet or Revenue, Cost of Sales and Expenses on an Income Statement. Accounts following this heading total when a type 4 account, type 5 account, type 6 account, an account with an I- option (see Options below) or the end of the Balance Sheet or Income Statement is reached. 9 Title Account. This account description will always be printed. You may assign bold, italics and underline to the account description. 14 Major Section Total. On the Balance Sheet, this overrides the type 4 total description supplied by CLS. On the P&L, it sub-totals an open type 4 group, but does not clear it. 15 Intermediate Section Total. Overrides the type 5 total description supplied by CLS. 16 Minor Section Total. Overrides the type 6 total description supplied by CLS. 99 Income Statement Subtotal. Use only on the Income Statement to provide a subtotal accumulated from the start of the Income Statement to the type 99 account. Printing the subtotal does not clear it, so you may use type 99 accounts repeatedly. Use a type 99 for accounts such as Gross Margin, Net Income from Operations, Net Income Before Taxes, etc. The last account in the Income Statement portion of the Chart of Accounts should always be a type 99. Note: All type 99 accounts must be given an O option (see Options). Master File Maintenance (MF) 2-23

CLS File Maintenance Programs Options You may assign up to six options to an account. Enter multiple options without spaces. Press the space bar to remove all options. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of account options. Options for Type 1 & 2 Accounts A Use title for financial statements only (not subschedules) B Print title in bold C Use title only for company-level reports D Use title only for department/division-level reports F Use title only at fiscal year end I Print title in italics P Use title only for non-fye periods S Use title only on the subschedule U Underline title V Disable departmental validation X Inactive title account Y Print title exactly as entered 1-3 Use only for this balance sheet menu selection 1-9 Use only for this income statement menu selection Other CLS Account Options A Forces a postable, type 0 account to print. Prints balances for zero-balance accounts. B Print account description in bold. Account types 1-6, 9, 14-16 and 99. C Compress Peachtree Accounting for Windows or QuickBooks transactions during import. D Indicates the end of a Departmentalized Income Statement. This option is normally applied to the Gross Margin account when preparing a gross profit analysis. If a D option is not used, CLS considers the entire Income Statement to be departmentalized. E & S Use on an Income Statement, along with an S option (if needed), to define the range of accounts to include in the base (divisor) used for percent-of-sales calculations. An E option, placed on a non-postable account such as Cost of Goods Sold, stops the accumulation of the base. If an E option is not used, the base accumulation goes to the end of the Income Statement. The S option clears the accumulated base. If you do not use the S option, the base accumulation begins with the first account on the Income Statement. If used, the S option should also be placed on a non-postable account. Note: For percentage calculations to be based on total sales, assign option E to the Cost of Sales title account, and do not use option S. If you want the percentage calculation to be based on total expenses, assign an S to the Expenses title account and an E to the first non-postable account after the Expense section of the Income Statement. F Don t print percent of sales for this P&L account. G Don t clear this account s balances after printing subtotal. For account types 14, 15 and 16. H Exclude this account from net income when calculating income tax expense in CT. I Print account description in italics. For account types 1-6, 9, 14-16 and 99. J Assign to the group account which indicates the beginning of the work-in-progress section of a Job Cost Balance Sheet or Income Statement. The J option causes a grand total of all jobs to print at the end of the work-in-progress section of the Subsidiary Schedule. See options L and P. K Assign to the group account which indicates the beginning of the work-in-progress section of a Job Cost Balance Sheet or Income Statement. The K option causes the Subsidiary Schedule to list each job total instead of the job detail. Continued on the next page 2-24 Master File Maintenance (MF)

CLS File Maintenance Programs L Assign to the group account which indicates the beginning of the work-in-progress section of a Job Cost Balance Sheet or Income Statement. An L option affects only the Balance Sheet or Income Statement (not the Subsidiary Schedule) and causes each individual job total to be listed on the Balance Sheet (or Income Statement). If the L option is not used, a single work-in-progress total appears on the Balance Sheet. See options J and P. M Assign an M option to a group account to suppress printing of that group on a sub-schedule. N Assign an N option to any group account to suppress printing of the group title on a sub-schedule. O Reverses the sign of an account or group of accounts on financial statements. For example, use an O option with the Liabilities & Equity type 4 account to reverse the printed sign of all Liability & Capital accounts on the Balance Sheet. Use an O option on the Income Statement to reverse the printed sign of all Revenue and Other Income accounts. Use an O option with all type 99 subtotal accounts. P Assign to the group account specifying the start of the work-in-progress section of a Job Cost Balance Sheet or Income Statement. The P option affects only the Subsidiary Schedule and causes each job to print on a separate page. See options J and L. Q Assign a Q option to any group account to begin the sub-schedule on a new page. S Start accumulation of P&L percent base. T Forces a postable account to print as if it is a type 6 account. U Underline account description. For account types 1-6, 9, 14-16 and 99. V Indicates that this account is to be treated by CLS as a Beginning Inventory account on the P&L. W Indicates that this account is to be treated by CLS as an Ending Inventory account on the P&L. X Account is inactive. Transactions will not be accepted for inactive accounts. Note: You may also assign an X option to a title account and use an alternate title. Switch between the two titles by moving the X option. Z Forces a postable, type 0 account to print. Will not print balances for zero-balance accounts. 1-9 Use percentage divisor 1-9. Spacing Spacing Control Characters Use one of the following control characters in the Spacing field for title accounts (types 1-6). ^ Begin a new page before printing this account. 1-9 Skip 1 to 9 lines before printing this account. Group Account (Y/N) Use group accounts to combine account balances into a single total on a Balance Sheet or P&L Statement. The detail of the accounts in the group appears on a separate schedule (usually titled Subsidiary Schedule). Only type 0 accounts can be defined as group accounts; but CLS treats group accounts as non-postable. Note: Only the first account in a group has the group/group-end specification. Other accounts in the group should be regular postable accounts. Group End Account A group end account number indicates the last possible account in a group. All postable accounts (type 0) in a group will be totaled into the group master account. CLS ignores non-postable accounts in the group. Master File Maintenance (MF) 2-25

CLS File Maintenance Programs Cash Flow Stmt Line Changes in Fin Pos Line User Report 1-3 Line If you are preparing Supplemental Reports such as a Cash Flow Statement or Statement of Changes in Financial Position, you must associate each Balance Sheet account with a line on that report. When the report is prepared, balances for each account are accumulated into the report lines indicated. You may skip these fields if you do not plan to prepare Supplemental Reports. Press F1 to select report lines from a pop-up list. Note: Since line numbers are validated by CLS as they are entered, you must define Supplemental Reports with the Report File Maintenance (RF) program before entering line numbers here. All postable Balance Sheet accounts must be assigned to line numbers in a Cash Flow Statement or Statement of Changes in Financial Position before it will run successfully. You may assign accounts only to type 0 (postable) line numbers; more than one account may be assigned to the same line number. Last Yr Ending Bal This prompt applies only to postable Balance Sheet accounts. These balances provide the prior year-end balances used to prepare the Cash Flow Statement and Statement of Changes in Financial Position. Note: You may skip the Last Yr Ending Bal field if you do not plan to prepare Supplemental Reports for this ledger or if this is the first fiscal year for this ledger. This field will be automatically updated when you run EP at the end of the fiscal year. Annual/Job Budget This prompt applies to postable Income Statement accounts if you responded N to the Period- Budget P&L prompt in the LI program. If you enter annual budget amounts for Income and Expense accounts, these figures will be de-annualized to produce current period and year-to-date budgets. The job budget prompt applies only to postable Balance Sheet accounts within the valid range of job accounts on a Job Cost Balance Sheet. These budget amounts will appear on the work-inprogress sub-ledger, along with budget variances. Note: If you want to budget income and expense accounts by period, this option is available in the MF program, Menu Selection 4. You must have answered Y to the Period-Budget P&L prompt in the LI program. Tax Interface Code This prompt applies only if you have installed the CLS ~ Tax Package Interface. If you selected a tax package in program LI, Menu Selection 9 (9), you may press F1 to choose the tax code from a pop-up list. Tax Code If you are not using the CLS ~ Tax Package Interface, but want to use CLS to aid tax preparation, you may enter tax information such as the form, page number, tax schedule, line, alpha and numeric sub-lines and a minus-sign to reverse the balances. This prompt appears only if you answered Y to the Use Income Tax Summary prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Press F1 at each Tax Code prompt to pop-up a help screen for the tax information fields. 2-26 Master File Maintenance (MF)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Notes: Use program ML, Menu Selection 5, to print a chart of accounts sorted by tax form, schedule, line, etc. Use program TB, Menu Selection 6, to print an income tax summary. Accept or Escape (A,Esc) Press A to save additions or revisions. Press Esc to return to the Account No. prompt without modifying the file. Account number '103' has been updated. Account number '134' has been added. CLS updates or adds the selected account and returns to the Account No. prompt. You may add or revise another account, or press Esc to return to the MF menu. Delete an Account Choose 2 from the MF menu to delete an account, and the following screen appears: Account No. Enter the account number to be deleted. Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts for this ledger. CLS displays basic account information. *** Active account - cannot delete *** If any balances (including comparative or budget balances which are not displayed) are non-zero, this message appears. If the account has had any activity during the current period, or if you are keeping annual detail and the account has had any activity during the fiscal year, it cannot be deleted, even if current balances are zero. Would you like to delete this account? (Y,N) Press Y to delete the account. Press N to return to the Account No. prompt. Account number '273' has been deleted. CLS deletes the selected account and returns to the Account No. prompt. You may delete another account, or press Esc to return to the MF menu. Master File Maintenance (MF) 2-27

CLS File Maintenance Programs Enter Comparative History If you answered Y to the Comparative Financial Statements prompt in LI, you may use this routine to enter comparative balances. Comparative history may be entered by account or by period. If you answered N, an asterisk (*) appears beside this menu selection, indicating that it is currently unavailable; use program LI, Menu Selection 9 (7), to expand the account masterfile. See Chapter 5 in the CLS Getting Started Guide, CLS Concepts, for more information on entering history. Enter History by Account (1) Choose 1 to enter comparative history by account, and the following screen appears: Account No. Enter the number of the account for which you want to enter comparative balances. CLS displays the account title. Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts for this ledger. Periods 1-12 Beginning Balance (Balance Sheet Accounts only) Total This Year (P&L Accounts only) Enter the current and prior-year period balances for the accounting periods specified in LI, (i.e., if you specified four periods per year in LI, only four will appear here). For balance sheet accounts, enter the beginning balance for each year. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the account history. Press Esc to return to the Account No. prompt without saving any changes. Account number '103' has been updated. CLS updates the account and returns to the Account No. prompt. You may select another account, or press Esc to return to the Enter Comparative History menu. Press Esc again to return to the MF menu. 2-28 Master File Maintenance (MF)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Enter History by Period (2) Choose 2 to enter comparative history by period, and the following screen appears: This Year or Last Year (T, L) Press T to enter comparative history for this year, or press L to enter comparative history for last year. Balance Sheet (1) or P&L Accounts (2) Press 1 to enter history for Balance Sheet accounts, or press 2 to enter history for P&L accounts. Beginning Balance or Period (B, 1-12) Press B to enter beginning balances (Balance Sheet accounts only), or select the period for which you want to enter comparative history. CLS displays the first postable account in selected part of the Chart of Accounts as the Current Account. Enter the correct balance. Press Enter or the down-arrow to accept the balance and continue to the next account. CLS displays the Previous Account and the Next Account. Use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the Chart of Accounts for the current ledger and enter the correct balance for each account. CLS automatically displays the current and year-to-date net income, year-to-date current earnings and the year-to-date difference. When you are finished entering historical balances, press Esc to return to the This Year or Last Year prompt. Press Esc to return to the Enter Comparative History menu. Rebuild Current Year History (3) Choose 3 to rebuild current year history, and the following screen appears: Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to rebuild current year history. Press Esc to return to the MF menu. Master File Maintenance (MF) 2-29

CLS File Maintenance Programs Note: History can be rebuilt only if you have kept annual detail for this ledger and the number of periods in the fiscal year has not changed during the current fiscal year. If necessary, use LR 9 (7) to expand the account master file before running this routine. Import Prior Year History (4) Choose 4 to import prior year history, and the following screen appears: Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue. Press Esc or N to return to the MF menu. Respond to the following prompts: Master Drive or Path Enter the drive or path where last year s files for this ledger can be found. Last Year s Final Generation For this ledger, enter the CLS generation corresponding to the last period of last year. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to import prior year history. Press Esc to return to the MF menu. Note: History can be imported from this file generation only if the history already exists. If it doesn t exist, log onto last year s final generation, expand the account master file using LR 9 (7), and perform step 3 (above) before returning to this routine. Enter Period Budgets If you answered Y to the Period-Budget Income Statements prompt in LI, you may use this routine to enter period budgets for income statement accounts. If you answered N, an asterisk (*) appears beside this menu selection, indicating that it is currently unavailable; use program LI, Menu Selection 9 (7), to expand the account masterfile. See Chapter 5 in the CLS Getting Started Guide, CLS Concepts, for more information on entering budgets. 2-30 Master File Maintenance (MF)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Choose 4 from the MF menu and the following screen appears: Account No. Enter the number of the account for which you want to enter period budgets. CLS automatically displays the account title. Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts for this ledger. Periods 1-12 Annual Budget Enter the current-year budgeted amount for each period specified in LI (i.e., if you specified four periods, only four will appear). CLS computes and displays the Annual Budget. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the budgets. Press Esc to return to the Account No. prompt without saving any changes. Account number '701' has been updated. CLS updates the selected account and returns to the Account No. prompt. Select another account, or press Esc to return to the MF menu. Query an Account Choose 5 from the MF menu to query an account. You may not make changes during a query. Account No. Enter the number of the account to be queried, and CLS displays descriptive information and balances. Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts for this ledger. Press ENTER for History: This prompt appears if you selected comparative financial statements in program LI. Press Enter to display history and the following screen appears: Master File Maintenance (MF) 2-31

CLS File Maintenance Programs Press ENTER for Budgets: This prompt appears for Income and Expense accounts if you selected a Period-Budget Income Statement in program LI. Press Enter to display period budgets, and the following screen appears: Press ENTER when finished: When you are ready, press Enter to return to the Account No. prompt. Select another account to query, or press Esc to return to the MF menu. Dept Account Maintenance Once you have defined departments using the DF program, you may use this routine to batch create departmental accounts. Departmental accounts will be created for Balance Sheet and P&L accounts only if you have selected departmental reports in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Choose 6 from the MF menu and the following menu appears: Create New Departmental Accounts (1) New Department: Enter the department for which departmental accounts will be created. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. 2-32 Master File Maintenance (MF)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Master Department: [00] CLS defaults to the master department entered in LI 3 (1), or 00 if none has been entered. It will create a departmental account for each postable account (for the master department) found in the departmentalized section(s) of the chart of accounts. You may copy another department s accounts if needed. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue. Press N to return to the New Department prompt. *** Complete *** CLS creates the departmental accounts and returns to the New Department prompt. You may create more departmental accounts, or continue to press Esc to return to the MF menu. Delete an Inactive Department (2) This routine will delete inactive departmental accounts. If all of the departmental accounts are inactive (they have no balances), then CLS will also delete the department. Department to be Deleted: Enter the department to be deleted. All inactive accounts associated with this department will be deleted. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. Balances exist for some accounts. Would you like to delete the inactive accounts? (Y,N) CLS will warn you if balances exist for some accounts. You may then delete the inactive departmental accounts, but the corresponding department will not be deleted. Would you like to delete this department? (Y,N) If all departmental accounts are inactive, press Y to delete the department and associated departmental accounts. *** Complete *** CLS deletes the selected department and returns to the Department to be Deleted prompt. You may delete another department, or continue to press Esc to return to the MF menu. Job Account Maintenance Choose 7 from the MF menu and the following menu appears: Create New Job Accounts (1) Group Account of Job to be created: Enter the account number of the group account that defines this job. Press F1 to select from a popup Chart of Accounts for this ledger. Master File Maintenance (MF) 2-33

CLS File Maintenance Programs Master Job Account CLS displays the master job account. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue. Press N to return to the Group Account of Job to be created prompt. *** Complete *** If the group account is valid and falls within the range of valid job accounts on a Job Cost Balance Sheet or Income Statement, the postable accounts belonging to the job template for this ledger will be copied to this new job. You may enter another account, or press Esc to return to the Job Account Maintenance menu. See Chapter 5 in the pdf version of the CLS Getting Started Guide, CLS Concepts, for more information on job costing. Delete a Closed Job (2) Group Account of Job to be Deleted: Enter the account number of the group account which defines this job. Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts for this ledger. CLS displays the group balance. If the job as a whole nets zero and has no activity in the current period (or in the current year if you are keeping annual detail), you may delete it. Would you like to delete this job? (Y,N) Press Y to delete this job. *** Complete *** CLS deletes the selected job and returns to the Group Account of Job to be Deleleted prompt. You may delete another job, or continue to press Esc to return to the MF menu. Renumber or Delete Accounts Choose 8 from the MF menu to renumber or delete accounts. An asterisk (*) will appear next to this menu selection if unposted transactions are present. The following menu appears: Note: Asterisks (*) will appear next to Menu Selections 2 and 3 indicating that these routines are unavailable until accounts to be renumbered or deleted have been selected using menu selection 1. 2-34 Master File Maintenance (MF)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Select Accounts to Renumber or Delete (1) Choose 1 to select accounts to be renumbered or deleted, and the following screen appears: Use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the Chart of Accounts and make changes. Account balances will be merged if you renumber an account to an existing account number. Press F1 to select from a pop-up Chart of Accounts. Press D to delete an account. An asterisk (*) in the Act field indicates an active account, which cannot be deleted. CLS will automatically fill the Comments field with a description of the change made to the account (e.g., Renumber, Merge or Delete). Accept or Clear? (A,C) Press A to accept the changes, or press C to clear any changes made to the Chart of Accounts. Complete CLS saves your changes and returns to the Renumber or Delete Accounts menu. You may now print an audit trail listing any changes, or you may renumber/delete the selected accounts. View/Print Audit Trail (2) Choose 2 to print a listing of the changes or deletions, and respond to the following prompts: Include accounts with no change? (Y,N) Press Y to include accounts with no change, or press N to print only those accounts which will be changed. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the report, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. When the report is complete, CLS returns to the Renumber or Delete Accounts menu. Renumber/Delete Selected Accounts (3) Choose 3 to renumber or delete the selected accounts, and the following screen appears: Master File Maintenance (MF) 2-35

CLS File Maintenance Programs Note: Changes to the Chart of Accounts affect only the current generation. If you are re-closing a period, the Chart of Accounts for both the current period and the next generation must be identical. Continue or Escape? (C,Esc) Press C to renumber or delete the selected accounts. Press Esc to return to the Renumber or Delete Accounts menu. Would you like an Activity Report? (Y,N) [Y] Press Y if you would like an activity report listing the changes made to the Chart of Accounts. You will be prompted to select a printer. Creating ledger backup files Renumbering chart of accounts Complete CLS updates the Chart of Accounts and returns to the MF menu. Enforced Cosmetics Choose 9 from the MF menu to select Enforced Cosmetics Options at the ledger level. The following screen appears: Use Enforced Cosmetics (0-2) Press 1 to use the global Enforced Cosmetics settings selected in SI 2 (2). Press 2 to use the local settings entered here. Press 0 if you have chosen to use the global settings in SI 2 (2), but don t want to use Enforced Cosmetics for this ledger. Print using the following case: Dateline Column Headings Footnote Pos. A-D,G Footnote Pos. E,F Select the correct case at each prompt. Press F1 to select the case from a pop-up list. Account and Line Case Type 1-99 Select the correct case at each prompt. Press F1 to select the case from a pop-up list. 2-36 Master File Maintenance (MF)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Accept, Reset or Escape? (A,R,Esc) Press A to accept the Enforced Cosmetics settings, or press R to reset the settings to their default values. Press Esc to return to the Master File Maintenance menu. Master File Maintenance (MF) 2-37

CLS File Maintenance Programs 2.8 Master File List Use the Master File List (ML) program to print a Chart of Accounts in account number sequence. You may also print a Chart of Accounts with dollar amounts, or with current year balances or history/budget balances. If you enter tax information using the Master File Maintenance (MF) program, you may print an income tax cross-reference report. You may also print ledger setup detail. Enter ML from the File Maintenance Menu and the following menu appears: Note: Depending on your response to the Use Income Tax Summary prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), an asterisk (*) may appear beside menu selection 5 to indicate that this program is currently unavailable. List Chart of Accounts (No Dollar Amounts) List Chart of Accounts with Memo Line List Accounts with Current Yr Balances List Accounts with History/Budget From the ML menu, choose the type of account list (Menu Selections 1-4) to print, and respond to the following prompts: (1) Balance Sheet accounts, (2) P&L accounts, or press ENTER for both: Press 1 to include only Balance Sheet accounts, press 2 to include only P&L accounts, or press Enter to include both Balance Sheet accounts and P&L accounts. Print title and total accounts? (Y,N) [Y] This prompt appears only for Menu Selection 1. Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you want title and total accounts printed; press N if you do not. 2-38 Master File List (ML)

CLS File Maintenance Programs (1) History, (2) Budget, or press ENTER for both: This prompt appears only for Menu Selection 4. Press 1 to include only history amounts, press 2 to include only budget amounts, or press Enter to list both history and budget amounts. Starting page number This prompt appears for Menu Selections 1 and 2. Enter the number of the first page. Would you like a Departmental Report? (Y,N) [N] If you selected a departmental Balance Sheet in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), press Y to print a departmentalized Chart of Accounts. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments: If you selected a departmental report, enter the department number for which you want to print a Chart of Accounts. Press Enter to print a Chart of Accounts listing all departments. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the ML menu. List Income Tax Cross-Reference Choose 5 from the ML menu to list the income tax cross reference without dollar amounts. An asterisk will appear next to this menu selection if you did not choose to use the income tax summary in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Respond to the following prompts: (1) Balance Sheet accounts, (2) P&L accounts, or press ENTER for both: Press 1 to include only Balance Sheet accounts, press 2 to include only P&L accounts, or press Enter to include both Balance Sheet accounts and P&L accounts. Sort by (1) Tax Form and Line Number, or (2) Account [1] Press 1 to list the income tax cross-reference by tax form and line number; press 2 to sort the report by account. Would you like a Departmental Report? (Y,N) [N] If you selected a departmental Balance Sheet in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), press Y to print a departmentalized income tax cross-reference. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments: If you selected a departmental report above, enter the department number for which you want to print an income tax cross-reference. Press Enter to print an income tax cross-reference listing all departments. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the ML menu. Master File List (ML) 2-39

CLS File Maintenance Programs List Ledger Setup Information List Batch Processing Reports Choose 6 from the ML menu to list ledger setup information, or 7 to list the batch-processing report setup. For Menu Selection 6, you can select all setup information, or print just the contact information entered in LI 3 (2). Respond to the following prompt: (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the ML menu. 2-40 Master File List (ML)

CLS File Maintenance Programs New Features in CLS 2.9 Use the New Features in CLS (NF) program to display or print a complete list of features new to this version of CLS. Enter NF from the File Maintenance Menu and respond to the following prompt: (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the report, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. When the report is complete, CLS returns to the CLS Main Menu. New Features in CLS (NF) 2-41

CLS File Maintenance Programs 2.10 Report File Maintenance Use the Report File Maintenance (RF) program to create or revise a Cash Flow Statement or Statement of Changes in Financial Position, or define your own report (User-Defined Report). You may define a maximum of 10,000 (0-9999) lines per report. Enter RF from the File Maintenance Menu and the following menu appears: Choose the number of the report to create or revise, and a menu for the selected report appears: Add/Revise a Report Line (1) Line Number Enter the line number to add or revise; press F1 to select the line from a pop-up list. Valid line numbers are 0-9999. 2-42 Report File Maintenance (RF)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Description Line 1 Description Line 2 Enter the line description, up to 36 characters per line. Line Type Enter a line type. Valid line types are: CLS Line Types 0 Postable Line. Accounts may only be assigned to type 0, postable lines. See Chapter 5, CLS Concepts, in the CLS Getting Started Guide for information about assigning Balance Sheet accounts to report lines. 1 Defines a Cash Flow Statement report format. The type 1 line description will appear as the report heading. 2 Defines a Statement of Changes in Financial Position report format. The type 2 line description will appear as the report heading. 4 Major Section Heading. Defines a major classification of report lines. A type 4 section totals at the end of the report or when it encounters another type 4 line. 5 Intermediate Section Heading. Defines an intermediate report line classification. A type 5 section totals when a type 4 line, another type 5 line, or the end of the report is reached. 6 Minor Section Heading. Defines a report line classification such as Current Assets or Change in Liabilities. A type 6 line totals when another type 4, 5 or 6 line, or the end of the report is reached. 9 Title Line. This line description is always printed. You may assign bold, italics and underline to the line description. 14 Major Section Total. Overrides the type 4 total description supplied by CLS. 15 Intermediate Section Total. Overrides the type 5 total description supplied by CLS. 16 Minor Section Total. Overrides the type 6 total description supplied by CLS. 99 Cash Flow Statement Subtotal. Use with the Cash Flow Statement. A type 99 line provides a subtotal accumulated from the beginning of the report to the place where the type 99 line appears. Printing the subtotal does not clear it, so you may use it repeatedly. The last line on a Cash Flow Statement or Statement of Income and Retained Earnings should always be a type 99 line. Options You may assign up to six options per line. Enter multiple options without spaces. Press the space bar to remove all options. The available options are as follows: Options for Type 1 & 2 LInes B Print description in bold C Use description only for company-level statements D Use description only for department/division-level statements F Use description at fiscal year end only I Print description in italics O Reverse printed sign P Use description for non-fye periods only U Underline description X Inactive report line Y Print description exactly as entered 1 Use description for standard report 2 Use description for prior-year comparison Report File Maintenance (RF) 2-43

CLS File Maintenance Programs Prints a single underline under a postable line. = Prints a double underline under a postable line. A B C E F G I N O R S T U X Y Z Other CLS Line Options Forces a postable, type 0 line to print. Prints balances for zero-balance lines. Print non-postable line description in bold. Identifies the Beginning Cash line on the Cash Flow Statement. The line description is not sufficient to identify the line as the cash line; the C option is required to do so. Use ending balance. Use on the Statement of Changes in Financial Position to switch the report to the Analysis of Change format. Don t clear sub-total after printing (for type 14, 15 or 16 lines). Print non-postable line description in italics. Identifies the Net Income line on the Cash Flow Statement and Statement of Changes in Financial Position. The line description is not sufficient to identify the net income line; the N option is required. Reverses the sign of a line or group of lines on a supplemental report. This option is used with the type 1 line on the Cash Flow Statement, causing all lines to print with signs reversed. It is also used with the Change In Working Capital, type 4 line on the Statement of Changes in Financial Position. Identifies the Beginning Retained Earnings line on a Statement of Retained Earnings. The line description is not sufficient to identify the line as a Retained Earnings line; the R option is required. Use beginning balance. Forces a type 0 (postable) line to print as if it were a type 6 group, but using only one line; title and total lines do not print. This option causes a previous open type 6 Group to total. You may use this option on both the Cash Flow Statement and the Statement of Changes in Financial Position. Underline a non-postable line description. Exclude this line from net income. Print line description exactly as entered. Forces a postable, type 0 line to print. Will not print balances for zero-balance lines. Spacing The control characters listed below may only be used with title lines (line types 4-6). Press F1 to list the spacing characters. Spacing Control Characters ^ Begin a new page before printing this line. 1-9 Skip from 1 to 9 lines before printing this line. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to save additions or revisions, or press Esc to return to the Line Number prompt without modifying the file. Report line '6' has been updated. Report line '3' has been added. CLS updates or adds the selected line and returns to the Line Number prompt. You may select another line number, or press Esc to return to the menu for the selected report. 2-44 Report File Maintenance (RF)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Delete a Report Line (2) Line Number Enter the line number to be deleted, or press F1 to select the line from a pop-up list. CLS displays basic information about the report line. If you delete a line with a balance, reassign the accounts that generated those balances to other lines. Would you like to delete this report line? (Y,N) Press Y to delete the line. Press N to return to the Line Number prompt. Report line '10' has been deleted. CLS deletes the report line and returns to the Line Number prompt. You may delete another report line, or press Esc to return to the menu for the selected report. Query a Report Line (3) Choose 3 from the RF menu to query a report line. The following screen appears: Line Number Enter the line number to be queried; press F1 to select the line from a pop-up list. Descriptive information and current balances appear. You may query another report line, or press Esc to return to the menu for the selected report. Report File Maintenance (RF) 2-45

CLS File Maintenance Programs 2.11 Report File List Use this program to print report formats in line number sequence for the Cash Flow Statement, Statement of Changes in Financial Position, and User-Defined Reports. Enter RL from the File Maintenance Menu and the following menu appears: Select the appropriate report setup, and respond to the following prompt: (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the report, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. When the report is complete, CLS returns to the RL menu. 2-46 Report File List (RL)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Ledger Time-Tracker 2.12 The primary purpose of the Ledger Time-Tracker (TT) program is to count transactions and track the amount of write-up time you spend on your CLS clients each period. Using this information, you can determine if your write-up work is profitable and if you are billing your clients the correct amounts. The time-tracker program also lets you create a simple client bill (using the transmittal letter program), which should suffice if you are just billing write-up work. You can enter the amount to be billed, adjust the amount billed during a given period, and enter collections for the period. You may define client bills using program SI, Menu Selection 4 (6). All transmittal letter key words are available when defining a bill, but additional key words have been provided specifically for this purpose. You may also use program LI, Menu Selection 2 (3) to copy a bill from one client to another. To begin using the time tracker for a client: 1. Use Menu Selection 1 to enter the appropriate setup information. 2. Use the PT program to unpost (Menu Selection 1) and re-post (Menu Selection 2) any transactions which were entered during the current period. Enter TT from the CLS File Maintenance Menu and the following menu appears: The time-tracker program begins to accumulate time when you log onto a client in Ledger Start-up. 1. The time-tracker is not active (i.e., time is not being accumulated) when the Program Selection Menu, File Maintenance Menu or Report Processing Menu is displayed. 2. It is not active when a prompt similar to the following is displayed: Ledger Time-Tracker (TT) 2-47

CLS File Maintenance Programs *** End of (a program) *** Select Program or press ENTER for the Main Menu: 3. It is also not active when you are in the SI program. Note: Selecting * from the TT menu will reset all Time-Tracker settings for the current ledger. Accumulated time, transactions, amounts billed and amounts collected will be reset to zero. The routine should only be run for damaged ledgers. Ledger Time-Tracker Setup Choose 1 from the TT menu and the following screen appears: Billing Method (A,F,V) Enter A if you want to bill a fixed amount for write-up work, plus any additional work performed. Enter F to bill a fixed amount for all work performed. Enter V if the amount billed is completely variable. Current Fixed-Fee Amount Enter any agreed-upon fixed fee for this client. If there is no fixed fee, you may use this field to enter a budgeted amount for this client. Client-Value Base Charge If the client s bill for write-up work should vary with the amount of work performed, enter any basecharge (the minimum amount to be charged). Write-up Price (per Hour) Enter your hourly write-up rate for this client. If the client is charged only for the number of transactions entered, enter zero. Time Block Size (1-60 Minutes) Enter the block-size for the time to be billed. For example, if you want to bill in 15-minute increments, enter 15. If you want to bill each minute worked, enter 1. Bill Write-Up Time if over (Minutes) Enter the amount of write-up time included in the base-charge. If none, enter zero. 2-48 Ledger Time-Tracker (TT)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Rounding Method (*,+,-) If you have chose a time block size greater than 1, select the rounding method to be used: * Round normally + Round up - Round down Price per Transaction Enter the amount charged per transaction, if any. If the client is charged only for write-up time, enter zero. Transaction Block Size (Trans) Enter the size of the transaction blocks to be billed. For example, if you want to bill in 100- transaction increments, enter 100. If you want to bill for each transaction, enter 1. Bill Write-up if over (Trans) Enter the number of write-up transactions included in the base-charge. If none, enter zero. Rounding Method (*,+,-) If you have chose a transaction block size greater than 1, select the rounding method to be used: * Round normally + Round up - Round down Additional-Time Price (per Hour) Enter the hourly rate charged this client for any additional work performed. Additional-Item Price (per Item) Enter the price charged this client for any additional items (such as paychecks) prepared on a regular basis. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept any changes. Press Esc to return to the time-tracker menu without saving any changes. Enter Amount to be Billed Choose 2 from the TT menu and the following screen appears: Add l Billable Time Enter any additional time spent on this client this period. This time will be multiplied by the Ledger Time-Tracker (TT) 2-49

CLS File Maintenance Programs additional time price entered in Menu Selection 1 to calculate the time value. Add l Billable Items Enter the number of additional billable items (such as paychecks) prepared for this client this period. This will be multiplied by the additional item price entered in Menu Selection 1 to calculate the value of these items. Additional Fee for Work Performed Enter any additional fee to be charged the client this period. Amount to be Billed If this is a new bill, CLS will suggest the amount to be billed and the billing date will default to today s date. Enter the amount you actually want to bill the client and the correct billing date. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the bill. Press Esc to return to the time-tracker menu without saving any changes. Enter Collections Choose 3 from the TT menu and the following screen appears: For each period, the time-tracker displays the total amount billed, the total amount previously collected, and the total of any current period collections. It also shows the last activity date for each of these items. Collection Amount Enter the amount collected. Collection Date Enter the collection date. Collection Period Enter the period to which you want to apply this collection. Enter 0 if it is to be applied to the balance forward from the previous year. Accept or Escape If the collection has been entered correctly, press A to accept the collection. Press Esc to return to the time-tracker menu without saving the collection. 2-50 Ledger Time-Tracker (TT)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Add or Replace If there is already an amount in the current collection field for this period, you can add the new collection to this amount or replace it. If you choose to add to it, time-tracker will save the most recent collection date as the last collection date for this period. Press Esc to return to the timetracker menu without saving the collection. Edit Accumulated Time Choose 4 from the TT menu and a menu for to Edit Accumulated Time appears. Choose 1 to edit current period write-up time or 2 to edit historical write-up time. Choose 1 and the following screen appears: Current Period Write-Up Time The time-tracker program displays the time which has been accumulated for this client this period. You may change it if necessary. Accept or Escape Press A to accept the new write-up time. Press Esc to return to the time-tracker menu without saving any changes. Enter Bill Adjustments Choose 5 from the TT menu and the following screen appears: For each period, the time-tracker displays the total amount billed, the total of any current bill adjustments, and the total amount collected. It also shows the last activity date for each of these items. Bill Adjustment Enter the amount of any adjustment. Bill Adjustment Date Enter the adjustment date. Ledger Time-Tracker (TT) 2-51

CLS File Maintenance Programs Bill Adjustment Period Enter the period to which you want to apply this adjustment. Enter 0 if it is to be applied to the balance forward from the previous year. Accept or Escape If the adjustment has been entered correctly, press A to accept the adjustment. Press Esc to return to the time-tracker menu without saving the adjustment. Add or Replace If there is already an amount in the current adjustment field for this period, you can add the new adjustment to this amount or replace it. If you choose to add to it, the time-tracker will save the most recent adjustment date as the last billing activity date for this period. Press Esc to return to the time-tracker menu without saving the adjustment. Query Transaction History Choose 6 from the TT menu and the following screen appears: The time-tracker program will display the number of transactions entered in each period since it was activated. Only active transactions are included; deleted transactions are not. Press ENTER when finished: Press the Enter key to return to the time-tracker program menu. Query Accumulated Time Choose 7 from the TT menu and the following screen appears: 2-52 Ledger Time-Tracker (TT)

CLS File Maintenance Programs The time-tracker program will display the time accumulated in each period since it was activated. It will also display any additional time which was entered for these periods. Press ENTER when finished: Press the Enter key to return to the time-tracker program menu. Print Time-Tracker Reports Choose 8 from the TT menu and the following screen appears: Press 1 to print a billing worksheet showing the value of accumulated time and transactions this period and provides a place to enter additional time and/or billable items, any additional fee and the total to be billed. Press 2 to print a billing report showing the current billed amounts. Press 3 to print a billing history report showing this client s billings and collections for the year, and the current ending balance. Press 4 to print a report showing this client s time and transaction history for this year and last year. Press 5 to print a report showing year-to-date time and transactions for all clients. Press 6 to print a report showing current period or year-to-date billings, collections and ending balance for all clients in which the time-tracker is active. Ledger Time-Tracker (TT) 2-53

CLS File Maintenance Programs 2.13 Verify File Integrity The Verify File Integrity (VF) program tests all data files in the current ledger for problems. Use this program when you have a hardware or power failure which may have damaged your files. File damage is possible if the failure occurs while you are entering or posting transactions, or performing any of the CLS maintenance functions. Enter VF from the CLS Main Menu and the following menu appears: Verify File Integrity Choose 1 from the VF menu and the following screen appears: File structure is OK! Press ENTER to return to the VF menu... This message appears if no errors are found after the VF program has scanned the data files. 2-54 Verify File Integrity (VF)

CLS File Maintenance Programs File structure is Damaged! Would you like to recover damaged files? (Y,N) This prompt appears if errors are found. If you do not want to recover the damaged files at this time, press N or Esc to return the VF menu. Press Y to continue, and the following prompts appear: Files to recover reside in path CLS displays the path where the files to be recovered are located. Path for temporary files Enter the drive where temporary files are to be stored during recovery. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to start the recovery process. Press N or Esc to return to the VF menu. *** Complete *** ***Re-run Post Transactions *** *** End of Recover Transaction File *** Select Program or press ENTER for the Main Menu: The VF program rebuilds the damaged files, placing new files (with a.$$$ extension) in the temporary path. When finished, CLS deletes the old files and renames the new ones (copying the recovered files back to the original data drive if necessary). CLS will then execute VF, Menu Selection 2 to re-link the transactions. You may list the unposted transactions using program TR, Menu Selection 5, and review them before you re-post. Note: Efforts to recover damaged master and/or transaction files may not be successful. If they are not, return to the previous generation, re-run End of Period Processing, and re-enter current period transactions. Force Recovery of Transaction File Choose 2 from the VF menu to recover the CLS transaction file, and respond to the following prompts: Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to start the recovery process. *** Complete *** *** Re-run Post Transactions *** *** End of Recover Transaction File *** Select Program or press ENTER for the Main Menu You may list unposted transactions using program TR, Menu Selection 5, and review them before you re-post. Note: Efforts to recover damaged transaction files may not be successful. If they are not, return to the previous generation, re-run End of Period Processing, and re-enter current period transactions. Verify File Integrity (VF) 2-55

CLS File Maintenance Programs Force Recovery of Master Files Choose 3 from the VF menu to recover CLS master files, and respond to the following prompts: Files to recover reside in path CLS displays the path where the files to be recovered are located. Path for temporary files Enter the drive where temporary files are to be stored during recovery. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to start the recovery process. *** Complete *** ***Re-run Post Transactions *** *** End of Recover Transaction File *** Select Program or press ENTER for the Main Menu The VF program rebuilds the damaged files, placing new files (with a.$$$ extension) in the temporary path. When finished, CLS deletes the old files and renames the new ones (copying the recovered files back to the original data drive if necessary). CLS will then automatically execute VF, Menu Selection 2, to relink the transactions. You may list unposted transactions using program TR, Menu Selection 5, and review them before you re-post. Note: Efforts to recover damaged master and/or transaction files may not be successful. If they are not, return to the previous generation, re-run End of Period Processing and re-enter current period transactions. Force Recovery of Magnetic Media Files If you are using the CLS Magnetic Media program and the W-2 or 1099/1098 intermediate file becomes corrupt, you may use this routine to recover it. Choose 4 from the VF menu and respond to the following prompts: Files to recover reside in path CLS displays the path where the files to be recovered are located. Path for temporary files Enter the drive where temporary files are to be stored during recovery. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to start the recovery process. Recovering intermediate file... Complete CLS recovers the intermediate file and returns to the VF menu. 2-56 Verify File Integrity (VF)

CLS File Maintenance Programs Rebuild Tax Code/Template Files If you are using the CLS Tax Package Interface and have damaged files, you may use this routine to rebuild the tax code/template files. Choose 5 from the VF menu and respond to the following prompts: Files to recover reside in path CLS displays the path where the files to be recovered are located. Path for temporary files Enter the drive where temporary files are to be stored during recovery. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to start the recovery process. Complete The VF program rebuilds the damaged files, placing new files (with a.$$$ extension) in the temporary path. When finished, CLS deletes the old files and renames the new ones (copying the recovered files back to the original data drive if necessary). Verify File Integrity (VF) 2-57

CLS File Maintenance Programs This page is left blank intentionally. 2-58 Verify File Integrity (VF)

Chapter 3 Three CLS Report Processing Programs Batch Processing (BP)... 3-2 Bank Reconciliation (BR)... 3-9 Balance Sheet (BS)... 3-19 Depreciation and Amortization Schedules (DA)... 3-26 Ledgers on File (LF)... 3-30 Profit & Loss Statement (PL)... 3-34 Ratio Analysis (RA)... 3-42 Supplemental Reports (SR)... 3-53 Trial Balance (TB)... 3-56 Transmittal Letter (TL)... 3-63 Transaction Register (TR)... 3-67

CLS Report Processing Programs 3.1 Batch Processing Use this program to define and print collated sets of reports for each client and execute previously defined report selections. You may define up to four permanent sets of reports per ledger, and a temporary global batch. These sets define the number of report copies to be printed for any or all ledgers in the current data path. You may also print page numbers on reports and route reports to the assigned batch printers or to a selected printer. Note: Use program SI, Menu Selection 1 (7,2), Revise Batch Descriptions, to customize the default report set names. Use program LI, Menu Selection 8 (1), to customize report set names for a specific ledger. Enter BP from the Report Processing Menu. Select the number of the report set to use, and a menu for that set appears: Batch Processing Setup Select Report Set 1, then choose 1 from the Batch Processing for Report Set Number 1 menu. The Batch Processing Setup menu for the selected set appears: 3-2 Batch Processing (BP)

CLS Report Processing Programs Select Batch Report Copies (1) Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger for which to set up a batch of reports. Press F1 to select from a list of available ledgers. File Generation CLS displays the current generation number for this ledger, which you may change. Press F1 to select the generation from a pop-up list. Ledger Name Period Ending CLS displays the ledger name and period-end date of the selected ledger. Batch Printer CLS displays the printer assigned to this ledger for batch processing. An asterisk (*) indicates multiple printers have been selected. If you wish, you may change the assigned printer for all reports for this report set here. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of available printers. Printer Description CLS displays the description of the selected printer. Number of Collated Sets (1-99) Enter the number of report sets to be printed. CLS will print each set in sequence, up to 99 collated sets. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue, and the screen below appears. Use the page-up, page-down and arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the list of reports. Select the number of report copies to be printed. Press F1 to change the printer for a report. Press F2 to enable report page numbering. Batch Processing (BP) 3-3

CLS Report Processing Programs Note: Page numbers may not be assigned to reports generated by the Payroll Tax Worksheets (TW) program (e.g., Federal 941 Worksheet, Federal Unemployment (940) Worksheet, etc.). Shortcut: If the default settings for batch processing (e.g., printer, page numbering, etc.) are correct, press Esc to move directly to the Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) prompt. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to save this setup. Press Esc to return to the Ledger I.D. prompt. Batch processing setup has been updated. CLS updates your report selections and returns to the Ledger I.D. prompt. You may select another ledger, or continue to press Esc to return to the BP menu. Note: You will be prompted for departmental reports only if you entered D (Departmental) for the Balance Sheet Type and/or Income Statement Type in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Define Alternate Report Sequence (2) Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger for which you want to define the report sequence. Press F1 to select from a list of available ledgers. File Generation CLS displays the current generation number for this ledger, which you may change. Press F1 to select the generation from a pop-up list. Ledger Name Period Ending CLS displays the ledger name and period-end date of the selected ledger. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue, and the screen below appears. CLS displays the reports which have been selected for printing. You may scroll through the list of reports and change the sequence in which they should be printed. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the report sequence, or press Esc to return to the Ledger I.D. prompt. 3-4 Batch Processing (BP)

CLS Report Processing Programs Batch processing setup has been updated. CLS updates your report selections and returns to the Ledger I.D. prompt. You may select another ledger, or continue to press Esc to return to the BP menu. Restore Default Report Sequence ( ) This routine is available only for the permanent report batches, not for the temporary global batch. Ledger I.D. Enter the I.D. of the ledger for which you want to reset the report sequence. Press F1 to select from a list of available ledgers. File Generation CLS displays the current generation number for this ledger, which you may change. Press F1 to select the generation from a pop-up list. Ledger Name Period Ending CLS displays the ledger name and period-end date of the selected ledger. Reset batch processing report sequence to default values? (Y,N) Press Y to restore the default report sequence. Press Esc to return to the Batch Processing Setup for Report Set Number 1 menu. Complete CLS resets the report sequence and returns to the Batch Processing Setup for Report Set Number 1 menu. Begin Batch Processing Select Report Set 1, then choose 2 from the Batch Processing for Report Set Number 1 menu to print a batch of reports, and the following menu appears: Enter Ledgers to be Batch Processed (1) The cursor appears next to the prompt for ledger number 1. Enter the I.D. for the first ledger you wish to print, and the current generation number appears (you may override it). Press F1 to select from a list of ledgers in the current data path. CLS displays the ledger name, period and period-end date. Batch Processing (BP) 3-5

CLS Report Processing Programs Confirm (Y,N) Press Y or Enter to accept a ledger; press N to skip it. When finished, press Enter without entering a ledger I.D. Print (S)tandard reports, (P)ayroll worksheets or (A)ll [A] CLS allows you to suppress certain reports without affecting your batch processing set-up. Press S to print only standard reports, press P to print only payroll worksheets, or press A to print both. Print (R)eview or (F)inal copies of each selected report [F] Press R to print a review copy of each selected report; if multiple copies have been selected for a particular report, CLS prints only one copy of the report. Press F to print final copies of each selected report. Printer selection: (1) Use assigned batch printer(s), or (2) Choose a different printer: [1] Press Enter to accept the default 1 response if you want to print reports using the assigned printer(s). Press 2 to print all reports using a selected printer. You may choose to print ALL reports using the assigned batch printers, or ONLY those reports assigned to a particular Batch Printer: Enter the Batch Printer Number (1-4), or press ENTER for all reports: If you chose to use the assigned batch printer(s), select the batch printer number to use, or press Enter to print all reports using the assigned batch printer(s). Press F1 to select the printer from a pop-up list. Press Enter at the Ready? (Y,N) prompt to begin printing. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. If you chose to print all reports using a printer other than the assigned batch printer(s), CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Each ledger, set number and report name is displayed as it is processed. After the reports have finished printing, CLS returns to the Main Menu. 3-6 Batch Processing (BP)

CLS Report Processing Programs Select Ledgers from List (2) CLS prompts you with the current generation of each ledger. Press Y to select a ledger, and CLS displays the ledger name, period and period-end date. Press Enter to skip it. Confirm (Y,N) Press Y or Enter to accept a ledger, or press N to reject it. Print (S)tandard reports, (P)ayroll worksheets or (A)ll [A] CLS allows you to suppress certain reports without affecting your batch processing set-up. Press S to print only standard reports, press P to print only payroll worksheets, or press A to print both. Print (R)eview or (F)inal copies of each selected report [F] Press R to print a review copy of each selected report; if multiple copies have been selected for a particular report, CLS prints only one copy of the report. Press F to print final copies of each selected report. Printer selection: (1) Use assigned batch printer(s), or (2) Choose a different printer: [1] Press Enter to accept the default 1 response if you want to print reports using the assigned printer(s). Press 2 to print all reports using a selected printer. You may choose to print ALL reports using the assigned batch printers, or ONLY those reports assigned to a particular Batch Printer: Enter the Batch Printer Number (1-4), or press ENTER for all reports: If you choose to use the assigned batch printer(s), enter the batch printer number to use, or press Enter to print all reports using the assigned batch printer(s). Press Enter at the Ready? (Y,N) prompt to begin printing. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. If you chose to print all reports using a printer other than the assigned batch printer(s), CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Each ledger, set number and report name is displayed as it is processed. After the reports have finished printing, CLS returns to the Main Menu. Batch Processing (BP) 3-7

CLS Report Processing Programs Process the Current Ledger (3) Print (S)tandard reports, (P)ayroll worksheets or (A)ll [A] CLS allows you to suppress certain reports without affecting your batch processing set-up. Press S to print only standard reports, press P to print only payroll worksheets, or press A to print both. Print (R)eview or (F)inal copies of each selected report [F] Press R to print a review copy of each selected report; if multiple copies have been selected for a particular report, CLS prints only one copy of the report. Press F to print final copies of each selected report. Number of Collated Sets (1-99) Select the number of report sets to be printed. The default response is set using the Select Batch Report Copies routine. Printer selection: (1) Use assigned batch printer(s), or (2) Choose a different printer: [1] Press Enter to accept the default 1 response if you want to print reports using the assigned printer(s). Press 2 to print all reports using a selected printer. You may choose to print ALL reports using the assigned batch printers, or ONLY those reports assigned to a particular Batch Printer: Enter the Batch Printer Number (1-4), or press ENTER for all reports: If you choose to use the assigned batch printer(s), enter the batch printer number to use, or press Enter to print all reports using the assigned batch printer(s). Press Enter at the Ready? (Y,N) prompt to begin printing. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. If you chose to print all reports using a printer other than the assigned batch printer(s), CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Each ledger, set number and report name is displayed as it is processed. After the reports have finished printing, CLS returns to the Main Menu. 3-8 Batch Processing (BP)

CLS Report Processing Programs Bank Reconciliation 3.2 The CLS ~ Bank Reconciliation program allows you to reconcile up to thirty bank accounts per ledger. When you import transactions from the ledger to the outstanding check file, all bank accounts are updated at one time. Checks, cash receipts and journal entries are entered into CLS before reconciling bank statements. The Bank Reconciliation program reads the entered transactions to create a list of outstanding and cleared checks. Enter BR from the Report Processing Menu and the following menu appears: Update Outstanding Check File Choose 1 from the BR menu to extract transactions from the ledger to create or update the outstanding check file, and the following screen appears: Delete existing CLEARED transactions (Y,N) Press Y to delete existing checks in the outstanding check file marked cleared or void. If you accept the default N response, cleared and voided checks will be retained, and descriptions, dates and dollar amounts will be updated. Delete existing OPEN transactions (Y,N) Press Y to delete existing checks in the outstanding check file marked open. If you accept the default N response, open transactions will be retained, and descriptions, dates and dollar amounts will be updated. Bank Reconciliation (BR) 3-9

CLS Report Processing Programs Mark new transactions as Cleared or Open (C,O) Press Enter to accept the default C value to mark all new checks cleared as they are added to the outstanding check file. Press O to mark them open. Note: CLS displays your last selection as the default the next time the outstanding check file is updated. Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to import checks for all bank accounts. Press N to return to the Bank Reconciliation Main Menu. Complete The import process captures the CLS cash account balances and account activity. Notes: You can run this selection as often as you wish. If you accept the default responses, the status of existing transactions in the outstanding check file will not be changed during the import process. If you want to begin the reconciliation process again, make sure to request that cleared and open transactions be deleted. If the outstanding check file is somehow damaged, use the Verify File Integrity (VF) program, Menu Selection 3, Force Recovery of Master Files, to recover and re-index it. Reconcile a Bank Statement After importing transactions, the reconciliation process begins here. This menu selection allows you to Enter Bank Activity and Clear Checks, Visually Mark and Review All Items, Clear Checks with Amount Verification, or Select Another Bank Account. Choose 2 from the BR menu and the following screen appears: Note: Choose S to select another bank account. 3-10 Bank Reconciliation (BR)

CLS Report Processing Programs Enter Bank Activity and Clear Checks (1) Bank Statement Date Enter the date shown on your bank statement. Last Check Number If you wish, you may enter the last check number to be included in the bank reconciliation. Checkbook Balance This prompt appears only if you answered Y at the Show Checkbook Balance prompt when setting up the bank account. Enter your client's checkbook balance here. Beginning Bank Balance Enter the beginning bank balance from your bank statement. This field automatically defaults to the ending bank balance from the previous month. Deposits per Statement Enter the total deposits (additions) from your bank statement. Charges per Statement Enter the total charges (subtractions) from your bank statement. Check number or range to mark CLEARED or *OPEN If you wish, you may enter a range of check numbers to be marked Cleared (e.g., 0131-1073) or Open (e.g., *1109-1121). The bottom half of your screen is the bank reconciliation recap, which displays the status of the reconciliation process. The left side of the recap shows the ending bank balance from the bank statement, any outstanding checks or deposits-in-transit, and the adjusted bank balance (actual cash position - derived from the bank statement). The right side of the recap shows the ending ledger balance for the cash account associated with this ledger, memo entries recording ledger adjustments to be made, and the adjusted ledger balance (actual cash position - derived from the ledger). Bank Reconciliation (BR) 3-11

CLS Report Processing Programs Visually Mark and Review All Items (2) Most of your time during reconciliation will be spent marking and reviewing checks. This routine provides access to all outstanding checks and reconciling items for a bank account. 1. Use the arrow keys (, ) to select items to mark. You may also use the Page-Up, Page-Down, Home and End keys. 2. Mark items cleared (C), deleted (D), open (O), payment stopped (S), or voided (V). If you delete an item, it will not disappear until you return to the Bank Reconciliation Main Menu. Press F1 to view these options. Note: You may also press the space bar to mark checks as cleared. 3. Press F3 to turn the bank reconciliation recap off and display a full screen of transactions. Press F3 again to turn the recap back on. Note: Balances on the left side of the bank reconciliation recap automatically adjust when you mark outstanding items as Cleared or cleared items as Outstanding. Clear Checks with Amount Verification (3) Check Number CLS displays the first check number in the series. You may enter a check number, or press the uparrow or down-arrow to scroll through the list of checks. Amount Paid Enter the corresponding check amount from the bank statement or the MICR-encoded amount on the cancelled checks. If you enter an amount which does not match the check amount in the ledger, you will hear a beep and the check will not be marked cleared. You may re-enter the 3-12 Bank Reconciliation (BR)

CLS Report Processing Programs amount or select another check number. A check is marked cleared only when the dollar amount entered matches the ledger amount. Enter Other Reconciling Items Choose 3 from the BR menu and the following menu appears: Note: Choose S to select another bank account. Enter Bank Checks, Deposits, etc. (1) Enter Ledger Adjustments (2) Choose Menu Selection 1 to enter an outstanding check, deposit in transit or another addition or deduction. Choose Menu Selection 2 to enter a check or deposit not recorded or another addition or deduction. Entries made here have no effect on the CLS ledger. Ledger adjustments must be made directly to the ledger using the ET program. To enter transactions: 1. CLS automatically positions the cursor below the last transaction. Enter detail for the new transaction(s), if needed. To edit existing transactions, press F2: 1. In the edit mode, use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the list of transactions. Select the line with the item to correct, and press Enter to select the field. Retype the field, and press Enter. 2. Press Enter at the Date field to accept the transaction. Bank Reconciliation (BR) 3-13

CLS Report Processing Programs 3. With the cursor in the first field, press F1 to view your options if you want to mark transactions as cleared (C), open (O), etc. Remember, your entries and adjustments will affect the bank reconciliation recap. While in the edit mode, you may press F3 to toggle the bank reconciliation recap on and off. View/Print Bank Reconciliation Choose 4 from the BR menu and the following screen appears: Notes: You may also print the Bank Reconciliation through Batch Processing (BP). Choose S to select another bank account. Print Bank Reconciliation (1) Choose Menu Selection 1 to print the Bank Reconciliation, and respond to the following prompts: Bank Reconciliation Format (1,2) Press 1 to print a standard bank reconciliation with bank and ledger activity organized into two columns. Press 2 to print an alternate format report where ledger activity prints below bank activity. Press F1 to select the format from a pop-up list. CLS saves the last Bank Reconciliation format entered as the global default format. Memo to be printed Enter a note to be printed at the end of the Bank Reconciliation, if needed. CLS saves the last memo entered for each bank account as its default. Starting Page Number Enter the number of the first page. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. Current printer: [HP Laser: Portrait ]? (Y,N) Press Enter if your printer selection is correct; if not, press N to change your selection. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of available printers. Press Enter again at the Ready? (Y,N) prompt to begin printing. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the View/Print Bank Reconciliation Menu. 3-14 Bank Reconciliation (BR)

CLS Report Processing Programs View/Print Bank or Ledger Transactions Choose 5 from the BR menu and the following screen appears: Select the number of the report to view or print, and respond to the following prompts: (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the report, or enter the number of copies you want to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Current printer: [HP Laser: Portrait ]? (Y,N) Press Enter if your printer selection is correct; if not, press N to change your selection. Press Enter again at the Ready? (Y,N) prompt to begin printing. When the report is complete, CLS returns to the View/Print Outstanding Checks, Deposits, etc. Menu. Bank Account Maintenance Before the Bank Reconciliation program can be used to reconcile bank statements for a ledger, each bank account for that ledger must be defined. You may create up to thirty bank accounts for each ledger and define the checks or deposits in the ledger to be associated with each bank account. Choose 6 from the BR menu and the following menu appears: Add/Revise a Bank Account (1) Use this screen to add or revise a bank account for a ledger. To add a bank account, select the number of the first blank bank account using the arrow keys (, ), press Enter, and respond to the prompts which appear. For now, select bank account 1, Trust Company Bank. Bank Reconciliation (BR) 3-15

CLS Report Processing Programs The following screen displays the information entered into the JCC sample bank account: Bank Account Name Enter the bank account name. Bank Account Number Enter the account number. Beginning Bank Balance Enter the beginning balance from the bank statement. This step is optional; it can be entered later if the balance is not available now. Show Checkbook Balance (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you want to show the checkbook balance on the bank reconciliation. Press N if you do not. Remove Orphaned Checks (Y,N) Y An orphaned check occurs when the reference number of a current-period check is changed after running BR 1and the previous reference number is no longer valid. Press Enter to accept the default Y response if you want orphaned checks to be removed if BR 1 is run again. Press N if you do not. Default Bank (Y,N) Press Y if you would like this bank account to be the default when BR is used. CLS Cash Account Range Enter the range of CLS G/L Cash Account numbers associated with this bank account. If only one G/L account is to be associated with this bank account, enter the same G/L account number in both the From: and To: fields. 3-16 Bank Reconciliation (BR)

CLS Report Processing Programs Note: A different G/L account range must be defined for each bank account. Source Enter the source code for each set of checks you wish to define for this bank account. Press F1 to list valid source codes for your ledger. An asterisk (*) indicates that transactions entered with any source code are valid for this set. The asterisk is not valid for checks. Do not assign an asterisk to items you do not plan to import. Batch This entry is optional; the field should be left blank except in cases where the number of bank accounts exceeds the number of available source codes. Beg Ref End Ref Enter the range of check and/or reference numbers for this account. You must define at least one set of checks for each bank account. Note: If you assigned an asterisk as a source code, the range of reference numbers must be unique. If the reference numbers fall within another established range, CLS cannot distinguish between the conflicting items. Defining the parameters for extracting Deposits, Interest Earned, Other Additions, Bank Charges and Other Deductions is optional. Generally, these fields will not be used. Correct? (Y,N) Press Y to accept the bank account parameters. CLS processes the information and returns to the Bank Account Maintenance menu. Press N to return to the Bank Account Name prompt. Notes: If a ledger has only a few bank accounts, enter the checks in the ET program using a different source code for each bank account. This is especially true if the check numbers for different bank accounts overlap. If the number of bank accounts exceeds the number of available source codes, you can enter checks for different bank accounts using the same source code, but a different batch number. If you have checks belonging to the same bank account, but entered under different source codes, you can define more than one set of checks. Make sure your ledger cash account numbers are correct and unique for each bank account. Watch out for overlapping reference/check number ranges. If you choose to reconcile Deposits, the credit side of each deposit must be entered in the ET program using a different reference number. Ledger entries for Interest Earned and Bank Charges are normally obtained from the bank statement and, unless an error is made during entry, they won t appear on a bank reconciliation as reconciling items. Close a Bank Account (2) In order to close a bank account, there can be no current activity in the account, and any items in the outstanding check file must be marked as cleared. Bank Reconciliation (BR) 3-17

CLS Report Processing Programs Select the number of the bank account to close and respond to the following prompt: Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to close the selected bank account, or press N to return to the Bank Account Maintenance menu. Complete CLS deletes the bank account and returns to the Bank Account Maintenance menu. Delete Cleared Transactions This routine removes cleared items from the outstanding check file. It should not be needed often since CLS automatically removes cleared and voided items at the beginning of each new accounting period. Choose 7 from the BR menu and the following menu appears: Note: Choose S to select another bank account. Delete All Cleared Transactions (1) Clear Only this Bank Account (2) Choose 1 to delete cleared transactions for all bank accounts. Choose 2 to delete cleared transactions only for the current bank account. Respond to the following prompt: Would you like to continue? (Y,N) Press Y to delete cleared transactions, or press N to return to the BR menu. Complete CLS deletes the cleared transactions and returns to the BR menu. 3-18 Bank Reconciliation (BR)

CLS Report Processing Programs Balance Sheet 3.3 Use this program to print a standard or prior-year comparative Balance Sheet and a standard or comparative Statement of Changes in Equity for the current ledger. Note: You cannot print a Balance Sheet if there are unposted transactions or pending trial balance entries on file or if the ledger is out of balance. The Balance Sheet title and section headings may be changed using the MF program, Menu Selection 1. Enter BS from the Report Processing Menu and the following menu appears: Standard Balance Sheet Prior-Year Comparison Choose 1 or 2 from the BS menu and the following screen appears: The default responses for the Dollar Format, Print Account Numbers and Prepare Subschedule prompts are those entered in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). The default headings, date-line and footnotes are entered in LI, Menu Selections 5 and 6. You may make changes when printing the Balance Sheet (BS) 3-19

CLS Report Processing Programs Balance Sheet without affecting the default values. Shortcut: If the default settings for the Balance Sheet are correct, press Esc to move directly to the Continue? (Y,N) prompt. Period to Print, Previous Period Enter the fiscal period for which the balance sheet should be printed, and the previous period. Dollar Format (0-2) Select the dollar format. Press 0 to use the standard (dollars and cents) format. Press 1 to round amounts to whole dollars. Press 2 to prepare the Balance Sheet in preview mode (without amounts). Press F1 to select the format from a pop-up list. Note: The preview mode may be used on a new ledger to display the Balance Sheet format. Print Account Numbers Press Y to print account numbers along the left side of the Balance Sheet, or press N to suppress them. Prepare Subschedule Press 1 if you would like subsidiary schedules printed with the Balance Sheet. Press 2 to print only the Balance Sheet. Press 3 to print only the subschedule. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of options. Print Run Date/Time Press Y if you would like the date and time printed on the Balance Sheet. Print Page Numbers Press Y if you want page numbers printed on the Balance Sheet. Starting Page Number If you chose to print page numbers, enter the number of the first page. Press Enter to accept the default 1 response as the first page number. Date-Line Press Enter to accept the default date-line format defined in program LI, Menu Selection 5, or enter a new date-line. Footnote Selections: (1) See Attached Review Report Position E (2) See Attached Compilation Report Position * (3) Position * Enter new footnotes (up to 60 characters per line), or press Enter to accept the default values. At the Position prompts, enter new positions, or press Enter to accept the default values. Press F1 to select the position from a pop-up list. 3-20 Balance Sheet (BS)

CLS Report Processing Programs Footnote Positions A Top of page, above ledger name E Bottom of page, centered B Top of page, below ledger name F Bottom of page, left-justified C Top of page, above date line G Top of page, below report title D Top of page, below date line * Do not print this footnote Continue? (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response and continue to the next screen of prompts. Press N to return to the BS menu. Would you like a Departmental Balance Sheet? (Y,N) [N] This prompt appears only if you selected a departmental Balance Sheet in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Press Y to print a departmentalized Balance Sheet; press Enter to accept the default N response and print a company-level report. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments: If you selected a departmental Balance Sheet, enter the department number for which you want to print a Balance Sheet, or press Enter to print Balance Sheets for all departments. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. Note: Six-column comparative Balance Sheets and comparative Balance Sheet subschedules with current and year-to-date activity need to be printed on standard paper using compressed print or wide computer paper. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the BS menu. Balance Sheet Trend Analysis Choose 3 from the BS menu. From the menu that appears, select a 3, 6 or 12 period Trend Analysis. You will respond to the same prompts in each case. The default responses for the Dollar Format, Print Account Numbers and Prepare Subschedule prompts are those entered in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). The default headings, date-line and footnotes are entered in LI, Menu Selections 5 and 6. You may make changes when printing the trend analysis without affecting the default values. Balance Sheet (BS) 3-21

CLS Report Processing Programs Shortcut: If the default settings for the trend analysis are correct, press Esc to move directly to the Continue? (Y,N) prompt. First Period to Print, Last Period to Print Select the first and last period to be included on the Balance Sheet Trend Analysis. Dollar Format (0-5) Select the dollar format for the 3, 6 or 12 period reports. Press F1 to select the format from a popup list. Trend Analysis Dollar Format 0 Standard format (dollars and cents) 3 Round dollars and use short date 1 Round amounts to whole dollars 4 Limit and round dollars and abbreviate month 2 Use short date format 5 Preview mode Notes: If you select option 4, you may laser-print a 12-period report on standard (8½ x 11 ) paper in the landscape mode. The preview mode may be used on a new ledger to display the trend analysis format. Print Account Numbers Press Y to print account numbers along the left side of the trend analysis, or press N to suppress them. Prepare Subschedule Press 1 if you would like subsidiary schedules printed with the trend analysis. Press 2 to print only the trend analysis. Press 3 to print only the subschedule. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of options. Print Run Date/Time Press Y if you would like the date and time printed on the trend analysis. Print Page Numbers Press Y if you want page numbers printed on the trend analysis. Starting Page Number If you chose to print page numbers, enter the number of the first page. Press Enter to accept the default 1 response as the first page number. Date-Line Press Enter to accept the default date-line format defined in program LI, Menu Selection 5, or enter a new date-line. Footnote Selections: (1) See Attached Review Report Position E (2) See Attached Compilation Report Position * (3) Position * Enter new footnotes (up to 60 characters per line), or press Enter to accept the default values. At 3-22 Balance Sheet (BS)

CLS Report Processing Programs the Position prompts, enter new positions, or press Enter to accept the default values. Press F1 to select the position from a pop-up list. Footnote Positions A Top of page, above ledger name E Bottom of page, centered B Top of page, below ledger name F Bottom of page, left-justified C Top of page, above date line G Top of page, below report title D Top of page, below date line * Do not print this footnote Continue? (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response and continue to the next screen of prompts. Press N to return to the BS menu. Would you like a Departmental Trend Analysis? (Y,N) [N] This prompt appears only if you selected a departmental trend analysis in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Press Y to print a departmentalized trend analysis; press Enter to accept the default N response and print a company-level report. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments: If you selected a departmental trend analysis, enter the department number for which you want to print a trend analysis, or press Enter to print a trend analysis for all departments. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the BS menu. Statement of Changes in Equity The Statement of Changes in Equity shows each shareholder's or partner's beginning capital, contributions, withdrawals, current year earnings, and ending capital. Columns for dividends and adjustments will also appear if these account ranges have been defined in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (3). Choose 4 from the BS menu to print a standard or comparative Statement of Changes in Equity. The default response for the Dollar Format prompt is entered in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). The Balance Sheet (BS) 3-23

CLS Report Processing Programs default headings, date-line and footnotes are those entered in LI, Menu Selections 5 and 6. You may make changes when printing the report without affecting the default values. Period to Print Select the ending period for the report. Dollar Format (0-2) Select the dollar format. Press 0 to use the standard (dollars and cents) format. Press 1 to round amounts to whole dollars. Press 2 to prepare the Statement of Changes in Equity in preview mode (without amounts). Press F1 to select the format from a pop-up list. Note: The preview mode may be used on a new ledger to display the Statement of Changes in Equity format. Standard or Comparative (S,C) Press S to print a standard Statement of Changes in Equity, or press C to print a comparative report. Press F1 to select the report format from a pop-up list. Print Run Date/Time Press Y if you would like the date and time printed on the Balance Sheet. Print Page Numbers Press Y if you want page numbers printed on this report. Starting Page Number If you chose to print page numbers, enter the number of the first page. Press Enter to accept the default 1 response as the first page number. Date-Line Press Enter to accept the default date-line format defined in program LI, Menu Selection 5, or enter a new date-line. Footnote Selections: (1) See Attached Review Report Position E (2) See Attached Compilation Report Position * (3) Position * Enter new footnotes (up to 60 characters per line), or press Enter to accept the default values. At the Position prompts, enter new positions, or press Enter to accept the default values. Press F1 to select the position from a pop-up list. Footnote Positions A Top of page, above ledger name E Bottom of page, centered B Top of page, below ledger name F Bottom of page, left-justified C Top of page, above date line G Top of page, below report title D Top of page, below date line * Do not print this footnote Continue? (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response and continue to the next screen of prompts. Press N to return to the BS menu. 3-24 Balance Sheet (BS)

CLS Report Processing Programs (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to send the report to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the BS menu. Balance Sheet (BS) 3-25

CLS Report Processing Programs 3.4 Depreciation and Amortization Schedules This program prepares depreciation schedules using straight-line, declining-balance, Rule-of-78, ACRS, and MACRS depreciation methods. You may switch to straight-line depreciation if you are using the declining-balance or Rule-of-78 method. You may also prepare loan amortization schedules using the declining-balance or Rule-of-78 method, showing due-dates and intermediate subtotals if requested. Enter DA from the Report Processing Menu and the following menu appears: Depreciation Schedule Choose 1 from the DA menu to prepare a depreciation schedule, and the following screen appears: Client Name Enter the name of the client, up to 40 characters. Asset Description Enter a description of the asset, up to 40 characters. 3-26 Depreciation and Amortization Schedules (DA)

CLS Report Processing Programs Depreciation Method (A-E) Select the depreciation method you would like to use. Press F1 to select the depreciation method from a pop-up list. Depreciation Method A Straight Line D ACRS B Declining Balance E MACRS C Rule of 78 Once you select a depreciation method, CLS asks for specific information so it can print the depreciation schedule. Depending on your selection, you will respond to the following prompts: Property Type For the ACRS and MACRS methods, select from a list of property types. Press F1 to list the property types. From the property type listing, enter the number of the table (property type) you would like to use. CLS displays the property type description. Depreciable Basis Enter the asset value before depreciation, up to $99,999,999.99. Salvage Value For the straight line, declining balance and Rule of 78 methods, enter the salvage value of the asset, up to $99,999,999.99. Year of Acquisition For the straight line, declining balance, Rule of 78 and MACRS methods, enter the year the asset was acquired. Life in Years Enter the number of years (1-999) over which this asset will be depreciated. No. of Periods per Year For the straight line, declining balance and Rule of 78 methods, enter the number of periods per year for which depreciation is to be calculated. Period Placed in Service For the straight line, declining balance and Rule of 78 methods, enter the number of the period in which the asset was placed in service. Your response here depends on your entry at the previous prompt. For example, if you entered 4 for No. of Periods per Year, you cannot enter 5 for the Period Placed in Service. Month Placed in Service For the ACRS and MACRS methods, enter the month in which this asset was placed in service. Declining Balance Rate For the declining balance method, enter the declining balance percentage rate (100-200%). Switch to Straight Line (Y,N) For the declining balance and Rule of 78 methods, press Y to switch to straight-line depreciation when the remaining asset value could be more quickly depreciated using this method. Press N to suppress the switch to straight-line depreciation. Depreciation and Amortization Schedules (DA) 3-27

CLS Report Processing Programs Continue? (Y,N) Y If all of the information is correct, press Enter to accept the default Y response and continue to the next screen of prompts. Press N to return to the Client Name prompt. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the depreciation schedule, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. When the depreciation schedule is complete, CLS returns to the Client Name prompt. You may print another schedule, or press Esc to return to the DA menu. Amortization Schedule Choose 2 from the DA menu to prepare amortization schedules, and the following screen appears: Client Name Enter the name of the client, up to 40 characters. Loan Description Enter the description of the loan, up to 40 characters. Schedule Type (E,I) Select the title for the interest column on the schedule. Press E to select Interest Expense, or press I to select Interest Income. Press F1 to select the schedule type from a pop-up list. Value to Calculate (I,N,P,*) Select the value to be calculated by CLS; choose the asterisk (*) if you want to be able to access all fields. Press F1 to select the value to calculate from a pop-up list. Value to Calculate I Annual Interest Rate P Regular Payment Amount N Number of Payments * Balloon/Override Amortization Method (A,B) Select the amortization method. Press A to select declining balance, or press B to select rule of 78. Press F1 to select the amortization method from a pop-up list.once you have selected an amortization method, CLS asks for specific information so it can print an amortization schedule. Unless you entered an asterisk (*) at the Value to Calculate prompt, you will not have access to the field which is to be calculated. Depending on your selection, you will respond to the following prompts: 3-28 Depreciation and Amortization Schedules (DA)

CLS Report Processing Programs Principal Enter the principal amount of the loan, up to $99,999,999.99. No. of Payments per Year Enter the number of payments to be made per year, up to 365. Total Number of Payments Enter the total number of payments to be made over the lifetime of the loan, up to 999. Annual Interest Rate (0-999%) Enter the annual interest rate, up to 999.999999%. Regular Payment Amount Enter the regular payment amount, up to $99,999,999.99. Show Sub-Totals? Press Y to show sub-totals on the schedule. First Sub-Total after Payment No. If you answered Y to the Show Sub-Totals? prompt, enter the payment number after which the first sub-total should print. Sub-Total Interval (No. of Payments) If you answered Y to the Show Sub-Totals? prompt, enter the number of payments in each interval between sub-totals, up to 999. This interval takes effect after the first sub-total prints. Show Due-Dates? Press Y to show payment due-dates on the amortization schedule. Due Date of First Payment If you requested due-dates, enter the date the first payment is due in mmddyy format. PRINCIPAL TOTAL INTEREST TOTAL AMOUNT DUE CLS displays the principal, total of interest payments, and total amount due. Continue? (Y,N) Y If all of the information is correct, press Enter to accept the default Y response and continue to the next screen of prompts. Press N to return to the Client Name prompt. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the amortization schedule, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. When the amortization schedule is complete, CLS returns to the Client Name prompt. You may print another schedule, or press Esc to return to the DA menu. Depreciation and Amortization Schedules (DA) 3-29

CLS Report Processing Programs 3.5 Ledgers on File Use the Ledgers on File (LF) program to query or list ledgers in the current data path. You may display or print a list of ledgers on file; the report requires compressed print or wide paper. You may also use this program to print mailing labels and file folder or diskette labels. Note: You can only access ledgers in the current data path. Use the Ledger Start-up (LS) program to select another data path. Enter LF from the Report Processing Menu and the following menu appears: Query Ledgers on File Choose 1 from the LF menu to list all ledgers in the current data path in alphanumeric order by ledger I.D. Enter Ledger I.D. or press ENTER for all ledgers: You may include all ledgers in the query or just a single ledger. Include all Generations? [N] You may include all ledger generations in the query, or just the current generation for each ledger. 3-30 Ledgers on File (LF)

CLS Report Processing Programs Press ENTER when finished: CLS prompts you to press Enter at the last screen of ledgers to return to the LF menu. List Ledgers on File Select 2 from the LF menu to display or print a list of ledgers, and respond to the following prompts: Enter Ledger I.D. or press ENTER for all ledgers: You may list all ledgers on file or just a single ledger. Include all Generations? [N] You may include all ledger generations in the list, or just the current generation for each ledger. Show Ledger Address? [N] Press Y to print ledger addresses on the report. (D)isplay, or number of copies to print (D,1-9) Press D to display the list of ledgers, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. When the report is complete, CLS returns to the LF menu. Laser-Printed Labels Choose 3 from the LF menu to laser-print mailing, diskette and file folder labels. CLS supports the following label formats: Label Type Label Size Avery Label No. Address 1 x 2 5 8 5160, 5260, 5290, 6460, 8160, 8660, 8920, 8930 Address 1 x 2 5 6 5660, 5930 Address 1 x 4 5161, 5261 Address 1 1 3 x 4 5162, 5262, 5922, 8162, 8462, 8662, 8922, 8932 Address 1 1 3 x 4¼ 5662, 5932 File Folder 1 3 Cut 5266, 5366, 5066, 5766, 5866, 5966, 6466, 8166, 8366 Diskette 3½ 5196, 8196 Diskette 3½ 6490 Print Laser-Printed Labels (1) Label Format (1-8) Select the label format. Press F1 to select the format from a pop-up list. Ledgers on File (LF) 3-31

CLS Report Processing Programs Number of labels to print for each ledger (1-99) Enter the number of labels to print for each ledger. Label number to start on 1, or number of labels remaining on page 30. Enter the label number of the first label on the page. For incomplete label pages, you may enter the number of the first label on the page or the number of labels remaining on the page. Note: CLS saves the first label on the page and the number of labels remaining on the page based on the last set of labels printed. Enter Ledger I.D. or press ENTER for all ledgers Enter the ledger I.D. for which you would like labels printed, or press Enter to print labels for all ledgers in the current data path. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of ledgers in the current data path. Press F2 to print labels for up to 10 ledgers; press F1 to select the ledgers from a pop-up list. Include Contact Name or Ledger I.D.? (0-2) Press 0 to suppress the contact name and ledger I.D. Press 1 to print the contact name, or press 2 to print the ledger I.D. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to print the labels. CLS will prompt you to select a printer and ask if you would like to print any more labels. Press Y to select additional ledgers for which to print labels, or press N to print only the first batch of labels. Press N to return to the Label Format (1-8) prompt. CLS prints the selected labels and returns to the LF menu. Align Laser-Printed Labels (2) Label Format (1-8) Select the label format. Press F1 to select the laser format from a pop-up list. Number of labels to print (1-99) Enter the number of labels to print for each ledger. Label number to start on 1, or number of labels remaining on page 30. Enter the label number of the first label on the page. For incomplete label pages, you may enter the number of labels remaining on the page. Note: CLS updates the first label on the page and the number of labels remaining on the page based on the last set of labels printed. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to print the alignment; CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Press N to return to the Label Format (1-8) prompt. 3-32 Ledgers on File (LF)

CLS Report Processing Programs Vertical Offset (-0.5000 to +0.5000) You may adjust the vertical position of lines on the page. This adjustment moves all lines up (-) or down (+). Horizontal Offset (-0.5000 to +0.5000) You may adjust the horizontal position of fields on the page. This adjustment moves all fields left (-) or right (+). Vertical Stretch (-0.5000 to +0.5000) You may change the vertical spacing between lines on the page. This adjustment vertically stretches (+) or contracts (-) spacing. Horizontal Stretch (-0.5000 to +0.5000) You may change the spacing between fields on the page. This adjustment horizontally stretches (+) or contracts (-) spacing. After printing the label alignment, CLS returns to the Vertical Offset prompt. You enter additional alignment adjustments, or continue to press Esc to return to the LF menu. Ledgers on File (LF) 3-33

CLS Report Processing Programs 3.6 Profit & Loss Statement Use this routine to print a standard Profit & Loss Statement, comparative and period-specific P&Ls, or a special format Profit & Loss Statement. Note: You cannot print a Profit and Loss Statement if there are unposted transactions or pending trial balance entries on file or if the ledger is out of balance. The Profit and Loss Statement title and section headings may be changed using program MF, Menu Selection 1. Enter PL from the Report Processing menu and the following menu appears: Note: You may show percentages to one or two decimal places; make this choice in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Standard, Prior-Year, Budget and YTD P&Ls Choose 1-5 from the PL menu. You will respond to the same prompts in each case. The default responses for the Dollar Format, Print Account Numbers, Statement of Income & RE, and Prepare Subschedule prompts are those entered in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). The headings, date-line and footnotes are those entered in LI, Menu Selections 5 and 6. You may make changes when printing the P&L without affecting the default values. Shortcut: If the default settings for the P&L Statement are correct, press Esc to move directly to the Continue? (Y,N) prompt. 3-34 Profit & Loss Statement (PL)

CLS Report Processing Programs Period to Print, Previous Period Enter the fiscal period for which the profit & loss statement should be printed, and the previous period. Dollar Format (0-2) Select the dollar format. Press 0 to use the standard (dollars and cents) format. Press 1 to round amounts to whole dollars. Press 2 to prepare the P&L Statement in preview mode (without amounts). Press F1 to select the format from a pop-up list. Note: The preview mode may be used on a new ledger to display the Profit & Loss Statement format. Print Account Numbers Press Y to print account numbers along the left side of the P&L, or press N to suppress them. Statement of Income & RE Press Y if you also want the Statement of Income and Retained Earnings printed; press N if you do not. Depending on your response in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), this report will print at the end of the P&L or on a separate page. Prepare Subschedule Press 1 if you would like subsidiary schedules (with account detail for all group accounts, or for all jobs if you selected a Job Cost P&L) printed with the P&L. Press 2 to print only the P&L. Press 3 to print only the subschedule. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of options. Note: The Statement of Income & Retained Earnings will not be printed if you chose to print only the subschedule. Print Run Date/Time Press Y if you would like the date and time printed on the Profit & Loss Statement. Print Page Numbers Press Y if you want page numbers printed on the P&L. Starting Page Number If you chose to print page numbers, enter the number of the first page. Press Enter to accept the default 1 response as the first page number. Date-Line Press Enter to accept the default date-line format set in program LI, Menu Selection 5, or enter a new date-line. Profit & Loss Statement (PL) 3-35

CLS Report Processing Programs Footnote Selections: (1) See Attached Review Report Position E (2) See Attached Compilation Report Position * (3) Position * Enter new footnotes (up to 60 characters per line), or press Enter to accept the default values. At the Position prompts, enter new positions, or press Enter to accept the default values. Press F1 to select the position from a pop-up list. Footnote Positions A Top of page, above ledger name E Bottom of page, centered B Top of page, below ledger name F Bottom of page, left-justified C Top of page, above date line G Top of page, below report title D Top of page, below date line * Do not print this footnote Continue? (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response and continue to the next screen of prompts. Press N to return to the PL menu. Would you like a Departmental P&L? (Y,N) [N] This prompt appears only if you selected a departmental P&L in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Press Y to print a departmental P&L; press Enter to accept the default N response and print a company-level P&L. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments: If you selected a departmental P&L above, enter the department number for which you want to print a P&L, or press Enter to print P&Ls for all departments. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. Page Width Report Width The page width determines whether CLS will use normal or compressed print. The report width is the actual width of the print on paper. Standard 8½ x 11 paper allows you to print reports up to 80 columns wide in normal print or up to 132 columns wide in compressed print. Laser printers can print reports up to 174 columns wide in landscape mode. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the PL menu. 3-36 Profit & Loss Statement (PL)

CLS Report Processing Programs Trend Analysis (actual only) Budget Trend Analysis (budget only) Forecast Trend Analysis (actual and budget) Choose 6, 7 or 8 from the PL menu. From the menu which appears, select a 3, 6 or 12 period P&L. You will respond to the same prompts in each case. The default responses for the Dollar Format, Print Account Numbers, Statement of Income & RE, Total Column Type, and Prepare Subschedule prompts are those entered in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). The default headings, date-line and footnotes are those entered in LI, Menu Selections 5 and 6. You may make changes when printing the P&L without affecting the default values. Shortcut: If the default settings for the P&L Statement are correct, press Esc to move directly to the Continue? (Y,N) prompt. First Period to Print, Last Period to Print Select the first and last period to be included on the P&L. Dollar Format (0-5) Select the dollar format for the 3, 6 or 12 period reports. Press F1 to select the format from a popup list. Trend Analysis Dollar Format 0 Standard format (dollars and cents) 3 Round dollars and use short date 1 Round amounts to whole dollars 4 Limit and round dollars and abbreviate month 2 Use short date format 5 Preview mode Notes: If you select option 4, you may laser-print a 12-period report on standard (8½ x 11 ) paper in the landscape mode. The preview mode may be used on a new ledger to display the report format. Print Account Numbers Press Y to print account numbers along the left side of the P&L, or press N to suppress them. Profit & Loss Statement (PL) 3-37

CLS Report Processing Programs Statement of Income & RE Press Y to print the Statement of Income and Retained Earnings. Depending on your response in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), this report will print at the end of the P&L or on a separate page. Note: The Statement of Income & Retained Earnings will not be printed if you chose to print only the subschedule. Total Column Type (1-2) Select the Total column type. Press 1 to print year-to-date totals in the Total column, or press 2 to print the total of the balances in the columns shown. Press F1 to select the total column type from a pop-up list. Prepare Subschedule Press 1 if you would like subsidiary schedules (with account detail for all group accounts, or for all jobs if you selected a Job Cost P&L) printed with the P&L. Press 2 to print only the P&L. Press 3 to print only the subschedule. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of options. Print Run Date/Time Press Y if you would like the date and time printed on the subschedule. Print Page Numbers Press Y if you want page numbers printed on the P&L. Starting Page Number If you chose to print page numbers, enter the number of the first page. Press Enter to accept the default 1 response as the first page number. Date-Line Press Enter to accept the default date-line format set in program LI, Menu Selection 5, or enter a new date-line. Footnote Selections: (1) See Attached Review Report Position E (2) See Attached Compilation Report Position * (3) Position * Enter new footnotes (up to 60 characters per line), or press Enter to accept the default values. At the Position prompts, enter new positions, or press Enter to accept the default values. Press F1 to select the position from a pop-up list. Footnote Positions A Top of page, above ledger name E Bottom of page, centered B Top of page, below ledger name F Bottom of page, left-justified C Top of page, above date line G Top of page, below report title D Top of page, below date line * Do not print this footnote Continue? (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response and continue to the next screen of prompts. Press N to return to the PL menu. 3-38 Profit & Loss Statement (PL)

CLS Report Processing Programs Would you like a Departmental P&L? (Y,N) [N] This prompt appears only if you selected a departmental P&L in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Press Y to print a departmental P&L; press Enter to accept the default N response and print a company-level P&L. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments: If you selected a departmental P&L, enter the department number for which you want to print a P&L, or press Enter to print P&Ls for all departments. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. Page Width Report Width The page width determines whether CLS will use normal or compressed print. The report width is the actual width of the print on paper. Standard 8½ x 11 paper allows you to print reports up to 80 columns wide in normal print or up to 132 columns wide in compressed print. Laser printers can print reports up to 174 columns wide in landscape mode. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the PL menu. Special Format P&L Choose 9 from the PL menu to define a Special Format Income Statement or use a format entered for the current ledger in LI, Menu Selection 3 (7). Note: You may print a special format income statement up to 230 characters wide; however, you will need to use the landscape mode or wide computer paper and a printer capable of compressed-print for reports wider than 132 columns. CLS will warn you if your report width will exceed the 8½ x 11 format. Special Format (1-4) Select the number of the report to define, or press F1 to select from a pop-up list of existing formats. Note: The default responses to the following prompts will be those set in LI, Menu Selection 3 (3). You may make changes when printing the P&L without affecting the default values. Profit & Loss Statement (PL) 3-39

CLS Report Processing Programs Format Enter the report format, or press F1 to select from a pop-up list of format codes. Following is a list of codes which allows you to access budget and history amounts by period and other special format codes: Current Period Balances: @b (Budget) e.g., This Year: @b1, @b2...@b12 Relative: @b0, @b-1, @b-2, etc. @l (Last Year) e.g., @l1, @l2...@l12, etc. @p (By Period) e.g., This Year: @p1, @p2...@p12 Relative: @p0, @p-1, @p-2, etc. Year-to-Date Balances: @B (Budget) e.g., This Year: @B1, @B2...@B12 Relative: @B0, @B-1, @B-2, etc. @L (Last Year) e.g., @L1, @L2...@L12, etc. @P (By Period) e.g., This Year: @P1, @P2...@P12 Relative: @P0, @P-1, @P-2, etc. Notes: You may use numbers between one and nine as codes to insert spaces between columns on a special format P&L. For example, the format 99AB will produce a year-to-date-only P&L with 18 additional spaces between the account description and the year-to-date columns. A colon (:) may be used to sum current period balances for a range of periods (e.g., @p1:3 sums periods 1-3, @p-2:0 sums the last three periods). Special Format P&L Column Codes Current Period Code Column Description Year-to-Date Code a THIS YEAR Current period A b THIS YEAR Current percent B c THIS YEAR Current ratio C d LAST YEAR Current period D e LAST YEAR Current variance E f LAST YEAR Current variance % F g LAST YEAR Current percent G h LAST YEAR Current ratio H i BUDGET Current period I j BUDGET Current variance J k BUDGET Current variance % K l BUDGET Current percent L m BUDGET Current ratio M n TOTAL BUDGET Current period N o TOTAL BUDGET Current variance O p TOTAL BUDGET Current variance % P q TOTAL BUDGET Current percent Q r TOTAL BUDGET Current ratio R 3-40 Profit & Loss Statement (PL)

CLS Report Processing Programs Ratio Description Current Ratio Divisor YTD Ratio Divisor If the Special Format Income Statement for this ledger will contain ratio columns, you may enter a ratio description (up to 25 characters) and current and year-to-date ratio divisors (0-999,999,999.99). For example, you might enter a ratio divisor of 500,868, the square footage of office space, to get a dollar breakdown per square foot. If the ratio divisor is zero, the ratio description will not be printed on the financial statements. If you prepare a Special Format P&L with ratio columns and you use a zero ratio divisor, the ratio columns will default to percent of sales. Note: Separate P&L Ratio Divisors/Descriptions are available for Departmental Income Statements (see program DF). Ratio Decimals (1,2) Press 1 if you want ratios to be shown to one decimal place. Press 2 if you want two decimal places. Continue? (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response and continue to the next screen of prompts. Press N to return to the PL menu. The next screen of prompts will be the same as that for a standard Profit & Loss Statement. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. Page Width Report Width The page width determines whether CLS will use normal or compressed print. The report width is the actual width of the print on paper. Standard 8½ x 11 paper allows you to print reports up to 80 columns wide in normal print or up to 132 columns wide in compressed print. Laser printers can print reports up to 174 columns wide in landscape mode. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the PL menu. Profit & Loss Statement (PL) 3-41

CLS Report Processing Programs 3.7 Ratio Analysis Use the Ratio Analysis (RA) program to create company-level financial ratio reports. Once reports have been defined, you may use program LI, Menu Selection 2 (6), to copy them to other ledgers. Notes: A comprehensive set of financial ratios is included in the JCC sample data. If you copy the ratio report definitions from the sample data or another ledger, review your key word definitions and change accounts or account ranges where necessary. Creating Financial Ratios Before you begin, decide which types of ratios you would like to create and the ratio definitions to use. Use program ML to print a chart of accounts for the ledger you are using; you will enter accounts and account ranges when defining key words. Use Menu Selections 1 through 5 to create financial ratios. Enter RA from the Report Processing menu and the following screen appears: Define Report Formats Choose 1 from the RA menu to define the ratio report formats. The following menu appears: 3-42 Ratio Analysis (RA)

CLS Report Processing Programs Add/Revise a Report Format (1) Report (1-9) Select the number of the ratio report to add or revise. Press F1 to select the report from a pop-up list. Report Title Enter a report title. Date-Line Enter a date-line for the ratio report. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of key words. Options Select any report options. Press C to condense the ratio format column; CLS will eliminate the calculation portion of the ratio. You may override this option when printing the report. Press R to round amounts to whole dollars; press X to flag a report inactive. Press F1 to select the report options from a pop-up list. Column Headings: Formula This Year Last Year Comparative Enter headings for the formula, current year, last year and comparative columns. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of keywords. Note: Columns without defined headings will not appear on the report. Enter None for a column you wish to print, but for which you do not want a column heading. Report Notes Enter notes to appear at the bottom of the ratio report. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the ratio format, or press Esc to return to the Report (1-9) prompt. Report format 1 has been updated. Report format 2 has been added. CLS adds or updates the report format and returns to the Report (1-9) prompt. You may define another report, or press Esc to return to the Define Report Formats menu. Ratio Analysis (RA) 3-43

CLS Report Processing Programs Delete a Report Format (2) Report (1-9) Select the number of the ratio report to delete. Press F1 to select the report from a pop-up list. CLS displays information about the selected ratio report. Would you like to delete this report format? (Y,N) Press Y to delete the report format. Press N to return to the Report (1-9) prompt. Report format 2 has been deleted. CLS deletes the report format and returns to the Report (1-9) prompt. You may delete another report format, or press Esc to return to the Define Report Formats menu. List Report Formats on File (3) (D)isplay, number of copies to print (D, 1-9) Press D to display the report, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. After printing the report, CLS returns to the Define Report Formats menu. Define Ratio Categories Choose 2 from the RA menu to define the ratio categories. The following menu appears: Add/Revise a Ratio Category (1) Report (1-9) Select the report for which to define ratio categories. Press F1 to select the report from a pop-up list. 3-44 Ratio Analysis (RA)

CLS Report Processing Programs Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue to the next screen of prompts. Category (1-99) Select the category to add or revise. Press F1 to select the category from a pop-up list. Description Enter a category description. Options Enter category options. Option P forces a category to print on a new page; option X flags a category inactive. Enter multiple options without spaces. Press the space bar to remove all options from a category. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of category options. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the category, or press Esc to return to the Category (1-99) prompt. Category 5 has been updated. Category 2 has been added. CLS adds or updates the selected category and returns to the Category (1-99) prompt. You may add or update another category, or press Esc to return to the Define Ratio Categories menu. Delete a Ratio Category (2) Report (1-9) Select the report for which to delete a ratio category. Press F1 to select the report from a pop-up list. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue to the next screen of prompts. Category (1-99) Select the number of the category to delete. Press F1 to select the category from a pop-up list. CLS displays information about the selected category. Would you like to delete this category? (Y,N) Press Y to delete the category. Press N to return to the Category (1-99) prompt. Ratio Analysis (RA) 3-45

CLS Report Processing Programs Ratio category 10 has been deleted. CLS deletes the selected category and returns to the Category (1-99) prompt. You may delete another category, or press Esc to return to the Define Ratio Categories menu. List Ratio Categories on File (3) (D)isplay, number of copies to print (D, 1-9) Press D to display the report, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. After printing the report, CLS returns to the Define Ratio Categories menu. Define Key Words/Accounts Choose 3 from the RA menu to define key words and accounts. The following menu appears: Add/Revise a Key Word (1) Key Word Enter the key word to add or revise. Press F1 to select the key word from a pop-up list. Displayed Key Word Enter the key word as it will be used when defining ratio formulas. Key Word Type Enter a type for the key word. Press F1 to select the key word type from a pop-up list. Key Word Type 1 Ending Balance/YTD 5 YTD Days (360/yr) 2 Beginning of Year Balance 6 YTD Days (Actual) 3 Year-to-Date Change 7 Current Fiscal Period 4 YTD Average Balance 8 Number of Fiscal Periods 3-46 Ratio Analysis (RA)

CLS Report Processing Programs Key Word Sign Enter a sign for the key word. Press F1 to select the key word sign from a pop-up list. Key Word Sign 1 Normal Sign 3 Absolute Value 2 Reversed Sign 4 Negative Absolute Value Options Enter key word options. Option X flags a key word inactive. Press the space bar to remove all options from a key word. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of key word options. Accounts to be included Enter the accounts to be included for this key word. Enter multiple accounts separated by commas (e.g., 101, 103, 134). Use a colon to separate account ranges (e.g., 100:152). Press F1 to display the chart of accounts for this ledgers; accounts cannot be selected from the pop-up list. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the key word, or press Esc to return to the Key Word prompt. Key word Accts Pay has been updated. Key word Equity has been added. CLS adds or updates the key word and returns to the Key Word prompt. Delete a Key Word (2) Key Word Enter the key word to be deleted. Press F1 to select the key word from a pop-up list. CLS displays information about the selected key word. Would you like to delete this key word? (Y,N) Press Y to delete the selected key word. Press N to return to the Key Word prompt. Key word Oper Exp has been deleted. CLS deletes the key word and returns to the Key Word prompt. You may delete another key word, or press Esc to return to the Define Key Words/Accounts menu. List Key Words on File (3) (D)isplay, number of copies to print (D, 1-9) Press D to display the report, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. Ratio Analysis (RA) 3-47

CLS Report Processing Programs After printing the report, CLS returns to the Define Key Words/Accounts menu. Define Financial Ratios Choose 4 from the RA menu to define financial ratios. The following menu appears: Add/Revise a Ratio (1) Report (1-9) Select the report for which to define ratios. Press F1 to select the report from a pop-up list. Category (1-99) Select the category for which to define ratios. Press F1 to select the category from a pop-up list. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to accept the report and category and continue to the next screen. Ratio (1-99) Enter the ratio to add or revise. Press F1 to select the ratio from a pop-up list. Note: Skip numbers when you create ratios to allow space in case you need to insert other ratios. Ratio Title Enter a title for the ratio. The title may consist of three lines; CLS will automatically wrap the text as needed. Use the caret (^) or a vertical line ( ) to insert line breaks manually. Ratio Type Enter the ratio type. Press F1 to select the ratio type from a pop-up list. Ratio Types $ Show ratio as a dollar amount D Show ratio as a decimal P Show ratio as a percent 3-48 Ratio Analysis (RA)

CLS Report Processing Programs Ratio Desc Enter a description for the ratio. CLS defaults to the percent sign for a percent-type ratio, but you may enter a new ratio description (e.g., days). Options Select any ratio options. Press D to suppress the dollar sign in the denominator; press N to suppress the dollar sign in the numerator. Option X flags a ratio inactive. Press F1 to select the ratio options from a pop-up list. Ratio Decimals Numerator Decimals Denominator Decimals Enter the number of decimal places to use in the ratio, numerator and denominator (up to 6 decimal places). Actual Formula using Key Words Enter the ratio formula using key words. Press F1 to display a list of key words; you may not select key words from the list. Formulas may be defined to use key words, numbers, and add, subtract, multiply and divide (+, -, *, /) operators. You may also create integer (\) and exponential (^) formulas. Parentheses may be used as needed. Verbal Description Enter the formula text as it should appear on the ratio analysis report. If you do not enter a verbal description, the actual formula will appear on the report. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A to accept the ratio, or press Esc to return to the Ratio (1-99) prompt. Ratio 5 has been updated. Ratio 7 has been added. CLS adds or updates the ratio and returns to the Ratio (1-99) prompt. You may add or revise another ratio, or press Esc to return to the Report (1-9) prompt. Delete a Ratio (2) Report (1-9) Select the report with the ratio to be deleted. Press F1 to select the report from a pop-up list. Category (1-99) Select the category with the ratio to be deleted. Press F1 to select the category from a pop-up list. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to accept the report and category and continue to the next screen, or press N to return to the Report (1-9) prompt. Ratio (1-99) Enter the number of the ratio to delete. Press F1 to select the ratio from a pop-up list. CLS displays information about the selected report. Would you like to delete this ratio? (Y,N) Press Y to delete the selected ratio. Press N to return to the Ratio (1-99) prompt. Ratio Analysis (RA) 3-49

CLS Report Processing Programs Ratio 25 has been deleted. CLS deletes the selected ratio and returns to the Ratio (1-99). You may delete another ratio for this category, or continue to press Esc to return to the Define Financial Ratios menu. List Ratios on File (3) (D)isplay, number of copies to print (D, 1-9) Press D to display the report, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. After printing the report, CLS returns to the Define Financial Ratios menu. Enter Comparative Values Comparative ratios may be obtained from companies such as Robert Morris Associates and Dun & Bradstreet. Choose 5 from the RA menu to enter comparative data. Report (1-9) Select the report for which you would like to enter comparative data. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue to the comparative values entry screen. 3-50 Ratio Analysis (RA)

CLS Report Processing Programs CLS displays the ratio categories, ratios and ratio titles for the selected report. Use the up and down-arrow (, ) keys to scroll through the ratios and enter comparative values as needed. When you are finished, press Esc to move to the Accept or Clear? (A,C) prompt. Accept or Clear? (A,C) Press A to accept the comparative values, or press C to clear them. CLS updates the comparative values and returns to the Report (1-9) prompt. You may add comparative values to another report, or press Esc to return to the RA menu. List Ratio Information on File Choose 6 from the RA menu to list ratio information on file. Respond to the following prompt: (D)isplay, number of copies to print (D, 1-9) Press D to display the report, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer. After printing the report, CLS returns to the RA menu. Print Ratio Analysis Choose 7 from the RA menu to print a ratio analysis report. The following screen appears: Report (1-9, ENTER for all) Enter the number of the ratio analysis report to be printed. Press Enter to print all ratio analysis reports. Press F1 to select the report from a pop-up list. Ratio Analysis (RA) 3-51

CLS Report Processing Programs Ratio Format (0-2) Select the ratio format. Press 0 to default to the report setting selected for this format in Menu Selection 1. Press 1 to use the standard format. Press 2 to condense the report to display only the ratio (not the calculation) and/or print a short date in the column heading. Print Page Numbers Press Y if you want page numbers printed on the ratio analysis report. Starting Page Number If you chose to print page numbers, enter the number of the first page. Press Enter to accept the default 1 response as the first page number. Date-Line If you chose a specific report, CLS displays the translated result of the date-line entered at the Date-Line prompt in RA, Menu Selection 1 (1). You may edit the date-line here without affecting the report setup. Footnote Selections: (1) See Attached Review Report Position E (2) See Attached Compilation Report Position * (3) Position * Enter new footnotes (up to 60 characters per line), or press Enter to accept the default values. At the Position prompts, enter new positions, or press Enter to accept the default values. Press F1 to select the position from a pop-up list. Footnote Positions A Top of page, above ledger name E Bottom of page, centered B Top of page, below ledger name F Bottom of page, left-justified C Top of page, above date line G Top of page, below report title D Top of page, below date line * Do not print this footnote Continue? (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response and continue to the next screen of prompts. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. Evaluating key words Evaluating ratios Printing report CLS prints the ratio analysis report(s) and returns to the RA menu. 3-52 Ratio Analysis (RA)

CLS Report Processing Programs Supplemental Reports 3.8 Use this routine to print a standard or comparative Cash Flow Statement, Statement of Changes in Financial Position, and several user-defined reports. Note: You cannot print a supplemental report if there are unposted transactions or pending trial balance entries on file, or if the ledger is out of balance. Enter SR from the Report Processing menu and the following screen appears: Cash Flow Statement Statement of Changes in Financial Position User-Defined Report Supplemental reports must be defined using the RF program before they can be printed. You may copy the report file from the JCC sample ledger and modify it. See the Report File Maintenance section in Chapter 2 for instructions on defining a Supplemental Report format and the Ledger Initialization section in Chapter 1 for instructions on copying a report file. The following screen appears if you choose Menu Selection 1, Cash Flow Statement. (Prompts for the Statement of Changes in Financial Position and the user-defined reports will be the same.) Supplemental Reports (SR) 3-53

CLS Report Processing Programs Note: The default responses for the Dollar Format and BS, PL Accounts Allowed prompts appear as entered in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). The date-line, headings and footnotes will be those entered in LI, Menu Selections 5 and 6. You may make changes when printing the report without affecting the default values. Shortcut: If the default settings for the Cash Flow Statement are correct, press Esc to move directly to the Continue? (Y,N) prompt. Period to Print, Previous Period Enter the fiscal period for which the report should be printed, and the previous period. Dollar Format (0-2) Select the dollar format. Press 0 to use the standard (dollars and cents) format. Press 1 to round amounts to whole dollars. Press 2 to prepare the Cash Flow Statement in preview mode (without amounts). Press F1 to select the format from a pop-up list. Note: The preview mode may be used on a new ledger to display the Cash Flow Statement format. Standard or Comparative (S,C) Press S to print a standard Cash Flow Statement, or press C to print a comparative report. Press F1 to select the report format from a pop-up list. Show Current Column For the cash flow statement, you may suppress the current activity column. BS, PL Accounts Allowed (0-8) Choose whether or not to include this account range and/or allow unassigned accounts on the Cash Flow Statement. Press F1 to select the format from a pop-up list. 3-54 Supplemental Reports (SR) Supplemental Report Account Options 0 Inactive supplemental report 5 BS & PL accounts - allow unassigned accounts 1 BS accounts only - allow unassigned accounts 6 BS & PL accounts - validate all BS accounts 2 BS accounts only - validate all accounts 7 BS & PL accounts - validate all PL accounts 3 PL accounts only - allow unassigned accounts 8 BS & PL accounts - validate all accounts 4 PL accounts only - validate all accounts Print Run Date/Time Press Y if you would like the date and time printed on the report.

CLS Report Processing Programs Print Page Numbers Press Y if you want page numbers printed on the report. Starting Page Number If you chose to print page numbers, enter the number of the first page. Press Enter to accept the default 1 response as the first page number. Date-Line Press Enter to accept the default date-line format set in program LI, Menu Selection 5, or enter a new date-line. Footnote Selections: (1) See Attached Review Report Position E (2) See Attached Compilation Report Position * (3) Position * Enter new footnotes (up to 60 characters per line), or press Enter to accept the default values. At the Position prompts, enter new positions, or press Enter to accept the default values. Press F1 to select the position from a pop-up list. Footnote Positions A Top of page, above ledger name E Bottom of page, centered B Top of page, below ledger name F Bottom of page, left-justified C Top of page, above date line G Top of page, below report title D Top of page, below date line * Do not print this footnote Continue? (Y,N) Y Press Enter to accept the default Y response and continue to the next screen of prompts. Press N to return to the SR menu. Would you like a Departmental Report? (Y,N) This prompt appears only if you selected a departmental Balance Sheet in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Press Y to print a departmentalized report; press N to print only a company-level report. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments: If you selected a departmental report, enter the department number for which you want to print a supplemental report, or press Enter to print reports for all departments. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the SR menu. Supplemental Reports (SR) 3-55

CLS Report Processing Programs 3.9 Trial Balance This program matches each account in the account master file with appropriate ledger transactions and prepares the General Ledger, showing beginning and ending balances with supporting detail. It can also prepare a Year-to-Date Ledger, Trial Balance (four formats), Trial Balance Worksheet, Comparative Trial Balance Worksheet, Leadsheets and an Income Tax Summary. Enter TB from the Report Processing menu and the following menu appears: Note: Depending on your response to the Use Income Tax Summary prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), an asterisk may appear beside menu selection 7 to indicate that this program is currently unavailable. General Ledger Year-to-Date Ledger The general ledger shows every transaction posted to each account during the current period. In program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1), you can choose to summarize payroll transactions posted to columns 2-16 (or to all columns on the Payroll Journal) on the general ledger: these transactions will be summarized by payroll series and appear on the ledger as Source Code S. Deleted transactions are shown on the general ledger marked DL, or they may be suppressed using program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). If you are keeping annual transaction detail, you may print an annual ledger. The annual ledger shows a period number for each transaction and a subtotal at the end of each period. Only the first 22 characters of the transaction descriptions are printed on an annual ledger. An annual ledger's beginning balances are not stored by CLS, but are calculated from the stored ending-balances and the annual transactions on file. Therefore, you can begin keeping annual detail at any time, and the annual ledger will reflect the transactions on file. Choose Menu Selection 1 or 2 from the TB menu and respond to the following prompts: 3-56 Trial Balance (TB)

CLS Report Processing Programs Print Title and Total Accounts Press Y if you want title and total accounts printed, or press N to suppress them. The default response is set in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Print Zero Balance Accounts Press Y if you want accounts with zero balances printed; or press N to suppress them. The default response is set in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Starting Page Number Enter the number of the first page. Press Enter to accept the default 1 response as the first page number. Beginning Account Number Ending Account Number Enter the range of accounts to be included in the General Ledger or Year-to-Date Ledger. Beginning Period Ending Period If you chose to print a Year-to-Date General Ledger, enter the range of periods to be included. Would you like a Departmental General Ledger? (Y,N) This prompt appears only if you selected a departmental Balance Sheet or Income Statement in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Press Y to print a departmentalized report, or press Enter to accept the default N value and print a company-level report. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments: If you selected a departmental report, enter the department number for which to print report. Press Enter to print reports for all departments. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. Continue? (Y,N) Press Enter to accept the default Y response and continue to the next screen of prompts. Press N to return to the TB menu. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you chose to send the report to a file. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the TB menu. Trial Balance The Trial Balance shows one column of period-end balances for each account. You may include all accounts on the report or include only Balance Sheet or only P&L accounts. The Trial Balance is single spaced and may be printed on 8½ x 11 paper. Choose 3 from the TB menu and the following menu appears: Trial Balance (TB) 3-57

CLS Report Processing Programs Select 1 to print a standard trial balance showing ending balances. Select 2 to print a comparison with last period, which shows beginning and ending balances and a summary of current period activity. Select 3 to print a comparison with last year, which shows last-year balances, current year balances, variances and percentage variances. Select 4 to print a trial balance in the leadsheet format, which shows unadjusted and adjusted balances and the workpaper adjustments. Respond to the following prompts: Accounts to Print (1-3) Select the accounts to be included on the report. Press 1 to include all accounts, press 2 to include only Balance Sheet accounts, or press 3 to include only P&L accounts. Press F1 to select the accounts to print from a pop-up list. Separate Totals for BS & P/L Press Y to print separate totals for Balance Sheet and P&L accounts. Print Title & Total Accounts Press Y to include title and total accounts. Print zero balance accounts? (Y,N) If you chose to print account balances above, press Y to print zero balance accounts. The default response here is set in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Print account balances? (Y,N) Press Y if you want account balances to be printed. Press N to print a Trial Balance or worksheet without dollar amounts. Starting Page Number Enter the number of the first page. Press Enter to accept the default 1 response as the first page number. Would you like a Departmental Trial Balance? (Y,N) [N] This prompt appears only if you selected a departmental Balance Sheet or Income Statement in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Press Y to print a departmentalized report, or press Enter to accept the default N value and print a company-level report. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments: If you selected a departmental report, enter the department number for which to print the report, or press Enter to print reports for all departments. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. Summarize departmental accounts into one total per account? (Y,N) Press Y to summarize departmental accounts into one total per account. This option is available for 3-58 Trial Balance (TB)

CLS Report Processing Programs all trial balance formats except the leadsheet format. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the trial balance, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the TB menu. Trial Balance Worksheet Comparative Trial Balance Worksheet The Trial Balance Worksheets show period-end balances separated into debit and credit columns and provide space for adjusting entries and balances. You may print a standard worksheet or a worksheet that shows the adjustments that have been made. You may print the worksheet on wide computer paper in normal print or on 8½ x 11 paper in compressed print. Choose 4 or 5 from the TB menu. Select the standard worksheet or the worksheet with adjustments, and respond to the following prompts. Accounts to Print (1-3) Select the accounts to be included on the report. Press 1 to include all accounts, press 2 to include only Balance Sheet accounts, or press 3 to include only P&L accounts. Press F1 to select the accounts to print from a pop-up list. Separate Totals for BS & P/L Press Y to print separate totals for Balance Sheet and P&L accounts. Print Title & Total Accounts Press Y to include title and total accounts. Print zero balance accounts? (Y,N) If you chose to print account balances above, press Y to print zero balance accounts. The default response here is set in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Print account balances? (Y,N) Press Y if you want account balances to be printed. Press N to print a Trial Balance or worksheet without dollar amounts. Underline Account Fields? (Y,N) Press Y if you want CLS to separate each account on the worksheet using underline. Press N if you do not want underlines drawn. Vertical spacing (2-9) Press Enter to accept the default value and produce a triple-spaced worksheet, or enter a different vertical spacing between accounts. Would you like a Departmental Trial Balance? (Y,N) [N] This prompt appears only if you selected a departmental Balance Sheet or Income Statement in LI, Trial Balance (TB) 3-59

CLS Report Processing Programs Menu Selection 3 (1). Press Y to print a departmentalized report, or press Enter to accept the default N value and print a company-level report. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments: If you selected a departmental report, enter the department number for which to print the report, or press Enter to print reports for all departments. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. Summarize departmental accounts into one total per account? (Y,N) Press Y to summarize departmental accounts into one total per account. This option is not available for worksheets with adjustments. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the trial balance, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. Are you using 132-column paper? (Y,N) Press Y if you are using wide paper and want the report printed in normal print. Press N to select compressed print, or press Esc to return to the TB menu. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the TB menu. Leadsheets Leadsheets show last year balances, unadjusted and adjusted balances for this year, and workpaper adjustments entered using source code 16, 17 or 18 for the accounts assigned to each leadsheet. Choose 6 from the TB menu and the following menu appears: Select 1 to define leadsheets. Select 2 to list leadsheets on file. Select 3 to assign accounts to leadsheets. Select 4 to print leadsheets. Enter 1 to define leadsheets and the following screen appears: 3-60 Trial Balance (TB)

CLS Report Processing Programs Enter the leadsheet code (using up to eight alphanumeric characters) and enter a description. Three note lines are also available, however they are not currently printed on the leadsheets. When you have finished defining your leadsheets, you may use menu selection 2 to list them. Choose 3 to assign accounts to leadsheets. Then, select 1 and the following screen appears: All postable accounts for this ledger are listed. Use the arrow keys to select a accounts. Press F1 to choose the appropriate leadsheet from a pop-up list. You may also use F3 to block a group of accounts, then press F1 and select the appropriate leadsheet. When you have finished assigning accounts to leadsheets, you may use menu selection 2 to list the assignments. Use menu selection 4 to print your leadsheets. Transactions entered using source code 16 (repeating workpaper adjustments), 17 (reversing workpaper adjustments), or 18 (standard workpaper adjustments) will appear on the leadsheets, along with unadjusted and adjusted balances. Note: Before the leadsheet adjustments can be made, use LI, Menu Selection 4, to set up source code 18 and, optionally, source codes 16 and 17. Income Tax Summary An asterisk will appear beside this menu selection unless you responded Y to the Use Income Tax Summary prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). The Income Tax Summary lists tax form, schedule and line information entered in program MF, Menu Selection 1. Choose 7 from the TB menu to print an income tax summary, and respond to the following prompts: Print zero balance accounts? (Y,N) Press Y if you want accounts with zero balances to be printed, or press N to suppress them. The default response here is set in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). List unassigned accounts? (Y,N) Press Y to include accounts which have not been assigned tax code information in program MF, or press N to suppress them. Starting page number Enter the number of the first page. Press Enter to accept the default 1 response as the first page Trial Balance (TB) 3-61

CLS Report Processing Programs number. Would you like a Departmental Report? (Y,N) f you selected a departmental Balance Sheet or Income Statement in LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Press Y to print a departmentalized report, or press Enter to accept the default N value and print a company-level report. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments: If you selected a departmental report, enter the department number for which to print the report, or press Enter to print reports for all departments. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the income tax summary, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the TB menu. 3-62 Trial Balance (TB)

CLS Report Processing Programs Transmittal Letter 3.10 You may create standard transmittal letters and additional documents (e.g., cover page, table of contents, notepad, client bill) to accompany the financial statements you send to clients each period. You can use the same letter for several clients and customize it by inserting the client name and period-end date in each letter. Cover Pages and Transmittal letters are available to all ledgers; letters are stored in the Letters directory in the CLS program path. You may create up to 999 transmittal letters. After creating letter headings in program SI, Menu Selection 3, and document texts (e.g., cover pages, transmittal letters, footnotes, etc.) in program SI, Menu Selection 4, you may use the TL program to print them. Enter TL from the Report Processing menu and the following menu appears: Cover Page Table of Contents Transmittal Letters Footnotes Notepad Client Bill From the TL menu, select the type of document to be printed (Menu Selections 1-6), and respond to the following prompts: Period to Print, Previous Period Enter the fiscal period for which the transmittal letter should be printed, and the previous period. Transmittal Letter (TL) 3-63

CLS Report Processing Programs Heading No. (0-99) Enter the number of the heading you want to use (0 = no heading). Press F1 to select from a popup list of headings on file. Cover Page (*,A-Z) If you are printing a cover page, select the cover page to be printed. Use an asterisk (*) for the standard cover page, or A-Z for an alternate cover page. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of available cover pages. Letter No. (1-999) If you are printing a transmittal letter, enter the number of the letter to be printed. Press F1 to select from a pop-up list of available letters. Document Date Enter the document date, if different from the system date. Print Page Numbers Press Y to print page numbers printed on the document. Press N to print the document without page numbers. Starting Page Number If you chose to print page numbers, enter the number of the first page. Continue? (Y,N) Press Y to continue. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the document, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. After printing the document or creating an output file, CLS returns to the TL menu. List Documents on File Choose 7 from the TL menu to display or print summary listings of the headings and transmittal letters on file. List Cover Pages (1) List Headings (2) List Transmittal Letters (3) Select the report to print, and respond to the following prompt: (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. After printing the report, CLS returns to the List Documents on File menu. You may print another listing or press Esc to return to the TL menu. 3-64 Transmittal Letter (TL)

CLS Report Processing Programs Print Documents on File Choose 8 from the TL menu to display or print headings and transmittal letters on file. You may also print the footnotes, table of contents and notepad for the current ledger. Print Cover Pages (1) Print Headings (2) Print Transmittal Letters (3) Print Footnotes, TOC, Notepad, Client Bill (4) Select the report to print, and respond to the following prompts: Select Cover Page or press ENTER for all cover pages: If you chose to print cover pages, select the cover page to be printed or press Enter to print all cover pages. Press F1 to select the cover page from a pop-up list. Enter Heading Number or press ENTER for all headings: If you chose to print headings, enter the number of the heading to be printed or press Enter to print all headings. Press F1 to select the heading from a pop-up list. Enter Transmittal Letter or press ENTER for all letters: If you chose to print transmittal letters, enter the number of the letter to be printed or press Enter to print all letters. Press F1 to select the letter from a pop-up list. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the document(s), F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. After printing the document(s), CLS returns to the Print Documents on File menu. You may select another document to print, or press Esc to return to the TL menu. Assign Transmittal Letters Choose 9 from the TL menu to assign a cover page and transmittal letter(s) to the current ledger. Select Transmittal Letters (1) In Batch Processing (BP), transmittal letters 1-3 are printed before the financial statements. Transmittal letter four will be printed as a divider between the footnotes and subsidiary schedules. Transmittal Letter (TL) 3-65

CLS Report Processing Programs Cover Page (*,A-Z) Select the cover page you wish to assign to this ledger. Cover pages are created in program SI, Menu Selection 4 (2). Press F1 to select a cover page from a pop-up list. Letter Heading No. (0-99) Letter Text No. (0-999) Enter the letter headings and texts to assign to this ledger. Letter headings and texts are created in program SI, Menu Selections 3 and 4 (2). Press F1 to select headings and texts from pop-up lists. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A if the heading and text selections are correct. Press Esc to return to the Transmittal Letter Selection menu without saving any selections. Complete CLS saves your selections and returns to the Transmittal Letter Selection menu. Enter Transmittal Letter Address (2) Attention Enter the name of the person to whom the financial statements will be sent. Address 1-5 Enter the address where you will be sending financial statements. The transmittal letter name and address print in transmittal letters where the key word @client appears. Signature 1 Signature 2 Enter the name of the person whose signature is to appear at the bottom of the transmittal letter (or you may simply make the signature part of the letter). You may use the second signature line for the city and state. The signature lines print where the key words @sig1 and @sig2 appear. Accept or Escape? (A,Esc) Press A if the address is correct. Press Esc to return to the Transmittal Letter Selection menu without saving the address. Complete CLS saves the transmittal letter address and returns to the Transmittal Letter Selection menu. 3-66 Transmittal Letter (TL)

CLS Report Processing Programs Transaction Register 3.11 Use the Transaction Register (TR) program to print a complete list of transactions for a specific ledger. You can list transactions by source and reference, or by account number. You can also list formal journal entries. You may list current-period transactions or, if you are keeping annual detail, year-to-date transactions. You may also print or display a list of unposted transactions. Deleted transactions are normally suppressed, but they can be made to appear on the transaction register (marked DL) using program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). If you print a transaction register by source code, CLS prints individual journals titled Cash Receipts, Cash Disbursements, Journal Entries, etc. You can print a transaction register for an individual source code or print all of these at once. If you have departmentalized a ledger, you can print a transaction register for each department or for the company as a whole. You may also print a transaction register for a particular batch of transactions by selecting a batch number used in the ET program. In preparing a transaction register by source code, transactions are sorted by reference number. If you prefer to print transactions in the order in which they were entered, answer N to the Sort Transactions on TR prompt in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). This choice slightly decreases the processing time when posting transactions, but produces less informative reports. Enter TR from the Report Processing menu and the following menu appears: Transaction Register (TR) 3-67

CLS Report Processing Programs Current Transactions by Source/Ref Current Transactions by Account Current Formal Journal Entries Choose 1 from the TR menu to display or print current period transactions sorted by source code and reference number. Choose 2 from the TR menu to display or print current period transactions sorted by account number. Choose 3 from the TR menu to display or print current period formal journal entries. Respond to the following prompts: Source Code (0-19, A-Z) This prompt appears for Menu Selections 1 or 3. Enter a source code to identify the transactions you want printed on this report, or press Enter to list transactions for all source codes. Press F1 to select the source code from a pop-up list. CLS Source Codes 0-19 Entered in the ET program A Payable Transfers B Source Code 6 overflow C Reversed Source Code 7 F FICA Adjustments (generated by the CT program) H Income Tax Calculations I Inventory/CGS Calculations P Payroll Transfers Q Quicken Transfers R Receivable Transfers T Employer Tax Calculations (generated by the CT program) Batch Number (0-99) Enter a batch number, or press Enter to list transactions for all batches. Include Transaction Numbers [N] When printing current period transactions sorted by account (TR 2), you may also include the ET program transaction numbers on the report. Starting Page Number [1] Enter the number to be used as the first page number. Press Enter to accept the default response (1) as the first page number. Beginning Account Number Ending Account Number When printing current period transactions sorted by account number (TR 2), enter a new account range or press Enter to accept the default account range. Would you like a Departmental Transaction Register? (Y,N) [N] For Menu Selections 1 or 2, this prompt appears if you selected a departmental Balance Sheet or Income Statement in Program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Press Y to print the transaction register by department, or press Enter to accept the default N response and print a company-level report. 3-68 Transaction Register (TR)

CLS Report Processing Programs Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments: If you selected a departmental report, enter the department number for which you want to print a transaction register, or press Enter to print a transaction register for each department. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the TR menu. YTD Transactions by Source/Ref YTD Transactions by Account YTD Formal Journal Entries Choose 4 from the TR menu to display or print year-to-date transactions sorted by source code and reference number. Choose 5 from the TR menu to display or print year-to-date transactions sorted by account number. Choose 6 from the TR menu to display or print year-to-date formal journal entries. Respond to the following prompts: Source Code (0-19, A-Z) This prompt appears for Menu Selections 4 or 6. Enter a source code to identify the transactions you want printed on this report, or press Enter to list transactions for all source codes. Press F1 to select the source code from a pop-up list. CLS Source Codes 0-19 Entered in the ET program A Payable Transfers B Source Code 6 overflow C Reversed Source Code 7 F FICA Adjustments (generated by the CT program) H Income Tax Calculations I Inventory/CGS Calculations P Payroll Transfers Q Quicken Transfers R Receivable Transfers T Employer Tax Calculations (generated by the CT program) Batch Number (0-99) Enter a batch number, or press Enter to list transactions for all batches. Starting Page Number [1] Enter the number to be used as the first page number. Press Enter to accept the default response (1) as the first page number. Transaction Register (TR) 3-69

CLS Report Processing Programs Beginning Account Number Ending Account Number When printing year-to-date transactions sorted by account (TR 5), enter a new account range or press Enter to accept the default account range. Beginning period [1] Ending period [2] If you would like to print a year-to-date transaction register for a range of periods, enter the beginning and ending period numbers. Would you like a Departmental Transaction Register? (Y,N) [N] For Menu Selections 4 or 5, this prompt appears if you selected a departmental Balance Sheet or Income Statement in Program LI, Menu Selection 3 (1). Press Y to print the transaction register by department, or press Enter to accept the default N response and print a company-level report. Enter Department Number or press ENTER for all Departments: If you selected a departmental report, enter the department number for which you want to print a transaction register, or press Enter to print a transaction register for each department. Press F1 to select the department from a pop-up list. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the TR menu. Current Transactions as Entered Choose 7 to display or print posted or unposted transactions in the order in which they were entered. Respond to the following prompts: Batch Number (0-99) Enter a batch number, or press Enter to list transactions for all batches. Posted, Unposted or All Transactions (P,U,A) Select posted transactions, unposted transactions, or all transactions. (D)isplay, (F)ile, or number of copies to print (D,F,1-9) Press D to display the report, F to save it to a file, or enter the number of copies to print. Press 1 to print a single copy. CLS will prompt you to select a printer or enter an output file name if you elected to send the report to a file. After printing the report or creating an output file, CLS returns to the TR menu. 3-70 Transaction Register (TR)

Appendix Appendixes A: Warning Messages... A-1 B: CLS Program and Data File Names... B-1 C: Importing Transactions from Other Accounting Packages... C-1

Appendixes aaa Warning Messages A backup of current generation '013' already exists in path A:\. Would you like to overwrite it? (Y,N) This prompt appears during end of period processing (EP) if you already have a copy of the current generation of this ledger on the backup drive. Press Y to erase the backup files and continue, or press N to abort end of period processing. Accept date past period end? (Y,N) This message appears during transaction entry (ET) if you enter a new transaction month beyond the current period end date. Press Y to accept the new month, or press N reject it. Account not set up as a Group Account The account entered is not set up as a group account. Account range cannot start with account zero. This message appears in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (3), if zero is entered as the beginning account in the contribution or withdrawal account range. Enter a valid beginning account, or press F1 to select from a pop-up chart of accounts for this ledger. You must enter valid accounts at both the From Account and To Account prompts. Account range must be either equal or ascending. This message appears in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (3), if the contribution or withdrawal account ranges have been entered incorrectly. The beginning and ending accounts must be equal or entered in ascending order (e.g., From Account: 560, To Account: 563). Account ranges cannot overlap This message appears in program LI, Menu Selection 3 (3), if the account ranges overlap. The account ranges must be unique for each shareholder. Accounts have been changed Redefine Key Words if necessary. CLS will remind you in the Ratio Analysis (RA) program to update your key words if you have made any changes to the ledger s chart of accounts. Active account cannot delete Accounts with balances/transactions cannot be deleted. Add dep't account? (Y,N) This message appears during transaction entry (ET). If you are using the auto create function and enter a valid departmental account that does not currently exist, CLS asks if you want to create it. Press Y to create the new account or N to continue. A-1 Appendix

Appendixes Add postable account? (Y,N) This message appears during transaction entry (ET). If you are using the auto create function and enter an account that does not already exist, CLS asks if you want to create it. Press Y to create the new account and CLS displays a pop-up window where you may enter the account description, options and report lines. Press N or Esc to return to the Account field without adding a new account. Backup on drive 'A' will require multiple formatted disks. Press ENTER to continue or ESC to abort: CLS will check for available disk space for both the new generation and your backup files during end of period processing (EP). A similar message will appear in the Ledger Backup/Restore (BU) program. This message appears if there is not enough space on your backup disk to transfer the selected generation. Press Enter to continue; CLS will prompt you to insert a second disk when needed. Press Esc to abort the selected routine. Cannot delete Balances for Beginning of Year and Quarters 1-5 must be zero. Employees with balances or transactions cannot be deleted. Cannot select a 4-character ledger. Use SI #1, #1 to reset ledger length. Existing ledgers using 4-character ledger I.D.s cannot be accessed unless the ledger I.D. length is set to 4 in program SI. Cash Accounts Overlap: Bank Account 'X' and Bank Account 'Y'! The same G/L cash account numbers have been assigned to both bank accounts 'X' and 'Y'. Caution End of Fiscal Year 12/31/10 This message appears during end of year processing (EP). You will be prompted for the new Fiscal Year-End Date. Change month to (new month)? (Y,N) This message appears during transaction entry (ET) if you enter a new transaction month in the Day field. Press Y to accept the new month or N to reject it. Disk full A CLS disk-write operation failed because no space was available on the indicated disk. Disk I/O error. Press ENTER to abort: Disk media error An attempt to read or write to a disk failed because a bad sector was found. The disk may be physically damaged or may need to be reformatted. Disk not ready Error occurred reading path 'B' Make sure the floppy disk is inserted in the correct drive with the drive door closed. File not found CLS cannot find the file it is searching for. Invalid account The account number entered either does not exist or is outside the range of valid accounts defined in program LI. Appendix A-2

Appendixes Invalid amount field The transaction amount field contains an invalid entry (ET). Invalid Cash Account found in Bank Account 'X'. The cash account associated with bank account 'X' was not found in the CLS ledger. Invalid CLS drive specification The selected drive has not been defined as a Valid Data Drive in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (4). Invalid Department The department entered does not exist, or is outside the allowable range (0-9999). Invalid Division The division selected does not exist. Invalid format The Special Format P&L format is invalid. Invalid Ledger I.D. The Ledger I.D. entered contains invalid characters (A-Z, 0-9, - and & are allowed), or is too short (must be 3 or 4 characters). Invalid line number A report line does not exist or is outside the allowable range (0-9999). Invalid or non-postable account An invalid or non-postable account was entered in (ET). Invalid reference An invalid transaction reference number was entered (ET). Invalid Source 9 date Source Code 9 is date-sensitive. Period-end dates must be correct before CLS will accept a Source Code 9 transaction. Make sure your period-end dates in program LI, Menu Selection 7, are correct for both this year and last year. Invalid transaction date An invalid transaction date was entered (ET). Job account added A job account has been created on-the-fly in the ET program. Ledger in use This message appears only in the network version of CLS. Ledger locks remain set in the event of system or workstation failure and must be removed using the Lock File Release (LR) program. Ledger not found in path: CLS cannot find the selected ledger. Check to make sure the Ledger I.D. has been entered correctly. A-3 Appendix

Appendixes Making this change will prevent access to 4-character ledgers. Continue? This message appears if you have existing ledgers with 4-character I.D.s and change the I.D. length to 3 in program SI. Master account format is different than ABC.000 account format This message may appear during the income tax summary copy in LI, Menu Selection 2 (6). Both the new ledger and the ledger with the income tax summary to be copied must have the same account number format. Modem did not respond properly This message appears if you are trying to communicate with a remote CLS site. Verify your modem setup in SI. No data to copy The master ledger selected in program LI, Menu Selection 2, does not contain the file to be copied (e.g., chart of accounts, report formats, table of contents or memorized descriptions). Non-postable account The account number entered is defined as a title account or a group account. No valid Bank Accounts were found. Cannot process. Either (a) no bank accounts have been defined for this ledger, or (b) the reference/check number ranges for the bank accounts you defined are incomplete, and the Bank Reconciliation program cannot determine how to extract the outstanding checks from the CLS ledger. See the BR section of the CLS Reference Guide. Out of balance Is this acceptable? (Y,N) This message appears during transaction entry (ET) if the total of debits and credits in the current transaction file is not zero. Press Y to accept the totals and return to the Source Code Table. Press N to continue entering transactions. Pending trial balance entries found CLS will warn you if trial balance entries have been made, but the transactions have not yet been created. Use program ET, Menu Selection 2 (3), to create the trial balance transactions. Printer is not responding (Error 25). Check printer, then press ENTER to retry or ESC to abort: The printer failed to respond during a print operation. This message normally occurs if the printer is off-line or out of paper, but may also occur with serial printers when hand-shaking is not correct. Prior file generation '013' (2/28/10) will be erased from backup path C:\NEWCLS. Would you like to erase it? (Y,N) Press Y if you want to erase this generation (EP) and continue; press N if you want to keep it and continue. Program not defined in Password Maintenance please re-enter: The selected program must be added to the CLS menu structure using program SI, Menu Selection 2. Reference numbers overlap: Bank Account 'X' and Bank Account 'Y'! The Bank Reconciliation program analyzes the specifications for all bank accounts before beginning Appendix A-4

Appendixes the reconciliation process. This message appears if a conflict is found between specifications for different bank accounts or within the same bank account. When a bank account is defined, the Source Code - Batch Number - Reference/Check Number Range combination for each set of checks or deposits you want extracted from the CLS ledger must be unique. Report not on file The Cash Flow Statement or Statement of Changes in Financial Position has not been defined. Use program LI to copy the supplemental report formats from another ledger, or define the reports using the RF program. Run Ledger Start-up: CLS is not currently logged onto a ledger; you may select only the Ledger Initialization (LI) or System Initialization (SI) programs. Selected printer is not a laser printer When printing forms that require a laser printer, CLS checks that a laser printer has been selected. Make sure your laser printer is properly defined in program SI, Menu Selection 1 (6); answer Y to the Laser Printer (Y,N) prompt. Template file not found This message appears if the path and template file name were not entered correctly in program WI. This ledger must be restored to the hard drive before it can be used! This message appears if the ledger selected in Ledger Startup (LS) spans more than one floppy disk. You must restore the ledger to your hard drive using program BU before it can be used. This new file generation '014' already exists in path C:\NEWCLS Would you like to KEEP EXISTING TRANSACTIONS? (Y,N) [Y] Would you like to KEEP NEXT PERIOD BUDGETS? (Y,N) [Y] These prompts appear if you reclose a period (EP). Press Y to keep existing transactions from the new period. If you also have period budgets set up, you may press Y to keep the next period budgets. All transactions for the new period will be retained except repeating Source Code 6 transactions and Source Code C transactions. If the ledger files for the new period are corrupt and cannot be recovered, press N and CLS will create a new set of files for the next generation. You will need to re-enter transactions for the current period. Too many files in directory This error occurs when CLS is placed in the root directory of a hard disk. The root directory has a limit to the number of files it may contain. This problem can be solved by moving CLS to a subdirectory. This error also occurs if the files parameter in the config.sys file is missing or set too low. As a minimum, use Files=100 in Windows 95/98 or Files=20 in MS-DOS. Transaction file error detected Press ENTER to continue: An internal error has been detected indicating that transaction files for a particular ledger were not properly closed. Unposted transactions found CLS will warn you when unposted transactions are found. A-5 Appendix

Appendixes Warning! Current field will over-write another field. Press ESC to abort. This message may appear in program AT, Menu Selection 3 (4), when defining alternate field settings for an ASCII fixed-length file. The starting field position will cause the current field to overlap with another. Press Esc to restore the old value to the current field. WARNING Single-User Version PLEASE make certain that no other user is currently using CLS. A user was previously logged onto CLS and is either still logged on or exited CLS abnormally. Would you like to abort any other processing and continue with Ledger Start-up? This message appears if you are using the single-user version of CLS in a network environment and another user is currently logged onto a ledger, or if you exited CLS abnormally. Press Y to continue Ledger Start-up; in a network environment, processing on the ledger in use will be aborted. Press N to exit CLS. WARNING This routine will cause permanent file changes and should be run only when it is necessary. Only the current generation of this ledger will be affected. If you plan to re-close this ledger using the EP program, all of the ledger generations involved must be renumbered in the same way prior to re-closing, or the results may be disastrous! Please use this routine with caution! Continue or Esc? (C,Esc) This message appears if you are using program MF to renumber, merge or delete accounts. Press C to complete the changes to the chart of accounts, or press Esc to return to the MF menu. WARNING Transactions Rejected You may choose to import the valid transactions from this file. Your ledger may be out of balance, and you may have to edit the imported transactions or enter additional transactions to balance your ledger. If you choose to continue, the import file will be erased after the import is complete! Would you like to IMPORT VALID TRANSACTIONS? (Y,N) This message may appear when importing transactions in program AT. CLS will warn you if the import file contains invalid transactions or is out of balance. Press Y to import the valid transactions, or press N to abort the import. Appendix A-6

Appendixes BASIC Program Errors 1 NEXT without FOR 27 Out of paper 2 Syntax error 29 WHILE without WEND 3 RETURN without GOSUB 30 WEND without WHILE 4 Out of data 50 Field overflow 5 Illegal function call 51 Internal error 6 Numeric overflow 52 Bad file number 7 Out of memory 53 File not found 8 Undefined line number 54 Bad file mode 9 Subscript out of range 55 File already open 10 Duplicate definition 57 Device I/O error 11 Division by zero 58 File already exists 13 Type mismatch 61 Disk full 14 Out of string space 62 Input past end 15 String too long 63 Bad record number 16 String formula too complex 64 Bad file name 17 Can't continue 67 Too many files (Directory full) 18 Undefined user function 68 Device unavailable 19 No RESUME 69 Communication buffer overflow 20 RESUME without error 70 Disk write-protected 21 Unprintable error 71 Disk not ready 22 Missing operand 72 Disk media error 23 Line-buffer overflow 73 Advanced DOS feature 24 Device timeout 74 Rename across disks 25 Device fault 75 Path/file access error 26 FOR without NEXT 76 Path not found A-7 Appendix

Appendixes Btrieve Program Errors 1 Invalid operation 45 Inconsistent key flags 2 I/O Error 46 Access to file denied 3 File not opened 47 Maximum open files 4 Key value not found 48 Invalid alternate sequence definition 5 Duplicate key value 49 Key type error 6 Invalid key number 50 Owner already set 7 Different key number 51 Invalid owner 8 Invalid positioning 52 Error writing cache 9 End-of-file 53 Invalid interface 10 Modifiable key value error 54 Variable page error 11 Invalid file name 55 Auto-increment error 12 File not found 56 Incomplete index 13 Extended file error 57 Expanded memory error 14 Pre-image open error 58 Compression buffer too short 15 Pre-image I/O error 59 File already exists 16 Expansion error 60 Reject count reached 17 Close error 61 Work space too small 18 Disk full 62 Incorrect description 19 Unrecoverable error 63 Invalid extended insert buffer 20 Record manager inactive 64 Filter limit reached 21 Key buffer too short 65 Incorrect field offset 22 Data buffer length 74 Automatic transaction abort 23 Position block length 78 Deadlock detected 24 Page size error 79 Programming error 25 Create I/O error 80 Conflict error 26 Number of keys 81 Lock error 27 Invalid key position 82 Lost position 28 Invalid record length 83 Read outside transaction 29 Invalid key length 84 Record locked 30 Not a Btrieve file 85 File locked 31 File already extended 86 File table full 32 Extend I/O error 87 Handle table full 34 Invalid extension name 88 Incompatible mode error 35 Directory error 90 Re-direction device table full 36 Transaction error 91 Server error 37 Transaction is active 92 Transaction table full 38 Transaction control file I/O error 93 Incompatible lock type 39 End/abort transaction error 94 Permission error 40 Maximum transaction files 95 Session no longer valid 41 Operation not allowed 96 Communications environment error 42 Incomplete accelerated access (Run VF, 97 Data message too small Menu Selection 3) 43 Invalid record address 98 Internal transaction error 44 Null key path Appendix A-8

Appendixes aba CLS Program and Data File Names CLS Program Files (File Extension.exe) CLAT Accounting Transfer CLPJ Payroll Journal CLBCTRL Batch Control Routine for Batch CLPL Profit & Loss Statement Processing CLBP Batch Processing CLPT Post and Unpost Transactions CLBR Bank Reconciliation CLQA Query Account Detail CLBS Balance Sheet CLQE Query Employee Detail CLBU Ledger Backup and Restore CLQT Query Transaction Detail CLCT Computed Transactions CLRA Ratio Analysis CLCONV CLS Conversion CLRF Report File Maintenance CLDA Depreciation and Amortization Schedules CLRL Report File List CLDF Department File Maintenance CLSCALC CLS Calculator CLDL Department File List CLSI System Initialization CLDM Description File Maintenance CLSM* SUTA Magnetic Media CLDT Delete Transactions CLSR Supplemental Reports (Cash Flow Statement) CLEF Employee File Maintenance CLSTART CLS startup program, called by cl.bat CLEL Employee File List CLTB Trial Balance (General Ledger) CLEP End of Period Processing CLTCTRL W-2 and 1099 Batch Processing CLET Enter Transactions CLTF Tax Forms (W-2, W-3, 1099/ 1098, 1096) CLFIX Transaction File Repair/Recovery Routine CLTL Transmittal Letter CLJOB Job Account Maintenance CLTM* Magnetic Media CLLC Ledger Consolidation CLTR Transaction Register CLLF Ledgers on File Report CLTT Ledger Time-Tracker CLLI Ledger Initialization CLTW Tax Worksheets (940, 941, 943, 944, Continuation Sheets) CLLR Lock Release CLTWP* Unemployment Plus CLMENU CLS System Menu, Ledger Startup CLTX* Tax Package Interface CLMF Master File Maintenance CLVF Verify File Integrity(Recover Files) CLML Master File List CLWI Worksheet Interface CLPF Payroll File Maintenance CLXM* XML Filing of 940, 941 and 944 forms * Add-On Module B-1 Appendix

Appendixes Common CLS Supporting Files btrieve.exe Btrieve file management routine clpffica.dat Global social security/ medicare rates and limits Brtcl500.exe Microsoft BASIC run-time module clplcols.dat Special Format P&L Column Types cl1096.dat 1096 Format File clqkpay.dat Quicken/QuickPay Cross Reference File cl1099.dat 1099 Format File clscalc.dat Pop-up calculator hotkey cl.bat Loads Btrieve & starts CLS clsys.dat CLS System Parameters clcolor.dat CLS Color Selections clsysprn.dat CLS Printer Control File clcntrl.dat Ledger Control File (Ledgers, Current Generation) clsysxfr.dat CLS Import/Export Parameters clfonts.dat CLS soft tax fonts clunemp.dat Unemployment Continuation Sheet Formats cllock.dat Network ledger locking file clw2.dat W-2 Format File clltrxxx.dat Transmittal Letters clw3.dat W-3 Format File clmacrs.dat clpfcols.dat MACRS and ACRS Depreciation Tables Payroll Journal Column Types clxxx.frm clxxxxx.frm Laser Printer Tax Form Images CLS Ledger Data Files XXX = Ledger I.D. gen = Current Generation cla0xxx.gen cld0xxx.gen clf0xxx.gen clg0xxx.gen clj0xxx.gen clk0xxx.gen cll0xxx.gen clm0xxx.gen cln0xxx.gen clp0xxx.gen clq0xxx.gen clr0xxx.gen cls0xxx.gen clt0xxx.gen Chart of Accounts records, current year, budget and history Department and Division Names 940, 941 and Unemployment Plus information entered in TW Calculated Journal Entry master file CLS pro forma journal entries Formal Journal Entry master file Ledger Information File Memorized transaction descriptions created in transaction entry or in the Description File Maintenance (DM) program Table of Contents, Footnotes, Notepad and Client Bill (optional) Employer/Employee records with balances Financial Ratios defined in the Ratio Analysis (RA) program, and Leadsheets defined in the Trial Balance (TB) program. Cash Flow Statement, Statement of Changes in Financial Position and User-defined report formats Bank Reconciliation outstanding check file Transaction File (Description, Account and Amount records) Appendix B-2

Appendixes aca Importing Transactions from Other Accounting Packages This appendix provides instructions for creating export files in other accounting packages to be imported using the CLS Accounting Transfer (AT) program. Export instructions are provided only as a guideline and apply to the most current version of these packages at press time. For complete instructions, refer to your documentation for the product from which you are exporting transactions. For detailed instructions on importing these files into CLS, refer to Chapter 1 of this manual. BASS Payroll Compatibility In order to import BASS Payroll transactions successfully, you must define payroll journal columns in CLS which accept all of the general ledger accounts assigned in BASS Payroll, including a column for the net pay or cash offset account. All transactions imported from BASS Payroll contain employee numbers and will be validated against both the general ledger and passive payroll sides of CLS. Exporting from BASS Payroll A transfer file must be created each time payroll checks are printed. The name of the transfer file will follow the format CLB-mmdd.xxx. Please refer to the section on interfacing with CLS in the BASS Payroll manual for more information.insta-pay Multi-Company Payroll Compatibility Account numbers and employee numbers in CLS and Insta-Pay must be identical. Use program ML, Menu Selection 1, to print a copy of your CLS Chart of Accounts to use as a reference. Exporting from Insta-Pay Export files may be created using Insta-Pay s utility, 10CK2CLS.EXE (the year may change). Exit to DOS and enter the command below with the following variables: 05CK2CLS /C <company number> /From <mm-dd-yy> /To <mm-dd-yy> [/No. of Voids] When you press Enter to accept the export settings, Insta-Pay will create an export file with the company number as the filename (extension.dat). C-1 Appendix

Appendixes One-Write Plus for MS-DOS If you plan to use One-Write Plus (OWP) with CLS, the employee I.D.s in One-Write Plus should use 4-digits. Non-numerical characters may not be used. The CLS Chart of Accounts format should be consistent with that in One-Write Plus (either 4 or 6 digits). CLS can import a One-Write Plus General Ledger or Payroll Journal file. Creating a General Ledger File Payroll transactions in the OWP general ledger do not contain employee numbers; these transactions cannot be assigned to employees in CLS. If you plan to use the CLS passive payroll, you must first import transactions from the OWP general ledger without payroll, and then import payroll transactions from the OWP payroll journal. If you do not plan to use the CLS passive payroll, you may import transactions from the OWP general ledger with payroll. From the One-Write Plus Reports menu, select Financial Statements and then choose General Ledger. At the General Ledger Report screen, define the report settings as shown below: Report Title The report title is not used by CLS. You may press Enter to accept the default report title. Select Period Select the period to be exported. Select Accounts Select ALL accounts. Select Items Select Exclude Inactive Accounts. Summarize By Select Full Detail. Once you have defined the report settings, choose Print. At the Print Options dialog box, choose File and enter a name for the general ledger export file. Creating a Payroll Journal File If you do not have payroll in OWP or do not want to import payroll information into CLS, you may skip this step. From the One-Write Plus Reports menu, select Payroll and then choose Payroll Journal. At the Payroll Journal Report screen, define the report settings as shown below: Report Title The report title is not used by CLS. You may press Enter to accept the default report title. Select Period Select the period to be exported. Select Items Select All employees. Appendix C-2

Appendixes Sort By Select Entry Order. Show Distribution Select General Ledger distributions. Show Taxable Wages Select No. Once you have defined the report settings, choose Print. At the Print Options dialog box, choose File and enter a name for the payroll export file. One-Write Plus for Windows (Version 7) The CLS Chart of Accounts format should be consistent with that in One-Write Plus (either 4 or 6 digits). CLS can import a One-Write Plus General Ledger, but not payroll transactions. Creating a General Ledger File Payroll transactions in the OWP general ledger do not contain employee numbers; these transactions cannot be assigned to employees in CLS. You may import transactions from the OWP general ledger with or without payroll. From the One-Write Plus Reports menu, select Financial and then choose General Ledger. At the General Ledger Report screen, define the report settings as shown below: Show System Date and Time This is not used by CLS. You may accept the default. Report Title and Report Footer The report title and report footer are not used by CLS. You may accept the defaults. Select Dates Select the date range to be exported. Check the box to Exclude Inactive Accounts Select GL Account # Select ALL accounts. Once you have defined the report settings, choose Preview. At the bottom of the Preview screen, choose Export (the suitcase icon). Select Text for the format and Disk File for the destination. Click OK, then enter a name and select a location for the export file. Click OK again to create the export file. Peachtree Accounting for Windows 2.0 Your Peachtree Accounting for Windows and CLS Chart of Accounts must be identical. Use program ML, Menu Selection 1, to print a copy of your CLS Chart of Accounts to use as a reference. C-3 Appendix

Appendixes Note: If you plan to export a Peachtree Accounting for Windows Payroll Journal, employee names and numbers in Peachtree Accounting for Windows and CLS must be identical. To create a Peachtree Accounting for Windows file, choose the File menu, and then select Export. Define the export options as follows: Which file to export Select Journal entries. Which format to export to Select Comma Separated Values. Include Headers The include headers box should not be checked. Path Name of File to Export Enter the path and file name. Press Enter to accept the Peachtree Accounting for Windows default. Which Records to Export Select the Starting Date and Ending Date for the records to be exported. Which journal to export Peachtree Accounting for Windows automatically tags all journals for export. Select any or all journal types to be included in the export file. Peachtree Complete Accounting for Windows, 3.0-9.0 Compatibility Your Peachtree Accounting for Windows and CLS Charts of Accounts must be identical. Use program ML, Menu Selection 1, to print a copy of your CLS Chart of Accounts to use as a reference. If you want to export payroll from Peachtree Accounting for Windows, employee numbers in Peachtree Accounting for Windows and CLS must also be identical. Exporting from Peachtree Accounting for Windows Open the company for which you would like to export transactions. From the File menu, choose Select Import/Export. From the Select Import/Export window, choose the type of transactions to be exported (Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payables, etc.) and the report to export. Click the Export button. On the Filter Tab: Make sure the date range for the transactions to be exported is correct. On the Fields Tab: Select the items to be exported. The table on the next page shows the fields to export for each type of template and the default file names. Select the transaction fields you want to include in the export file. The tables below indicate which Appendix C-4

Appendixes fields must be chosen for each transaction type. Include only the designated fields; do not include additional fields. The Options tab will let you save the layout. C-5 Appendix Accounts Receivable (Sales) CLS default file name: sales.csv Customer Name Accounts Receivable Amount Inventory Account Invoice # G/L Account Cost of Sales Account Date Amount Cost of Sales Amount Accounts Receivable Account Accounts Receivable (Receipts) CLS default file name: receipts.csv Customer Name Cash Amount Inventory Account Reference Description Cost of Sales Account Date G/L Account Cost of Sales Amount Cash Account Amount Accounts Payable (Purchases) CLS default file name: purchase.csv Vendor I.D. Date G/L Account Vendor Name Accounts Payable Account Amount Invoice # Accounts Payable Amount Accounts Payable (Payments) CLS default file name: payments.csv Vendor I.D. Date G/L Account Vendor Name Cash Account Amount Check Number Cash Amount Payroll CLS default file name: payroll.csv Employee I.D. Date Pay Field-Account Employee Name Cash Account Pay Field-Expense Account Check Number Cash Amount Pay Field-Amount General Ledger (Journal) CLS default file name: general.csv Date G/L Account Amount Reference Description Inventory (Assemblies) CLS default file name: assembly.csv Reference Inventory Account G/L Account Date Amount Adjusted Amount Reason to Build Inventory (Adjustments) CLS default file name: adjust.csv Reference Inventory Account G/L Source Account Date Amount Adjusted Amount Reason to Adjust On the Options Tab: If possible, use Peachtree s default file names; these are also the default names used by CLS.

Appendixes Make sure the Include Headings box is not checked, then click the OK button to create the export file. Note: If you wish to save your field selections, click the Save button and give the layout a new name. Peachtree Complete Accounting for DOS You may import Peachtree Complete Accounting payroll, payables or receivables export files into CLS. Creating a Payroll File To export payroll transactions from Peachtree Complete, set the parameters in the Maintain Payroll Options program as follows before entering payroll checks. Post to G/L Select Y. Payroll G/L Account Numbers Select the general ledger account numbers to be used in posting payroll transactions. (You must also define corresponding accounts in CLS.) You must use the Maintain Tax File program to define account numbers for posting state and local tax withholding, unemployment expense and liability accounts. Once you enter the payroll checks and are ready to create a transfer file, run the Post Current Period program to do so. Creating a Payables or Receivables File To export payables or receivables transactions from Peachtree Complete, set the parameters in the Maintain Options program as follows before entering transactions. Report to G/L Select Y. Accounts Payable and Cash Account Numbers Payables only: Select the general ledger account numbers to be used in posting A/P and cash transactions. (You must also define corresponding accounts in CLS.) For accounts receivable, you must use the Maintain G/L Accounts Distribution File program to set up accounts to which transactions will be posted. You must also define corresponding accounts in CLS. When you are ready to create a payables or receivables transfer file, run the Create G/L Journal Entries program. Then run the Post Current Period program. Appendix C-6

Appendixes QuickBooks for DOS Compatibility The QuickBooks for DOS and CLS Chart of Accounts must be identical. Use program ML, Menu Selection 1, to print a copy of your CLS Chart of Accounts to use as a reference. For each CLS title account, define a QuickBooks for DOS account without an account number. For each CLS postable account, define a QuickBooks for DOS sub-account. Enter the CLS account number as the first characters of each sub-account description. Exporting from QuickBooks for DOS To create a QuickBooks for DOS export file, select Set Up/Customize from the QuickBooks Main Menu. From the Set Up/Customize menu, select Back Up/Restore/Copy Company Files. Select Export Company Data from the pop-up menu and define the export settings as follows: File Enter the pathname and export file name. Export transactions from: Enter the appropriate date range of the transactions to be exported. Export None/All/Selected Balance Sheet Accounts (N/A/S) Press S to export selected Balance Sheet Accounts. Export None/All/Selected Company Lists (N/A/S) Press N to suppress the export of company lists. Press Enter to continue to the account selection screen. Use the arrow keys (, ) to scroll through the Chart of Accounts. Tag or untag accounts by pressing the space bar. Press Ctrl-Enter to export the tagged accounts. QuickBooks for Windows/QuickBooks Pro Compatibility For each postable QuickBooks for Windows account, there must be a corresponding CLS postable account. Use program ML, Menu Selection 1, to print a copy of your CLS Chart of Accounts to use as a reference. You can define QuickBooks for Windows accounts without an account number for CLS title accounts. For each postable CLS account, define a corresponding postable QuickBooks for Windows account. Account numbers must be identical in CLS and QuickBooks, but the verbal description need not be. Enter the CLS account number before the account or sub-account description: C-7 Appendix

Appendixes Fixed Assets Computer 269 Cost 280 Accumulated Depreciation Truck 275 Cost 280 Accumulated Depreciation If you are using sub-accounts in QuickBooks, CLS account numbers must be assigned at the lowest account level. If you are using QuickBooks to write payroll checks, follow the guidelines below if you want to import them into CLS. When setting up employees in QuickBooks, enter the employee number in parenthesis after each employee s last name [e.g., Smith (101)]. The employee number will not appear on paychecks. When setting up accounts for the employer's share of payroll taxes, make sure that the QuickBooks Account Name field contains one of the following phrases: company, employer or payroll taxes (e.g., Employer FICA Payable, Employer FICA Expense, etc.). When QuickBooks accounts are defined in this fashion, CLS will ignore the employee number on transactions for the corresponding CLS accounts. As an alternative, you may place the word company somewhere in the split memo field for the employer's payroll tax transactions. Creating a QuickBooks Export File If you are using QuickBooks 2000 or later, then from the Reports menu choose Accountant and Taxes, then select Journal. If you are using QuickBooks 99 or earlier, then from the Reports menu choose Other Reports, then select Journal. Select the appropriate date range for the transactions you are exporting, then click the Print button On the Print Reports window, select the option to print to a file. Next, choose either the Lotus 1-2-3 (.PRN) or the Comma-separated values (.CSV) file format. If you choose the.csv format, remember to change the file extension when you import the transactions into CLS. Click Print again, then select the correct path (folder), enter the correct file name, and click Save. Appendix C-8

Appendixes Quicken for DOS If you plan to use Quicken with CLS, you must replace categories in Quicken with a CLScompatible Chart of Accounts. Note: If you also enter a CLS account number as the first characters in each category description field, Quicken reports will be sorted by CLS account number. In order for CLS to import payroll checks from Quicken, employee numbers must appear in the memo field of the checks, preceded by a pound-sign (e.g., #103). To export checks from Quicken for DOS, press F2 (Acct/Print) at the Quicken check or check register screen. Select Export from the menu which appears. At the Export Window, define the export settings as follows: DOS File: Enter the name of the export file. Export transactions from Enter the appropriate date range of the transactions to be exported. Export Transactions (Y/N) Select Transactions only. (If you are using Quicken 5.0 or later, make sure that you answer N to the Export Categories and Classes prompt.) Once you have defined the export settings, click on OK or press Enter to create the export file. Quicken for Windows If you plan to use Quicken with CLS, you must replace categories in Quicken with a CLScompatible Chart of Accounts. Note: If you also enter a CLS account number as the first characters in each category description field, Quicken reports will be sorted by CLS account number. In order for CLS to import payroll checks from Quicken, employee numbers must appear in the memo field of the checks, preceded by a pound-sign (e.g., #103). To export checks from Quicken for Windows, select Export from the Files menu. (If you are using Quicken 6 for Windows, select File Operations from the Files menu and then select Export.) The Export Window appears and you may define the export settings as follows: QIF File to Export to Enter the pathname and export file name. Quicken Account to Export from Choose the appropriate checking account from which to export transactions. Transactions Starting Enter the appropriate date range of the transactions to be exported. C-9 Appendix

Appendixes Export Items Select Transactions only. (If you are using Quicken 5.0 or later, make sure that you only export transactions, not categories or classes.) Once you have defined the export settings, click on OK or press Enter to create the export file. QuickPay for DOS If you plan to use QuickPay for DOS to create payroll checks, you must complete the category cross-reference tables in the CLS SI program so CLS can substitute account numbers for the payroll categories used by QuickPay. For QuickPay version 3, make sure you enter N at the Print Pay Period in Check Memo Field prompt in the QuickPay preferences settings, or the employee numbers will be overwritten. QuickPay for Windows If you plan to use QuickPay for Windows to create payroll checks, you must complete the category cross-reference tables in the CLS SI program so CLS can substitute account numbers for the payroll categories used by QuickPay. All QuickPay payroll account names should remain unchanged. Assign CLS account numbers only to QuickPay sub-accounts. Employee numbers must appear in the memo field of the checks, preceded by a pound-sign (e.g., #106). For QuickPay version 3, make sure you enter N at the Print Pay Period in Check Memo Field prompt in the QuickPay preferences settings, or the employee numbers will be overwritten. QuickPayroll If you want to import QuickPayroll paychecks into CLS, follow the guidelines below: When setting up employees in QuickPayroll, enter the employee number in parenthesis after each employee s last name [e.g., Smith (101)]. The employee number will not appear on paychecks. When defining payroll items in QuickPayroll, insert the appropriate CLS G/L account number at the beginning of the payroll item description. When defining payroll items for the employer's share of payroll taxes, make sure that the payroll item description contains one of the following phrases: company, employer or payroll taxes (e.g., Employer FICA Payable, Employer FICA Expense, etc.). When payroll items are defined in this fashion, CLS will ignore the employee number on transactions for the corresponding CLS accounts When importing the transactions into CLS, be sure to enter the Cash Offset Account so that CLS can create a cash-offset transaction. QuickPayroll is not a double-entry system, and does not create the cash-offset transaction on its own. Creating a QuickPayroll Export File From the Reports menu, choose Payroll Reports, then select Transaction Detail. Appendix C-10

Appendixes Select the appropriate date range for the transactions you are exporting, then click the Print button On the Print Reports window, select the option to print to a file. Next, choose the Excel/Lotus 123 Spreadsheet format. Click Print again, then select the correct path (folder), enter the correct file name, and click Save. TCS Software Creating a Payroll File Within the TCS System Initialization (SI) program, answer T to the Update G/L from PR prompt. You will then be prompted during End of Month Processing (EM) to enter the drive on which to create the G/L transfer file and the transfer file name. Note: TCS will automatically default to the file name prglt.dat if the account numbers are 6-digits or less. If the account numbers are 7-digits or longer, TCS will default to the file name prglt10.dat. You may change the filename if needed. Creating a Payables File Within the TCS System Initialization (SI) program, answer T to the Update G/L from AP prompt. You will then be prompted during End of Period Processing (EP) to enter the drive on which to create the G/L transfer file and the transfer file name. Note: TCS will automatically default to the file name apglt.dat if the account numbers are 6- digits or less. If the account numbers are 7-digits or longer, TCS will default to the file name apglt10.dat. You may change the filename if needed. Creating a Receivables File Within the TCS System Initialization (SI) program, answer T to the G/L Transfer Method prompt. Choose the G/L Selection routine and then select Post/Purge G/L Account Distribution. You will then be prompted to enter the drive on which to create the G/L transfer file and the transfer file name. Note: TCS will automatically default to the file name arglt.dat if the account numbers are 6-digits or less. If the account numbers are 7-digits or longer, TCS will default to the file name arglt10.dat. You may change the filename if needed. C-11 Appendix

Index Index A Accounting Transfer (AT) 1-2 to 1-32, Appendix C BASS Payroll 1-10 Exporting ASCII Files 1-19 to 1-25 Chart of Accounts 1-20 Client List 1-19 to 1-20 Employee/Vendor List 1-21 to 1-22 Transactions, Current or YTD 1-22 to 1-24 Trial Balance 1-24 to 1-25 Importing ASCII Files 1-13 to 1-19 Chart of Accounts 1-13 Employee/Vendor List 1-14 Transaction File, Comma-Delimited 1-14 to 1-17 Transaction File, Fixed-Length 1-17 to 1-19 Insta-Pay Multi-Company 1-11 Interface with Other CLS Software 1-25 to 1-32 Lotus 1-2-3 (.prn) 1-16 One-Write Plus 1-7 to 1-8 Peachtree Accounting for Windows 1-5 Peachtree Complete Accounting (DOS) 1-3 to 1-4 Quicken/QuickBooks 1-6 to 1-7 QuickPay 1-6 to 1-7, 1-137 to 1-139 QuickPayroll 1-12 to 1-13 Suspense Account 1-3, 1-75 TCS Software 1-8 to 1-9 Accounts Active 2-27 Adding or Revising 2-22 to 2-27 Copying a Chart of Accounts 1-65 Deleting 2-27, 2-34 to 2-36 Departmental 2-32 to 2-33 Description 2-23 Format of Number 1-64, 1-103 Job Cost 1-72, 2-33 to 2-34 Options 2-24 to 2-25 Querying 1-109 to 1-112, 2-31 to 2-32 Ranges 1-71, 1-80, 1-81 Renumber 2-34 to 2-36 Spacing 2-25 Title 2-23 Types 2-23 ACRS/MACRS Depreciation (see MACRS/ACRS Depreciation) Add/Decimal Mode 1-40, 1-119 Address Labels (LF) 3-31 to 3-33 Adjustment Accounts 1-81, 1-92, 3-23 Amortization Schedules 3-28 to 3-29 Ampersand (&) 1-61, 1-62, 1-64 Annual Detail, Keeping 1-77 Auto-Create Accounts 1-41, 1-75 B Backup and Restore (BU) 2-2 to 2-9 Backup a Ledger 2-2 to 2-3 Batch Backup of Ledgers 2-3 to 2-4 Format a Diskette 2-8 to 2-9 List Files on a Diskette 2-8 Magnetic Media Files 2-6 to 2-7 Restore a Ledger from Backup Disk 2-4 to 2-5 Transmittal Letters 2-5 to 2-6 Backup Drive 1-37, 1-123, 2-3, 2-5, 2-7 Balance Sheet (BS) 3-19 to 3-25 Departmental 1-71 Job Cost 1-71 Prior-Year Comparison 1-64, 1-72, 3-19 to 3-21 Standard 1-71, 3-19 to 3-21 Statement of Changes in Equity 3-23 to 3-25 Sub-schedules (see Group Accounts) Trend Analysis 3-21 to 3-23 Bank Reconciliation (BR) 3-9 to 3-18 Cleared Checks, Deleting 3-9, 3-18 Entering Other Reconciling Items 3-13 to 3-14 Reconciling 3-10 to 3-13 Setup 3-15 to 3-18 Add/Revise a Bank Account 3-15 to 3-18 Close a Bank Account 3-17 to 3-18 Update Outstanding Check File 3-9 to 3-10 View/Print 3-14 to 3-15 Bank Reconciliation 3-14 Transactions, Bank or Ledger 3-13 to 3-14, 3-15 BASIC Error Messages Appendix A Basic Ledger Information 1-70 to 1-87 BASS Payroll 1-10, Appendix C Batch Number, Transactions 1-40, 1-114, 3-68, 3-69 Batch Processing (BP) 1-128 to 1-129, 3-2 to 3-8 Batch Printer 1-128, 3-3, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8 Collated Sets 3-3, 3-8 Final Copies 3-6, 3-7, 3-8 Page Numbers, Sequential 3-3 to 3-4 Payroll Worksheets 3-6, 3-7, 3-8 Preparing Reports 3-5 to 3-8 Report Sequence 3-3 to 3-5 Report Sets 1-95, 1-128 to 1-129, 3-2 Review Copies 3-6, 3-7, 3-8 Setup 3-2 to 3-5 Standard Reports 3-6, 3-7, 3-8 Beginning Balances Cash Flow Statement 2-26 History 2-28 to 2-30 Ledger, Correcting 1-139 Statement of Changes in Financial Position 2-26 Bold Printing 1-75, 1-120 to 1-121, 1-126, 1-127, 1-133 BTRIEVE Error Messages Appendix A Budgets Annual 2-26 Job Cost 2-26 Period (See Period Budgets) C Calculator 1-39 Cash Disbursements Journal (see Source Codes) Cash Dividends 1-80 to 1-81, 1-92, 3-23 Cash Flow Statement (SR) 2-42 to 2-45, 3-53 to 3-55 Beginning Balances 2-26 Create or Modify 2-42 to 2-45 Line Descriptions 2-43 Index - 1

Index Line Numbers 2-42 Line Options 2-43 to 2-44 Line Types 2-43 Spacing Characters 2-44 Cash Receipts Journal (see Source Codes) Chart of Accounts (ML) 2-38 to 2-40 Balance Sheet Accounts 1-71 Copying 1-65 P&L Accounts 1-71 Client Bill Copying 1-66 to 1-67 Creating 1-131 to 1-135, 2-48 to 2-52 Printing 3-63 to 3-64, 3-65 Comparative Financial Statements (see Balance Sheet, Profit & Loss Statement) Comparative History 2-28 to 2-30 Computed Transactions (CT) 1-33 to 1-34 Create Calculated Journal Entries 1-34 Create Income Tax Transactions 1-34 Create Inventory/CGS Transactions 1-33 Contributed Capital Accounts 1-80 to 1-81, 1-92, 3-23 Correct Beginning Ledger Balance (SI) 1-139 Correct Transaction Descriptions (QT) 1-113 to 1-116 Cover Page (SI, TL) 1-95, 1-131 to 1-134, 3-63 to 3-66 Creating Financial Ratios (see Ratio Analysis) Current Earnings Accounts 1-81, 3-23 D Data File Names Appendix B Data Paths 1-37, 1-105, 1-123 Date-Lines (See Financial Statements, Date Lines) Dates Document Date 3-64 Ledger Dates 1-71, 1-94 Today's Date 1-105 Transaction Dates 1-40, 1-41 Declining Balance Depreciation 3-26 to 3-28 Delete Transactions (DT) 1-35, 1-76 Deleting a Ledger 1-97 to 1-99 Deleting Ledger Generations 1-97 to 1-99 Denominator Decimals 3-49 Department File List (DL) 2-13 Department File Maintenance (DF) 2-10 to 2-12 Adding or Revising 2-10 to 2-11 Deleting 2-11 to 2-12 Name 2-11 Number 2-10 to 2-11 P&L Ratio Divisors 2-11 Querying 2-12 Renumbering 2-12 Statement of Income and Retained Earnings 2-11 Departmental Accounts 2-32 to 2-33 Depreciation and Amortization Schedules (DA) 3-26 to 3-29 Depreciation Schedules 3-26 to 3-28 Description File Maintenance (DM) 2-14 to 2-17 Adding or Revising 2-14 to 2-15 Deleting 2-15 to 2-17 Memorize Descriptions 1-41, 1-67, 1-75 to 1-76, 1-119 Description Key 2-14, 2-15 Disk Drives Backup Drive 1-37, 1-123, 2-3, 2-5, 2-7 Data Drive 1-37, 1-105, 1-123 Valid Drive Letters 1-123 Disk Labels (LF) 3-31 to 3-33 Dividends Declared Accounts 1-80 to 1-81, 1-92, 3-23 Divisions (see Department File Maintenance) Dollar Format 1-73, 1-74, 3-20, 3-22, 3-24, 3-35, 3-37, 3-54 Dollar Sign Type 1-74 DOS Shell (DS) 2-18 Duplicate a Ledger (LI) 1-100 to 1-101 E Editing Transactions 1-43 End of Period Processing (EP) 1-36 to 1-38 Enforced Cosmetics 1-121 to 1-122, 2-36 to 2-37 Enter Transactions (ET) 1-39 to 1-60 Add/Decimal Mode 1-40, 1-119 Batch Number 1-40 Create Calculated Journal Entries 1-34 Entry Mode 1-40, 1-119 Error Checking 1-39 Escape Key 1-43 Formal Journal Entries 1-52 to 1-54, 3-69 to 3-70 Memorize Transaction Descriptions 1-41, 1-67, 1-75 to 1-76, 1-119, 2-14 to 2-17 Payroll Mode 1-40, 1-120 Plus (+)/Minus (-) Mode 1-40, 1-119 Pro Forma Journal Entries 1-48 to 1-52 Shortcuts (Special Keystrokes) 1-42 to 1-44 Source Code 1-40, 1-76, 1-119 Summary Journal Entry 1-46 to 1-48 Trial Balance Entry 1-44 to 1-46 Error Messages Appendix A Export (see Accounting Transfer) F File Folder Labels (LF) 3-31 to 3-33 File Maintenance (FM) Chapter 2 Financial Ratios (see Ratio Analysis) Financial Statement Options (SI) 1-120 to 1-122 Enforced Cosmetics 1-121 to 1-122, 2-60 Financial Statement Print Options 1-75, 1-120 to 1-121, 1-126, 1-127 Financial Statements Bold 1-75, 1-120 to 1-121, 1-126, 1-127, 1-133 Date-Lines 1-89 to 1-90, 1-93 Footnotes (LI) 1-93 to 1-94 Headings 1-88 to 1-93 Italics 1-75, 1-120 to 1-121, 1-126, 1-127, 1-133 Underline 1-75, 1-120 to 1-121, 1-126, 1-127, 1-133 Fiscal Year End 1-71 Footnotes (LI) 1-93 to 1-94 Footnotes (SI, TL) Copying 1-66 to 1-67 Creating 1-131 to 1-135 Printing 3-63 to 3-64, 3-65 Formal Journal Entries 1-52 to 1-54, 3-68 to 3-70 Function Keys F1 through F10 1-43 to 1-44 2 - Index

Index G F2, F3 1-109, 1-110 General Ledger (TB) 3-56 to 3-57 Generation Number (see Ledger Generation) Gross Profit Analysis 1-91, 2-24 Group Accounts 2-25 H History, Comparative 2-28 to 2-30 Horizontal Offset 3-33 Horizontal Stretch 3-33 I Import (see Accounting Transfer, Appendix C) Import/Export Parameters (SI) 1-124 to 1-125 Income Statement (see Profit & Loss Statement) Income Tax Calculations 1-34, 1-83 to 1-85, 1-136 to 1-137 Income Tax Summary 1-68, 1-75, 2-26, 2-39, 3-61 to 3-62 Inventory Adjustments 1-33, 1-82 to 1-83, 2-25 Insta-Pay Multi-Company Payroll 1-11, Appendix C Italics Printing 1-75, 1-120 to 1-121, 1-126, 1-127, 1-133 J Job Costing 1-71, 1-72, 2-33 to 2-34 K Keystrokes, Transaction Entry 1-42 to 1-44 Keywords (TL) 1-133 to 1-134, 1-135 L Labels, Printing (LF) 3-31 to 3-33 Last Year Ending Balances 2-26 Leadsheets 1-67 to 1-68, 3-60 to 3-61 Copying 1-67, 1-68 Setup, Reports 3-60 to 3-61 Ledger Copying Setup Information 1-65 to 1-70 Creating 1-64 Deleting 1-97 to 1-99 Duplicating 1-100 to 1-101 Generation Deleting 1-97 to 1-99 Resetting 1-101 to 1-102 I.D. 1-64, 1-105 Changing 1-100 Name 1-64, 1-70, 1-77, 1-78 Ledger Balance, Querying 1-112 Ledger Consolidation (LC) 1-61 to 1-62 Ledger Control File (clcntrl.dat) 1-102, Appendix B Ledger in use 2-19 Ledger Initialization (LI) 1-63 to 1-104 Ledgers on File (LF) 3-30 to 3-33 Ledger Start-up (LS) 1-105 to 1-106 Lock File Release (LR) 2-19 to 2-21 Log Number 1-27, 1-28, 1-30, 1-31 Lotus 1-2-3 (.prn) 1-16, Appendix C M MACRS/ACRS Depreciation 3-26 to 3-28 Main Menu Chapter 1 Master File List (ML) 2-38 to 2-40 Master File Maintenance (MF) 2-22 to 2-37 Memorize Descriptions 1-41, 1-67, 1-75 to 1-76, 1-119, 2-14 to 2-17 Editing descriptions 2-14 to 2-15 Modem Setup (LI, SI) 1-80, 1-124 to 1-125 N Net Income, Query 1-112 New Features in CLS (NF) 2-41 Notepad (SI, TL) Copying 1-66 to 1-67 Creating 1-131 to 1-135 Printing 3-63 to 3-64, 3-65 Numerator Decimals 3-49 O One-Write Plus 1-7 to 1-8, Appendix C Operator Preferences (SI) 1-118 to 1-120 Options Account 2-24 to 2-25 Supplemental Report (see Report File Maintenance, Line Options) P Page Numbers, Sequential 3-3 to 3-4 Passwords Ledger 1-80 System 1-130 Payroll Options (SI) 1-122 Peachtree Accounting for Windows 1-5, Appendix C Peachtree Complete Accounting (DOS) 1-3 to 1-4, Appendix C Period-Budgets 1-64, 1-73, 1-102, 2-30 to 2-31, 3-34 to 3-41 Period-End Date (see Dates, Ledger Dates) Plus/Minus Mode 1-40, 1-119 Post Transactions (PT) 1-107 to 1-108 Unposted Transactions 3-70 Unposting Transactions 1-108 Printer Setup 1-125 to 1-128 Printer Setup Code 1-126 Index - 3

Index Profit & Loss Statement (PL) 3-34 to 3-41 3-, 6- or 12-Period 3-37 to 3-39 Budget-Only P&L 3-34 to 3-36 Departmental 1-72, 3-36, 3-39 Job Cost 1-72 Percent of Sales Divisor 1-81 to 1-82, 2-24 Period Budget 1-64, 1-73, 1-86, 1-102, 2-30 to 2-31, 3-34 to 3-41 Prior-Year Comparison 1-64, 1-72, 1-86 to 1-102, 3-34 to 3-36 Ratio Divisors 1-86 to 1-87, 2-11, 3-41 Special Format 1-85 to 1-87, 3-39 to 3-41 Standard 1-72, 3-34 to 3-36 Statement of Income and Retained Earnings 1-73, 1-80 to 1-81, 1-92, 2-11, 3-35, 3-38 Subschedules (see Group Accounts) Total Column Type 1-73, 3-38 Trend Analysis 3-37 to 3-39 Year-to-Date 3-34 to 3-36 Pro Forma Journal Entries (ET) 1-48 to 1-52 Copying 1-69 to 1-70 Program File Names Appendix B Q Query Account Detail (QA) 1-109 to 1-112 Query Current Detail 1-109 Query Department Account 1-111 to 1-112 Query Group Account 1-111 Query Ledger Balance 1-112 Query Net Income 1-112 Query Year-to-Date Detail 1-110 to 1-111 Query Transaction Detail (QT) 1-113 to 1-116 QuickBooks 1-6 to 1-7, Appendix C Quicken 1-6 to 1-7, Appendix C QuickPay 1-6 to 1-7, 1-137 to 1-139, Appendix C QuickPayroll 1-12 to 1-13, Appendix C R Ratio Analysis (RA) 3-42 to 3-52 Comparative Data 3-50 to 3-51 Key Words 3-46 to 3-48 Financial Ratios 3-48 to 3-50 Options 3-43, 3-45, 3-47, 3-49 Printing 3-51 to 3-52 Ratio Categories 3-44 to 3-46 Ratio Decimals 3-49 Report Formats 3-42 to 3-44 Reclose a Period (EP) 1-36 to 1-38 Record Size, Account 1-64, 1-102 Reference Number 1-41, 3-67 to 3-70 Reference Total 1-42 Repeating Transactions (Sources 6, 16) 1-87 to 1-88 Report File List (RL) 2-46 Report File Maintenance (RF) 2-42 to 2-45 Adding or Revising Report Lines 2-42 to 2-45 Copying Report Master File 1-65 to 1-66 Deleting Report Lines 2-45 Line Descriptions 2-43 Line Numbers 2-42 Line Options 2-43 to 2-44 Line Types 2-43 Querying Report Lines 2-45 Spacing Characters 2-44 Report Processing (RP) Chapter 3 Retained Earnings Account(s) 1-80 to 1-81 Retention Cycle 1-71, 1-119, 1-129 Reversing Transactions (Sources 7, 17) 1-87 to 1-88 Rule of 78 Depreciation 3-26 to 3-28 S Site I.D. 1-124 Site Type 1-3, 1-25, 1-124 Source Codes 1-40, 1-76, 1-119, 3-68, 3-69 Special Format Income Statement (see Profit & Loss Statement) Statement of Changes in Financial Position (SR) 2-42 to 2-45, 3-53 to 3-55 Beginning Balances 2-26 Create or Modify 2-42 to 2-45 Line Descriptions 2-43 Line Numbers 2-42 Line Options 2-43 to 2-44 Line Types 2-43 Spacing Characters 2-44 Statement of Income and Retained Earnings 1-73, 1-80 to 1-81, 1-92, 2-11, 3-35, 3-38 Straight-Line Depreciation 3-26 to 3-28 Subsidiary Schedules (see Group Accounts) Summarize Payroll on GL 1-76 Summarize Payroll on QA 1-76 Summary Journal Entry (ET) 1-46 to 1-48 Supplemental Reports (SR) 3-53 to 3-55 Suspense Account 1-3, 1-75 System Initialization (SI) 1-117 to 1-139 Correct Beginning Ledger Balances 1-139 Data Paths 1-123 to 1-124 Depreciation Maintenance 1-135 to 1-136 Financial Statement Print Options 1-120 to 1-121 Import/Export Parameters 1-124 to 1-125 Income Tax Rates and Limits, Define 1-136 to 1-137 Letter Heading Maintenance 1-131 Operator Preferences 1-118 to 1-120 Password Maintenance 1-130 Printer Maintenance 1-125 to 1-128 Quicken QuickPay Accounts; Define 1-137 to 1-139 Reset Batch Printer 1-128 Reset Retention Cycle 1-129 Revise Batch Descriptions 1-128 to 1-129 System Parameters 1-117 to 1-130 Text Maintenance 1-131 to 1-135 System Parameters (SI) 1-117 to 1-130 T Table of Contents (SI, TL) Copying 1-66 to 1-67 Creating 1-131 to 1-135 Printing 3-63 to 3-64, 3-65 Tax Code 2-26 Tax Interface Code 2-26 4 - Index

Index TCS Software 1-8 to 1-9, Appendix C Time-Tracker, Ledger 2-47 to 2-53 Edit Accumulated Time 2-51 Enter Amount to be Billed 2-49 to 2-50 Enter Bill Adjustments 2-51 to 2-52 Enter Collections 2-50 to 2-51 Query Accumulated Time 2-52 to 2-53 Query Transaction History 2-52 Setup 2-48 to 2-49 Time-Tracker Reports 2-53 Transaction Register (TR) 3-67 to 3-70 Departmental 3-68 to 3-70 Sorting Transactions 1-77 Transactions (see Enter Transactions) Transfer Files (see Accounting Transfer) Transmittal Letter (TL) 3-63 to 3-66 Address 1-96, 3-66 Assigning to Clients 1-95, 3-65 to 3-66 Bold 1-120 to 1-121, 1-126, 1-127, 1-133 Backing up 2-5 to 2-6 Copying 1-132 to 1-133 Creating 1-131 to 1-134 Deleting 1-133 Headings 1-131, 3-64, 3-65 to 3-66 Italics 1-120 to 1-121, 1-126, 1-127, 133 Path 1-123 Signature Lines 1-96, 1-134, 3-66 Underline 1-120 to 1-121, 1-126, 1-127, 1-133 Trend Analysis 1-73, 3-21 to 3-23, 3-37 to 3-39 Trial Balance (TB) 3-56 to 3-62 General Ledger 3-56 to 3-57 Income Tax Summary 3-61 to 3-62 Leadsheets 3-60 to 3-61 Trial Balance 3-57 to 3-59 Trial Balance Worksheet 3-59 to 3-60 Trial Balance Entry (ET) 1-44 to 1-46 W Withdrawal Accounts 1-80 to 1-81, 1-92, 3-23 Whole Dollar Rounding 1-73, 1-74, 3-20, 3-22, 3-24, 3-35, 3-37, 3-54 Worksheet Interface (WI) 1-140 to 1-141 Z Zero Balance Accounts, Printing 1-74, 1-77, 2-24 to 2-25, 3-57, 3-58, 3-59, 3-61 U Underline Printing 1-75, 1-120 to 1-121, 1-126, 1-127, 1-133 Underlines on Balance Sheet 1-72 Unposted Transactions (see Post Transactions, Transaction Register) User-Defined Reports 2-42 to 2-45, 3-39 to 3-41, 3-53 to 3-55 V Verify File Integrity (VF) 2-54 to 2-57 Magnetic Media Files 2-56 Master Files 2-56 Tax Code/Template Files 2-57 Transaction File 2-55 Verify File Integrity 2-54 to 2-55 Vertical Offset 3-33 Vertical Stretch 3-33 Index - 5